diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:31:48 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:31:48 -0700 |
| commit | 910099a529eec4443ee9917c691f545b5d6994f0 (patch) | |
| tree | 6f6c924031e6ad64cbe67d4b52a1c646b25f78a2 /old/shplk10h.htm | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old/shplk10h.htm')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/shplk10h.htm | 10682 |
1 files changed, 10682 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/shplk10h.htm b/old/shplk10h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5db793e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/shplk10h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,10682 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content= +"text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<title>BY SHEER PLUCK:</title> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of By Sheer Pluck, by G. A. Henty +#19 in our series by G. A. Henty + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: By Sheer Pluck + A Tale of the Ashanti War + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Release Date: July, 2005 [EBook #8576] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on July 25, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BY SHEER PLUCK *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + + +</pre> + +<h1>BY SHEER PLUCK:</h1> + +<br> +<h3>A TALE OF THE ASHANTI WAR.</h3> + +<br> +<br> +<h2>BY G. A. HENTY</h2> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + +<br> +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I: A FISHING EXCURSION</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II: A MAD DOG</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III: A TOUGH YARN</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV: A RISING TIDE</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V: ALONE IN THE WORLD</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI: THE FIRST STEP</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII: AN OLD FRIEND</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII: TO THE DARK +CONTINENT</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX: THE START INLAND</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X: LOST IN THE FOREST</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI: A HOSTILE TRIBE</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII: A NEGRO'S STORY</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII: A FUGITIVE +SLAVE</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV: A CHRISTIAN TOWN</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV: THE AMAZONS OF +DAHOMET</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI: CAPTIVES IN +COOMASSIE</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII: THE INVASION OF FANTI +LAND</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII: THE ATTACK ON +ELMINA</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX: THE TIDE TURNED</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XX">CHAPTER XX: THE WHITE TROOPS</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI">CHAPTER XXI: THE ADVANCE TO THE +PRAH</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII">CHAPTER XXII: THE BATTLE OF +AMOAFUL</a></h3> + +<h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII">CHAPTER XXIII: THE CAPTURE OF +COOMASSIE</a></h3> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I: A FISHING +EXCURSION</h1> + +<p>"Now, Hargate, what a fellow you are! I've been looking for +you everywhere. Don't you know it's the House against the Town +boys. It's lucky that the Town have got the first innings; they +began a quarter of an hour ago."</p> + +<p>"How tiresome!" Frank Hargate said. "I was watching a most +interesting thing here. Don't you see this little chaffinch nest +in the bush, with a newly hatched brood. There was a small black +snake threatening the nest, and the mother was defending it with +quivering wings and open beak. I never saw a prettier thing. I +sat quite still and neither of them seemed to notice me. Of +course I should have interfered if I had seen the snake getting +the best of it. When you came running up like a cart horse, the +snake glided away in the grass, and the bird flew off. Oh, dear! +I am sorry. I had forgotten all about the match."</p> + +<p>"I never saw such a fellow as you are, Hargate. Here's the +opening match of the season, and you, who are one of our best +bats, poking about after birds and snakes. Come along; Thompson +sent me and two or three other fellows off in all directions to +find you. We shall be half out before you're back. Wilson took +James's wicket the first ball."</p> + +<p>Frank Hargate leaped to his feet, and, laying aside for the +present all thoughts of his favorite pursuit, started off at a +run to the playing field. His arrival there was greeted with a +mingled chorus of welcome and indignation. Frank Hargate was, +next to Thompson the captain of the Town eleven, the best bat +among the home boarders. He played a steady rather than a +brilliant game, and was noted as a good sturdy sticker. Had he +been there, Thompson would have put him in at first, in order to +break the bowling of the House team. As it was, misfortunes had +come rapidly. Ruthven and Handcock were bowling splendidly, and +none of the Town boys were making any stand against them. +Thompson himself had gone in when the fourth wicket fell, and was +still in, although two wickets had since fallen, for only four +runs, and the seventh wicket fell just as Frank arrived, panting, +on the ground.</p> + +<p>"Confound you, Hargate!" Thompson shouted, "where have you +been? And not even in flannels yet."</p> + +<p>"I'm very sorry," Frank shouted back cheerfully, "and never +mind the flannels, for once. Shall I come in now?"</p> + +<p>"No," Thompson said. "You'd better get your wind first. Let +Fenner come in next."</p> + +<p>Fenner stayed in four overs, adding two singles as his share, +while Thompson put on a three and a two. Then Fenner was caught. +Thirty-one runs for eight wickets! Then Frank took the bat, and +walked to the ground. Thompson came across to him.</p> + +<p>"Look here, Hargate, you have made a nice mess of it, and the +game looks as bad as can be. Whatever you do, play carefully. +Don't let out at anything that comes straight. The great thing is +to bother their bowling a bit. They're so cocky now, that pretty +near every ball is straight on the wickets. Be content with +blocking for a bit, and Handcock will soon go off. He always gets +savage if his bowling is collared."</p> + +<p>Frank obeyed orders. In the next twenty minutes he only scored +six runs, all in singles, while Thompson, who was also playing +very carefully, put on thirteen. The game looked more hopeful for +the Town boys. Then there was a shout from the House, as +Thompson's middle wicket was sent flying. Childers, who was the +last of the team, walked out.</p> + +<p>"Now, Childers," Thompson said, "don't you hit at a ball. +You're safe to be bowled or caught if you do. Just lift your bat, +and block them each time. Now, Frank, it's your turn to score. +Put them on as fast as you can. It's no use playing carefully any +longer."</p> + +<p>Frank set to to hit in earnest. He had now got his eye well +in, and the stand which he and Thompson had made together, had +taken the sting out of the bowling. The ball which had taken +Thompson's wicket was the last of the over. Consequently the next +came to him. It was a little wide, and Frank, stepping out, drove +it for four. A loud shout rose from the Town boys. There had only +been one four scored before, during the innings. Off the next +ball Frank scored a couple, blocked the next, and drove the last +of the over past long leg for four. The next over Childers +strictly obeyed orders, blocking each ball. Then it was Frank's +turn again, and seven more went up on the board. They remained +together for just fifteen minutes, but during that time +thirty-one had been added to the score. Frank was caught at cover +point, having added twenty-eight since Thompson left him, the +other three being credited to Childers. The total was eighty-one +-- not a bad score in a school match.</p> + +<p>"Well, you've redeemed yourself," Thompson said, as Frank +walked to the tent. "You played splendidly, old fellow, when you +did come. If we do as well next innings we are safe. They're not +likely to average eighty. Now get on your wicket-keeping gloves. +Green and I will bowl."</p> + +<p>The House scored rapidly at first, and fifty runs were put on +with the loss of four wickets. Then misfortune fell upon them, +and the remaining six fell for nineteen. The next innings Frank +went in first, but was caught when the score stood at fifteen. +Thompson made fourteen, but the rest scored but badly, and the +whole were out for forty-eight.</p> + +<p>The House had sixty-one to get to win. Six wickets had fallen +for fifty-one runs, when Thompson put Childers on to bowl. The +change was a fortunate one. Ruthven's stumps were lowered at the +first ball. Handcock was caught off the second. The spirits of +the Town boys rose. There were but two wickets more, and still +ten runs to get to win. The House played cautiously now, and +overs were sent down without a run. Then off a ball from Childers +a four was scored, but the next ball leveled the outside stump. +Then by singles the score mounted up until a tremendous shout +from the House announced that the game was saved, sixty runs +being marked by the scorers. The next ball, the Town boys replied +even more lustily, for Childers ball removed the bails, and the +game ended in a tie. Both parties were equally well satisfied, +and declared that a better game had never been played at Dr. +Parker's. As soon as the game was over Frank, without waiting to +join in the general talk over the game, put on his coat and +waistcoat and started at a run for home.</p> + +<p>Frank Hargate was an only son. His mother lived in a tiny +cottage on the outskirts of Deal. She was a widow, her husband, +Captain Hargate, having died a year before. She had only her +pension as an officer's widow, a pittance that scarce sufficed +even for the modest wants of herself, Frank, and her little +daughter Lucy, now six years old.</p> + +<p>"I hope I have not kept tea waiting, mother," Frank said as he +ran in. "It is not my beetles and butterflies this time. We have +been playing a cricket match, and a first rate one it was. Town +boys against the House. It ended in a tie."</p> + +<p>"You are only a quarter of an hour late," his mother said, +smiling, "which is a great deal nearer being punctual than is +usually the case when you are out with your net. We were just +going to begin, for I know your habits too well to give you more +than a quarter of an hour's law."</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid I am horridly unpunctual," Frank said, "and yet, +mother, I never go out without making up my mind that I will be +in sharp to time. But somehow there is always something which +draws me away."</p> + +<p>"It makes no matter, Frank. If you are happy and amused I am +content, and if the tea is cold it is your loss, not ours. Now, +my boy, as soon as you have washed your hands we will have +tea."</p> + +<p>It was a simple meal, thick slices of bread and butter and +tea, for Mrs. Hargate could only afford to put meat upon the +table once a day, and even for that several times in the week +fish was substituted, when the weather was fine and the fishing +boats returned, when well laden. Frank fortunately cared very +little what he ate, and what was good enough for his mother was +good enough for him. In his father's lifetime things had been +different, but Captain Hargate had fallen in battle in New +Zealand. He had nothing besides his pay, and his wife and +children had lived with him in barracks until his regiment was +ordered out to New Zealand, when he had placed his wife in the +little cottage she now occupied. He had fallen in an attack on a +Maori pah, a fortnight after landing in New Zealand. He had +always intended Frank to enter the military profession, and had +himself directed his education so long as he was at home.</p> + +<p>The loss of his father had been a terrible blow for the boy, +who had been his constant companion when off duty. Captain +Hargate had been devoted to field sports and was an excellent +naturalist. The latter taste Frank had inherited from him. His +father had brought home from India -- where the regiment had been +stationed until it returned for its turn of home service four +years before he left New Zealand -- a very large quantity of +skins of birds which he had shot there. These he had stuffed and +mounted, and so dexterous was he at the work, so natural and +artistic were the groups of birds, that he was enabled to add +considerably to his income by sending these up to the shop of a +London naturalist. He had instructed Frank in his methods, and +had given him one of the long blowguns used by some of the hill +tribes in India. The boy had attained such dexterity in its use +that he was able with his clay pellets to bring down sitting +birds, however small, with almost unerring accuracy.</p> + +<p>These he stuffed and mounted, arranging them with a taste and +skill which delighted the few visitors at his mother's +cottage.</p> + +<p>Frank was ready to join in a game of football or cricket when +wanted, and could hold his own in either. But he vastly preferred +to go out for long walks with his blowgun, his net, and his +collecting boxes. At home every moment not required for the +preparation of his lessons was spent in mounting and arranging +his captures. He was quite ready to follow the course his father +proposed for him, and to enter the army. Captain Hargate had been +a very gallant officer, and the despatches had spoken most highly +of the bravery with which he led his company into action in the +fight in which he lost his life. Therefore Mrs. Hargate hoped +that Frank would have little difficulty in obtaining a commission +without purchase when the time for his entering the army +arrived.</p> + +<p>Frank's desire for a military life was based chiefly upon the +fact that it would enable him to travel to many parts of the +world, and to indulge his taste for natural history to the +fullest. He was but ten years old when he left India with the +regiment, but he had still a vivid recollection of the lovely +butterflies and bright birds of that country.</p> + +<p>His father had been at pains to teach him that a student of +natural history must be more than a mere collector, and that like +other sciences it must be methodically studied. He possessed an +excellent library of books upon the subject, and although Frank +might be ignorant of the name of any bird or insect shown to him +he could at once name the family and species.</p> + +<p>In the year which Frank had been at school at Dr. Parker's he +had made few intimate friends. His habits of solitary wandering +and studious indoor work had hindered his becoming the chum of +any of his schoolfellows, and this absence of intimacy had been +increased by the fact that the straitness of his mother's means +prevented his inviting any of his schoolfellows to his home. He +had, indeed, brought one or two of the boys, whose tastes lay in +the direction of his own, to the house, to show them his +collections of birds and insects. But he declined their +invitations to visit them, as he was unable to return their +hospitality, and was too proud to eat and drink at other fellows' +houses when he could not ask them to do the same at his own. It +was understood at Dr. Parker's that Frank Hargate's people were +poor, but it was known that his father had been killed in battle. +There are writers who depict boys as worshipers of wealth, and +many pictures have been drawn of the slights and indignities to +which boys, whose means are inferior to those of their +schoolfellows, are subject. I am happy to believe that this is a +libel. There are, it is true, toadies and tuft hunters among boys +as among men. That odious creature, the parasite of the Greek and +Latin plays, exists still, but I do not believe that a boy is one +whit the less liked, or is ever taunted with his poverty, +provided he is a good fellow. Most of the miseries endured by +boys whose pocket money is less abundant than that of their +fellows are purely self inflicted. Boys and men who are always on +the lookout for slights will, of course, find what they seek. But +the lad who is not ashamed of what is no fault of his own, who +frankly and manfully says, "I can't afford it," will not find +that he is in any way looked down upon by those of his +schoolfellows whose good opinion is in the smallest degree worth +having.</p> + +<p>Certainly this was so in the case of Frank Hargate. He was +never in the slightest degree ashamed of saying, "I can't afford +it;" and the fact that he was the son of an officer killed in +battle gave him a standing among the best in the school in spite +of his want of pocket money.</p> + +<p>Frank was friends with many of the fishermen, and these would +often bring him strange fish and sea creatures brought up in +their nets, instead of throwing them back into the sea.</p> + +<p>During the holidays he would sometimes go out with them for +twenty-four hours in their fishing-boats. His mother made no +objection to this, as she thought that the exercise and sea air +were good for his health, and that the change did him good. Frank +himself was so fond of the sea that he was half disposed to adopt +it instead of the army as a profession. But his mother was +strongly opposed to the idea, and won him to her way of thinking +by pointing out that although a sailor visits many ports he stays +long at none of them, and that in the few hours' leave he might +occasionally obtain he would be unable to carry out his favorite +pursuits.</p> + +<p>"Hargate," Ruthven, who was one of the oldest of the House +boys, and was about Frank's age, that is about fifteen years old, +said a few days after the match, "the Doctor has given Handcock +and Jones and myself leave to take a boat and go out this +afternoon. We mean to start soon after dinner, and shall take +some lines and bait with us. We have got leave till lockup, so we +shall have a long afternoon of it. Will you come with us?"</p> + +<p>"Thank you, Ruthven," Frank said; "I should like it very much, +but you know I'm short of pocket money, and I can't pay my share +of the boat, so I would rather leave it alone."</p> + +<p>"Oh, nonsense, Hargate!" Ruthven answered; "we know money is +not your strong point, but we really want you to go with us. You +can manage a boat better than any of us, and you will really +oblige us if you will go with us."</p> + +<p>"Oh, if you put it in that way," Frank said, "I shall be glad +to go with you; but I do not think," he went on, looking at the +sky, "that the weather looks very settled. However, if you do not +mind the chance of a ducking, I don't."</p> + +<p>"That's agreed then," Ruthven said; "will you meet us near the +pier at three o'clock?"</p> + +<p>"All right. I'll be punctual."</p> + +<p>At the appointed hour the four lads met on the beach. Ruthven +and his companions wanted to choose a light rowing boat, but +Frank strongly urged them to take a much larger and heavier one. +"In the first place," he said, "the wind is blowing off shore, +and although it's calm here it will be rougher farther out; and, +unless I'm mistaken, the wind is getting up fast. Besides this it +will be much more comfortable to fish from a good sized +boat."</p> + +<p>His comrades grumbled at the extra labor which the large boat +would entail in rowing. However, they finally gave in and the +boat was launched.</p> + +<p>"Look out, Master Hargate," the boatman said as they started; +"you'd best not go out too far, for the wind is freshening fast, +and we shall have, I think, a nasty night."</p> + +<p>The boys thought little of the warning, for the sky was bright +and blue, broken only by a few gauzy white clouds which streaked +it here and there. They rowed out about a mile, and then laying +in their oars, lowered their grapnel and began to fish. The sport +was good. The fish bit freely and were rapidly hauled on board. +Even Frank was so absorbed in the pursuit that he paid no +attention to the changing aspect of the sky, the increasing +roughness of the sea, or the rapidly rising wind.</p> + +<p>Suddenly a heavy drop or two of rain fell in the boat. All +looked up.</p> + +<p>"We are in for a squall," Frank exclaimed, "and no mistake. I +told you you would get a ducking, Ruthven."</p> + +<p>He had scarcely spoken when the squall was upon them. A deluge +of rain swept down, driven by a strong squall of wind.</p> + +<p>"Sit in the bottom of the boat," Frank said; "this is a +snorter."</p> + +<p>Not a word was said for ten minutes, long before which all +were drenched to the skin. With the rain a sudden darkness had +fallen, and the land was entirely invisible. Frank looked +anxiously towards the shore. The sea was getting up fast, and the +boat tugging and straining at the cord of the grapnel. He shook +his head. "It looks very bad," he said to himself. "If this +squall does not abate we are going to have a bad time of it."</p> + +<p>A quarter of an hour after it commenced the heavy downpour of +rain ceased, or rather changed into a driving sleet. It was still +extremely dark, a thick lead colored cloud overspread the sky. +Already the white horses showed how fast the sea was rising, and +the wind showed no signs of falling with the cessation of the +rain storm. The boat was laboring at her head rope and dipping +her nose heavily into the waves.</p> + +<p>"Look here, you fellows," Frank shouted, "we must take to the +oars. If the rope were a long one we might ride here, but you +know it little more than reached the ground when we threw it out. +I believe she's dragging already, and even if she isn't she would +pull her head under water with so short a rope when the sea gets +up. We'd better get out the oars and row to shore, if we can, +before the sea gets worse."</p> + +<p>The lads got up and looked round, and their faces grew pale +and somewhat anxious as they saw how threatening was the aspect +of the sea. They had four oars on board, and these were soon in +the water and the grapnel hauled up. A few strokes sufficed to +show them that with all four rowing the boat's head could not be +kept towards the shore, the wind taking it and turning the boat +broadside on.</p> + +<p>"This will never do," Frank said. "I will steer and you row, +two oars on one side and one on the other. I will take a spell +presently.</p> + +<p>"Row steadily, Ruthven," he shouted; "don't spurt. We have a +long row before us and must not knock ourselves up at the +beginning."</p> + +<p>For half an hour not a word was spoken beyond an occasional +cheery exhortation from Frank. The shore could be dimly seen at +times through the driving mist, and Frank's heart sank as he +recognized the fact that it was further off than it had been when +they first began to row. The wind was blowing a gale now, and, +although but two miles from shore, the sea was already rough for +an open boat.</p> + +<p>"Here, Ruthven, you take a spell now," he said.</p> + +<p>Although the rowers had from time to time glanced over their +shoulders, they could not, through the mist, form any idea of +their position. When Ruthven took the helm he exclaimed, "Good +gracious, Frank! the shore is hardly visible. We are being blown +out to sea."</p> + +<p>"I am afraid we are," Frank said; "but there is nothing to do +but to keep on rowing. The wind may lull or it may shift and give +us a chance of making for Ramsgate. The boat is a good sea boat, +and may keep afloat even if we are driven out to sea. Or if we +are missed from shore they may send the lifeboat out after us. +That is our best chance."</p> + +<p>In another quarter of an hour Ruthven was ready to take +another spell at the oar. "I fear," Frank shouted to him as he +climbed over the seat, "there is no chance whatever of making +shore. All we've got to do is to row steadily and keep her head +dead to wind. Two of us will do for that. You and I will row now, +and let Handcock and Jones steer and rest by turns. Then when we +are done up they can take our places."</p> + +<p>In another hour it was quite dark, save for the gray light +from the foaming water around. The wind was blowing stronger than +ever, and it required the greatest care on the part of the +steersman to keep her dead in the eye of the wind. Handcock was +steering now, and Jones lying at the bottom of the boat, where he +was sheltered, at least from the wind. All the lads were plucky +fellows and kept up a semblance of good spirits, but all in their +hearts knew that their position was a desperate one.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II: A MAD +DOG</h1> + +<p>"Don't you think, Hargate," Ruthven shouted in his ear, "we +had better run before it? It's as much as Handcock can do to keep +her head straight."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank shouted back, "if it were not for the Goodwins. +They lie right across ahead of us."</p> + +<p>Ruthven said no more, and for another hour he and Frank rowed +their hardest. Then Handcock and Jones took the oars. Ruthven lay +down in the bottom of the boat and Frank steered. After rowing +for another hour Frank found that he could no longer keep the +boat head to wind. Indeed, he could not have done so for so long +had he not shipped the rudder and steered the boat with an oar, +through a notch cut in the stern for the purpose. Already the +boat shipped several heavy seas, and Ruthven was kept hard at +work baling with a tin can in which they had brought out +bait.</p> + +<p>"Ruthven, we must let her run. Put out the other oar, we must +watch our time. Row hard when I give the word."</p> + +<p>The maneuver was safely accomplished, and in a minute the boat +was flying before the gale.</p> + +<p>"Keep on rowing," Frank said, "but take it easily. We must try +and make for the tail of the sands. I can see the lightship."</p> + +<p>Frank soon found that the wind was blowing too directly upon +the long line of sands to enable him to make the lightship. +Already, far ahead, a gray light seemed to gleam up, marking +where the sea was breaking over the dreaded shoal.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid it is no use," he said. "Now, boys, we had best, +each of us, say our prayers to God, and prepare to die bravely, +for I fear that there is no hope for us."</p> + +<p>There was silence in the boat for the next five minutes, as +the boys sat with their heads bent down. More than one choking +sob might have been heard, had the wind lulled, as they thought +of the dear ones at home. Suddenly there was a flash of light +ahead, and the boom of a gun directly afterwards came upon their +ears. Then a rocket soared up into the air.</p> + +<p>"There is a vessel on the sands," Frank exclaimed. "Let us +make for her. If we can get on board we shall have a better +chance than here."</p> + +<p>The boys again bent to their oars, and Frank tried to steer +exactly for the spot whence the rocket had gone up. Presently +another gun flashed out.</p> + +<p>"There she is," he said. "I can see her now against the line +of breakers. Take the oar again, Ruthven. We must bring up under +shelter of her lee."</p> + +<p>In another minute or two they were within a hundred yards of +the ship. She was a large vessel, and lay just at the edge of the +broken water. The waves, as they struck her, flew high above her +deck. As the boat neared her a bright light suddenly sprang up. +The ship was burning a blue light. Then a faint cheer was +heard.</p> + +<p>"They see us," Frank said. "They must think we are the +lifeboat. What a disappointment for them! Now, steady, lads, and +prepare to pull her round the instant we are under her stern. I +will go as near as I dare."</p> + +<p>Frank could see the people on deck watching the boat. They +must have seen now that she was not the lifeboat; but even in +their own danger they must have watched with intense interest the +efforts of the tiny boat, adrift in the raging sea, to reach +them. Frank steered the boat within a few yards of the stern. +Then Jones and Ruthven, who were both rowing the same side, +exerted themselves to the utmost, while Frank pushed with the +steering oar. A minute later, and they lay in comparatively still +water, under the lee of the ship. Two or three ropes were thrown +them, and they speedily climbed on board.</p> + +<p>"We thought you were the lifeboat at first," the captain said, +as they reached the deck; "but, of course, they cannot be here +for a couple of hours yet."</p> + +<p>"We were blown off shore, sir," Frank said, "and have been +rowing against the wind for hours."</p> + +<p>"Well, my lads," the captain said, "you have only prolonged +your lives for a few minutes, for she will not hold together +long."</p> + +<p>The ship, indeed, presented a pitiable appearance. The masts +had already gone, the bulwark to windward had been carried away, +and the hull lay heeled over at a sharp angle, her deck to +leeward being level with the water. The crew were huddled down +near the lee bulwarks, sheltered somewhat by the sharp slope of +the deck from the force of the wind. As each wave broke over the +ship, tons of water rushed down upon them. No more guns were +fired, for the lashing had broken and the gun run down to +leeward. Already there were signs that the ship would break up +ere long, and no hope existed that rescue could arrive in +time.</p> + +<p>Suddenly there was a great crash, and the vessel parted +amidships.</p> + +<p>"A few minutes will settle it now," the captain said. "God +help us all."</p> + +<p>At this moment there was a shout to leeward, which was +answered by a scream of joy from those on board the wreck, for +there, close alongside, lay the lifeboat, whose approach had been +entirely unseen. In a few minutes the fifteen men who remained of +the twenty-two, who had formed the crew of the wreck, and the +four boys, were on board her. A tiny sail was set and the boat's +head laid towards Ramsgate.</p> + +<p>"I am glad to see you, Master Hargate," the sailor who rowed +one of the stroke oars shouted. He was the man who had lent them +the boat. "I was up in the town looking after my wife, who is +sick, and clean forgot you till it was dark. Then I ran down and +found the boat hadn't returned, so I got the crew together and we +came out to look for you, though we had little hope of finding +you. It was lucky for you we did, and for the rest of them too, +for so it chanced that we were but half a mile away when the ship +fired her first gun, just as we had given you up and determined +to go back; so on we came straight here. Another ten minutes and +we should have been too late. We are making for Ramsgate now. We +could never beat back to Deal in this wind. I don't know as I +ever saw it blow much harder."</p> + +<p>These sentences were not spoken consecutively, but were +shouted out in the intervals between gusts of wind. It took them +two hours to beat back to Ramsgate, a signal having been made as +soon as they left the wreck to inform the lifeboat there and at +Broadstairs that they need not put out, as the rescue had been +already effected. The lads were soon put to bed at the sailors' +home, a man being at once despatched on horseback to Deal, to +inform those there of the arrival of the lifeboat, and of the +rescue of the four boys who had been blown to sea.</p> + +<p>Early next morning Frank and Handcock returned to Deal, the +other two lads being so exhausted by their fatigue and exposure +that the doctor said they had better remain in bed for another +twenty-four hours.</p> + +<p>It is impossible to describe the thankfulness and relief which +Mrs. Hargate experienced, when, about two in the morning, Dr. +Parker himself brought her news of the safety of her boy. She had +long given up all hope, for when the evening came on and Frank +had not returned, she had gone down to the shore. She learned +from the fishermen there that it was deemed impossible that the +boys could reach shore in face of the gale, and that although the +lifeboat had just put out in search of them, the chances of their +being found were, as she herself saw, faint indeed. She had +passed the hours which had intervened, in prayer, and was still +kneeling by her bedside, where little Lucy was unconsciously +sleeping, when Dr. Parker's knock was heard at the door. Fervent, +indeed, was her gratitude to God for the almost miraculous +preservation of her son's life, and then, overcome by the +emotions she had experienced, she sought her couch, and was still +asleep when, by the earliest train in the morning, Frank +returned.</p> + +<p>For some time the four boys were the heroes of the school. A +subscription was got up to pay for the lost boat, and close as +were Mrs. Hargate's means, she enabled Frank to subscribe his +share towards the fund. The incident raised Frank to a pinnacle +of popularity among his schoolfellows, for the three others were +unanimous in saying that it was his coolness and skill in the +management of the boat, which alone kept up their spirits, and +enabled them to keep her afloat during the gale, and to make the +wreck in safety.</p> + +<p>In the general enthusiasm excited by the event, Frank's +pursuits, which had hitherto found few followers, now became +quite popular in the school. A field club was formed, of which he +was elected president, and long rambles in the country in search +of insects and plants were frequently organized. Frank himself +was obliged, in the interests of the school, to moderate the zeal +of the naturalists, and to point out that cricket must not be +given up, as, if so large a number withdrew themselves from the +game, the school would suffer disaster in its various engagements +with other schools in the neighborhood. Consequently the rule was +made that members of the club were bound to be in the cricket +field on at least three days in the week, including one half +holiday, while they were free to ramble in the country on other +days. This wise regulation prevented the "naturalists" from +becoming unpopular in the school, which would assuredly have been +the case had they entirely absented themselves from cricket.</p> + +<p>One Saturday afternoon Frank started with a smaller boy, who +was one of his most devoted followers, for a long country walk. +Frank carried his blowgun, and a butterfly net, Charlie Goodall a +net of about a foot in depth, made of canvas, mounted on a stout +brass rim, and strong stick, for the capture of water beetles. +Their pockets bulged with bottles and tin boxes for the carriage +of their captured prey.</p> + +<p>They had passed through Eastry, a village four miles from +Deal, when Frank exclaimed, "There is a green hairstreak. The +first I've seen this year. I have never caught one before."</p> + +<p>Cautiously approaching the butterfly, who was sunning himself +on the top of a thistle, Frank prepared to strike, when it +suddenly mounted and flitted over a hedge. In a moment the boys +had scrambled through the gap and were in full pursuit. The +butterfly flitted here and there, sometimes allowing the boys to +approach within a few feet and then flitting away again for fifty +yards without stopping. Heedless where they were going, the boys +pursued, till they were startled by a sudden shout close to +them.</p> + +<p>"You young rascals, how dare you run over my wheat?"</p> + +<p>The boys stopped, and Frank saw what, in his excitement, he +had not hitherto heeded, that he was now running in a field of +wheat, which reached to his knee.</p> + +<p>"I am very sorry, sir," he said. "I was so excited than I +really did not see where I was going."</p> + +<p>"Not see!" shouted the angry farmer. "You young rascal, I'll +break every bone in your body," and he flourished a heavy stick +as he spoke.</p> + +<p>Charlie Goodall began to cry.</p> + +<p>"I have no right to trespass on your wheat, sir," Frank said +firmly; "but you have no right to strike us. My name is Frank +Hargate. I belong to Dr. Parker's school at Deal, and if you will +say what damage I have caused, I will pay for it."</p> + +<p>"You shall pay for it now," shouted the farmer, as he advanced +with uplifted stick.</p> + +<p>Frank slipped three or four of his clay bullets into his +mouth.</p> + +<p>"Leave us alone or it will be worse for you," he said as he +raised the blowgun to his mouth.</p> + +<p>The farmer advanced, and Frank sent a bullet with all his +force, and with so true an aim that he struck the farmer on the +knuckles. It was a sharp blow, and the farmer, with a cry of pain +and surprise, dropped the stick.</p> + +<p>"Don't come a step nearer," Frank shouted. "If you do, I will +aim at your eye next time," and he pointed the threatening tube +at the enraged farmer's face.</p> + +<p>"I'll have the law of you, you young villain. I'll make you +smart for this."</p> + +<p>"You can do as you like about that," Frank said. "I have only +struck you in self defense, and have let you off easily. Come +along, Charlie, let's get out of this."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes they were again on the road, the farmer +making no attempt to follow them, but determined in his mind to +drive over the next morning to Deal to take out a summons against +them for trespass and assault. The lads proceeded silently along +the road. Frank was greatly vexed with himself at his +carelessness in running over half grown wheat, and was meditating +how he could pay the fine without having to ask his mother. He +determined upon his return to carry some of his cases of stuffed +birds down to a shop in the town, and he felt sure that he could +get enough for these to pay for any damage which could have been +inflicted, with a fine for trespassing, for he had seen stuffed +birds exposed in the windows for sale, which were, he was sure, +very inferior to his own both in execution and lifelike +interest.</p> + +<p>After proceeding a few hundred yards along the road they met a +pretty little girl of seven or eight years old walking along +alone. Frank scarcely glanced at her, for at the moment he heard +a shouting in the distance and saw some men running along the +road. For a moment he thought that the farmer had despatched some +of his men to stop him, but instantly dismissed the idea, as they +were coming from the opposite direction and could by no +possibility have heard what had happened. They were lost sight of +by a dip in the road, and as they disappeared, an object was seen +on the road on the near side of the dip.</p> + +<p>"It is a dog," Frank said. "What can they be shouting at?"</p> + +<p>The dog was within fifty yards of them when the men again +appeared from the dip and recommenced shouting. Frank could now +hear what they said.</p> + +<p>"Mad dog! mad dog!"</p> + +<p>"Get through the hedge, Charlie, quick," Frank cried. "Here, I +will help you over, never mind the thorns."</p> + +<p>The hedge was low and closely kept, and Frank, bundling his +comrade over it, threw himself across and looked round. The dog +was within ten yards of them, and Frank saw that the alarm was +well founded. The dog was a large crossbred animal, between a +mastiff and a bulldog. Its hair was rough and bristling. It came +along with its head down and foam churning from its mouth. Frank +looked the other way and gave a cry. Yet twenty yards off, in the +middle of the road, stood the child. She, too, had heard the +shouts, and had paused to see what was the matter. She had not +taken the alarm, but stood unsuspicious of danger, watching, not +the dog, but the men in the distance.</p> + +<p>Frank placed the blowgun to his mouth, and in a moment his +pellet struck the animal smartly on the side of the head. It gave +a short yelp and paused. Another shot struck it, and then Frank, +snatching the water net from Charlie, threw himself over the +hedge, and placed himself between the child and the dog just as +the latter, with a savage growl, rushed at him.</p> + +<p>Frank stood perfectly cool, and as the animal rushed forward, +thrust the net over its head; the ring was but just large enough +to allow its head to enter. Frank at once sprang forward, and +placing himself behind the dog kept a strain upon the stick, so +retaining the mouth of the net tightly on his neck. The animal at +first rushed forward dragging Frank after him. Then he stopped, +backed, and tried to withdraw his head from the encumbrance which +blinded him. Frank, however, had no difficulty in retaining the +canvas net in its place, until the men, who were armed with +pitchforks, ran up and speedily despatched the unfortunate +animal.</p> + +<p>"That's bravely done, young master," one of them said; "and +you have saved missy's life surely. The savage brute rushed into +the yard and bit a young colt and a heifer, and then, as we came +running out with forks, he took to the road again. We chased 'um +along, not knowing who we might meet, and it gived us a rare turn +when we saw the master's Bessy standing alone in the road, wi' +nout between her and the dog. Where have you been, Miss +Bessy?"</p> + +<p>"I've been to aunt's," she said, "and she gave me some +strawberries and cream, and it's wicked of you to kill the poor +dog."</p> + +<p>"Her aunt's farm lies next to master's," the man explained; +"and little miss often goes over there.</p> + +<p>"The dog was mad, missy, and if it hadn't been for young +master here, it would have killed you as safe as eggs. Won't you +come back to the farm, sir? Master and mistress would be main +glad to thank you for having saved missy's life."</p> + +<p>"No, thank you," Frank said; "we are late now and must be +going on our way. I am very glad I happened to be here at the +time;" so saying Frank and Charlie proceeded on their way to +Deal.</p> + +<p>On reaching home he at once picked out four of his best cases +of stuffed birds. The cases he had constructed himself, for his +father had encouraged him to depend upon himself for his +amusements. He had asked Charlie to come round to help him to +carry the cases, and with these he proceeded to a shop where he +had seen such things offered for sale.</p> + +<p>"And you really did these yourself?" the man said in surprise. +"They are beautifully done. Quite pictures, I call them. It is a +pity that they are homely birds. There is no great sale for such +things here. I cannot give you more than five shillings each, but +if you had them in London they would be worth a great deal +more."</p> + +<p>Frank gladly accepted the offer, and feeling sure that the +pound would cover the damage done and the fine, which might be +five shillings apiece for trespassing, went home in good spirits. +The next morning the doctor was called out in the middle of +school, and presently returned accompanied by the farmer with +whom they had had the altercation on the previous day. Frank felt +his cheeks flush as he anticipated a severe reprimand before the +whole school.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Gregson," the doctor said, "tells me that two of my boys +were out near his place at Eastry yesterday. One of them gave him +his name, which he has forgotten."</p> + +<p>"It was I, sir," Frank said rising in his place; "I was there +with Goodall. We ran on Mr. Gregson's ground after a butterfly. +It was my fault, sir, for, of course, Goodall went where I did. +We ran among his wheat, and I really did not notice where we were +going till he called to us. I was wrong, of course, and am ready +to pay for any damage we may have caused."</p> + +<p>"You are welcome," the farmer said, "to trample on my wheat +for the rest of your born days. I haven't come over here to talk +about the wheat, though I tell you fairly I'd minded to do so. +I've come over here, Dr. Parker, me and my missus who's outside, +to thank this young gentleman for having saved the life of my +little daughter Bessy. She was walking along the road when a mad +dog, a big brute of a mastiff, who came, I hear, from somewhere +about Canterbury, and who has bit two boys on the road, to say +nothing of other dogs and horses and such like; he came along the +road, he were close to my Bess, and she stood there all alone. +Some of my men with pitchforks were two hundred yards or so +behind; but law, they could have done nothing! when this young +gentleman here jumped all of a sudden over a hedge and put +himself between the dog and my Bess. The dog, he rushed at him; +but what does he do but claps a bag he'd got at the end of a +stick over the brute's head, and there he holds him tight till +the men comes up and kills him with their forks.</p> + +<p>"Young gentleman," he said, stepping up to Frank and holding +out his hand, "I owe my child's life to you. There are not many +men who would have thrown themselves in the way of a mad dog, for +the sake of a child they knew nothing of. I thank you for it with +all my heart. God bless you, sir. Now, boys, you give three +cheers with me for your schoolmate, for you've got a right to be +proud of him."</p> + +<p>Three such thundering cheers as those which arose had never +been heard within the limits of Dr. Parker's school from the day +of its foundation. Seeing that farther work could not be expected +from them after this excitement, Dr. Parker gave the boys a +holiday for the rest of the day, and they poured out from the +schoolroom, shouting and delighted, while Frank was taken off to +the parlor to be thanked by Mrs. Gregson. The farmer closed his +visit by inviting Frank, with as many of his schoolfellows as he +liked -- the whole school if they would come, the more the better +-- to come over to tea on the following Saturday afternoon, and +he promised them as much strawberries and cream as they could +eat. The invitation was largely accepted, and the boys all agreed +that a jollier meal they never sat down to than that which was +spread on tables in the farmer's garden. The meal was called tea, +but it might have been a dinner, for the tables were laden with +huge pies, cold chicken and duck, hams, and piles of cakes and +tarts of all sorts. Before they started for home, late in the +evening, syllabub and cake were handed round, and the boys +tramped back to Deal in the highest of glee at the entertainment +they had received from the hospitable farmer and his wife.</p> + +<p>Great fun had been caused after tea by the farmer giving a +humorous relation of the battle with which his acquaintance with +Frank had commenced, and especially at the threat of Frank to +send a bullet into his eye if he interfered with him. When they +left, a most cordial invitation was given to Frank to come over, +with any friend he liked to bring with him, and have tea at the +Oaks Farm whenever he chose to do so.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III: A TOUGH +YARN</h1> + +<p>"You had a close shave the other night," one of the boatmen +remarked to Frank, as a few days after the adventure he strolled +down with Ruthven and Handcock to talk to the boatman whose boat +had been lost, "a very narrow shave. I had one out there myself +when I was just about your age, nigh forty years ago. I went out +for a sail with my father in his fishing boat, and I didn't come +back for three years. That was the only long voyage I ever went. +I've been sticking to fishing ever since."</p> + +<p>"How was it you were away three years?" Handcock asked, "and +what was the adventure? Tell us about it."</p> + +<p>"Well, it's rather a long yarn," the boatman said.</p> + +<p>"Well, your best plan, Jack," Ruthven said, putting his hand +in his pocket and bringing out sixpence, "will be for you to go +across the road and wet your whistle before you begin."</p> + +<p>"Thank ye, young gentleman. I will take three o' grog and an +ounce of 'bacca."</p> + +<p>He went across to the public house, and soon returned with a +long clay in his hand. Then he sat down on the shingle with his +back against a boat, and the boys threw themselves down close to +him.</p> + +<p>"Now," he began, when he had filled his pipe with great +deliberation and got it fairly alight, "this here yarn as I'm +going to tell you ain't no gammon. Most of the tales which gets +told on the beach to visitors as comes down here and wants to +hear of sea adventures is just lies from beginning to end. Now, I +ain't that sort, leastways, I shouldn't go to impose upon young +gents like you as ha' had a real adventure of your own, and +showed oncommon good pluck and coolness too. I don't say, mind +ye, that every word is just gospel. My mates as ha' known me from +a boy tells me that I've 'bellished the yarn since I first told +it, and that all sorts of things have crept in which wasn't there +first. That may be so. When a man tells a story a great many +times, naturally he can't always tell it just the same, and he +gets so mixed up atween what he told last and what he told first +that he don't rightly know which was which when he wants to tell +it just as it really happened. So if sometimes it appears to you +that I'm steering rather wild, just you put a stopper on and +bring me up all standing with a question."</p> + +<p>There was a quiet humor about the boatman's face, and the boys +winked at each other as much as to say that after such an +exordium they must expect something rather staggering. The +boatman took two or three hard whiffs at his pipe and then +began.</p> + +<p>"It was towards the end of September in 1832, that's just +forty years ago now, that I went out with my father and three +hands in the smack, the <i>Flying Dolphin</i>. I'd been at sea +with father off and on ever since I was about nine years old, and +a smarter boy wasn't to be found on the beach. The <i>Dolphin</i> +was a good sea boat, but she wasn't, so to say, fast, and I +dunno' as she was much to look at, for the old man wasn't the +sort of chap to chuck away his money in paint or in new sails as +long as the old ones could be pieced and patched so as to hold +the wind. We sailed out pretty nigh over to the French coast, and +good sport we had. We'd been out two days when we turned her head +homewards. The wind was blowing pretty strong, and the old man +remarked, he thought we was in for a gale. There was some talk of +our running in to Calais and waiting till it had blown itself +out, but the fish might have spoil before the Wind dropped, so we +made up our minds to run straight into Dover and send the fish up +from there. The night came on wild and squally, and as dark as +pitch. It might be about eight bells, and I and one of the other +hands had turned in, when father gave a sudden shout down the +hatch, 'All hands on deck.' I was next to the steps and sprang up +'em. Just as I got to the top something grazed my face. I caught +at it, not knowing what it was, and the next moment there was a +crash, and the <i>Dolphin</i> went away from under my feet. I +clung for bare life, scarce awake yet nor knowing what had +happened. The next moment I was under water. I still held on to +the rope and was soon out again. By this time I was pretty well +awake to what had happened. A ship running down channel had +walked clean over the poor old <i>Dolphin</i>, and I had got hold +of the bobstay. It took me some time to climb up on to the +bowsprit, for every time she pitched I went under water. However, +I got up at last and swarmed along the bowsprit and got on board. +There was a chap sitting down fast asleep there. I walked aft to +the helmsman. Two men were pacing up and down in front of him. +'You're a nice lot, you are,' I said, 'to go running down Channel +at ten knots an hour without any watch, a-walking over ships and +a-drowning of seamen. I'll have the law of ye, see if I +don't.'</p> + +<p>"'Jeerusalem!' said one, 'who have we here?'</p> + +<p>"'My name is Jack Perkins,' says I, 'and I'm the sole +survivor, as far as I knows, of the smack, the <i>Flying +Dolphin</i>, as has been run down by this craft and lost with all +hands.'</p> + +<p>"'Darn the <i>Flying Dolphin</i>, and you too,' says the man, +and he begins to walk up and down the deck a-puffn' of a long +cigar as if nothing had happened.</p> + +<p>"'Oh, come,' says I, 'this won't do. Here you've been and run +down a smack, drowned father and the other three hands, and your +lookout fast asleep, and you does nothing.'</p> + +<p>"'I suppose,' said the captain, sarcastic, 'you want me to +jump over to look for 'em. You want me to heave the ship to in +this gale and to invite yer father perlitely to come on board. +P'raps you'd like a grapnel put out to see if I couldn't hook the +smack and bring her up again. Perhaps you'd like to be chucked +overboard yourself. Nobody asked you to come on board, nobody +wanted your company. I reckon the wisest thing you can do is to +go for'ard and turn in.' There didn't seem much for me to do +else, so I went forward to the forecastle. There most of the +hands were asleep, but two or three were sitting up yarning. I +told 'em my story and what this captain had said.</p> + +<p>"'He's a queer hand is the skipper,' one of 'em said, 'and +hasn't got a soft place about him. Well, my lad, I'm sorry for +what's happened, but talking won't do it any good. You've got a +long voyage before you, and you'd best turn in and make yourself +comfortable for it.'</p> + +<p>"'I ain't going a long voyage,' says I, beginning to wipe my +eye, 'I wants to be put ashore at the first port.'</p> + +<p>"'Well, my lad, I daresay the skipper will do that, but as +we're bound for the coast of Chili from Hamburg, and ain't likely +to be there for about five months, you've got, as I said, a long +voyage before you. If the weather had been fine the skipper might +have spoken some ship in the Channel, and put you on board, but +before the gale's blown out we shall be hundreds of miles at sea. +Even if it had been fine I don't suppose the skipper would have +parted with you, especially if you told him the watch was asleep. +He would not care next time he entered an English port to have a +claim fixed on his ship for the vally of the smack.'</p> + +<p>"I saw what the sailor said was like enough, and blamed myself +for having let out about the watch. However, there was no help +for it, and I turned into an empty bunk and cried myself to +sleep. What a voyage that was, to be sure! The ship was a Yankee +and so was the master and mates. The crew were of all sorts, +Dutch, and Swedes, and English, a Yank or two, and a sprinklin' +of niggers. It was one of those ships they call a hell on earth, +and cussing and kicking and driving went on all day. I hadn't no +regular place give me, but helped the black cook, and pulled at +ropes, and swabbed the decks, and got kicked and cuffed all +round. The skipper did not often speak to me, but when his eye +lighted on me he gave an ugly sort of look, as seemed to say, +'You'd better ha' gone down with the others. You think you're +going to report the loss of the smack, and to get damages against +the <i>Potomac</i>, do you? we shall see.' The crew were a rough +lot, but the spirit seemed taken out of 'em by the treatment they +met with. It was a word and a blow with the mates, and they would +think no more of catching up a handspike and stretching a man +senseless on the deck than I should of killing a fly. There was +two or three among 'em of a better sort than the others. The best +of 'em was the carpenter, an old Dutchman. 'Leetle boy,' he used +to say to me, 'you keep yourself out of the sight of de skipper. +Bad man dat. Me much surprise if you get to de end of dis voyage +all right. You best work vera hard and give him no excuse to hit +you. If he do, by gosh, he kill you, and put down in de log, Boy +killed by accident.'</p> + +<p>"I felt that this was so myself, and I did my work as well as +I could. One day, however, when we were near the line I happened +to upset a bucket with some tar. The captain was standing close +by.</p> + +<p>"'You young dog,' he said, 'you've done that a purpose,' and +before I could speak he caught up the bucket by the handle and +brought it down on my head with all his might. The next thing I +remember was, I was lying in a bunk in the forecastle. Everything +looked strange to me, and I couldn't raise my head. After a time +I made shift to turn it round, and saw old Jans sitting on a +chest mending a jacket. I called him, but my voice was so low I +hardly seemed to hear it myself.</p> + +<p>"'Ah, my leetle boy!' he said, 'I am glad to hear you speak +again. Two whole weeks you say nothing except talk nonsense.'</p> + +<p>"'Have I been ill?' I asked.</p> + +<p>"'You haf been vera bad,' he said. 'De captain meant to kill +you, I haf no doubt, and he pretty near do it. After he knock you +down he said you dead. He sorry for accident, not mean to hit you +so hard, but you dead and better be tossed overboard at once. De +mates they come up and take your hands and feet. Den I insist dat +I feel your wrist. Two or three of us dey stood by me. Captain he +vera angry, say we mutinous dogs. I say not mutinous, but wasn't +going to see a boy who was only stunned thrown overboard. We say +if he did dat we make complaint before consul when we get to +port. De skipper he cuss and swear awful. Howebber we haf our way +and carry you here. You haf fever and near die. Tree days after +we bring you here de captain he swear you shamming and comed to +look at you hisself, but he see that it true and tink you going +to die. He go away wid smile on his face. Every day he ask if you +alive, and give grunt when I say yes. Now you best keep vera +quiet. You no talk 'cept when no one else here but me. Other +times lie wid your face to the side and your eyes shut. Best keep +you here as long as we can, de longer de better. He make you come +on deck and work as soon as he think you strong enough to stand. +Best get pretty strong before you go out.'</p> + +<p>"For another three weeks I lay in my bunk. I only ate a little +gruel when others were there, but when the skipper was at dinner +Jans would bring me strong soup and meat from the caboose. The +captain came several times and shook me and swore I was shamming, +but I only answered in a whisper and seemed as faint as a girl. +All this time the <i>Potomac</i> was making good way, and was +running fast down the coast of South America. The air was getting +cool and fresh.</p> + +<p>"'I tink,' Jans said one evening to me, 'dat dis not go on +much much longer. De crew getting desperate. Dey talk and mutter +among demselves. Me thinks we have trouble before long.'</p> + +<p>"The next day one of the mates came in with a bucket of water. +'There! you skulking young hound,' he said as he threw it over +me; 'you'd best get out, or the skipper will come and rouse you +up himself.'</p> + +<p>"I staggered on to the floor. I had made up my mind to sham +weak, but I did not need to pretend at first, for having been six +weeks in bed, I felt strange and giddy when I got up. I slipped +on my clothes and went out on deck, staggered to the bulwarks and +held on. The fresh air soon set me straight, and I felt that I +was pretty strong again. However, I pretended to be able to +scarce stand, and, holding on by the bulwark, made my way +aft.</p> + +<p>"'You young dog,' the skipper said, 'you've been shamming for +the last six weeks. I reckon I'll sharpen you up now,' and he hit +me a heavy blow with a rattan he held in his hand. There was a +cry of 'Shame!' from some of the men. As quick as thought the +skipper pulled a pistol from his pocket.</p> + +<p>"'Who cried "Shame"?' he asked looking round.</p> + +<p>"No one answered. Still holding the pistol in his hand he gave +me several more cuts, and then told me to swab the deck. I did +it, pretending all the time I was scarce strong enough to keep my +feet. Then I made my way forward and sat down against the +bulwark, as if nigh done up, till night came. That night as I lay +in my bunk I heard the men talking in whispers together. I judged +from what they said that they intended to wait for another week, +when they expected to enter Magellan Straits, and then to attack +and throw the officers overboard. Nothing seemed settled as to +what they would do afterwards. Some were in favor of continuing +the voyage to port, and there giving out that the captain and +officers had been washed overboard in a storm; when, if all stood +true to each other, the truth could never be known, although +suspicions might arise. The others, however, insisted that you +never could be sure of every one, and that some one would be sure +to peach. They argued in favor of sailing west and beaching the +ship on one of the Pacific islands, where they could live +comfortably and take wives among the native women. If they were +ever found they could then say that the ship was blown out of her +course and wrecked there, and that the captain and officers had +been drowned or killed by the natives. It seemed to me that this +party were the strongest. For the next week I was thrashed and +kicked every day and had I been as weak as I pretended to be, I'm +sure they would have killed me. However, thanks to the food Jans +brought me, for I was put on bread and water, I held on. At last +we entered the straits. The men were very quiet that day, and the +captain in a worse temper than usual. I did not go to sleep, and +turned out at the midnight watch, for I was made to keep watch +although I was on duty all day. As the watch came in I heard them +say to the others, 'In ten minutes' time.' Presently I saw them +come out, and joining the watch on deck they went aft quietly in +a body. They had all got handspikes in their hands. Then there +was a rush. Two pistol shots were fired, and then there was a +splash, and I knew that the officer on watch was done for. Then +they burst into the aft cabins. There were pistol shots and +shouts, and for three or four minutes the fight went on. Then all +was quiet. Then they came up on deck again and I heard three +splashes, that accounted for the captain and the two other mates. +I thought it safe now to go aft. I found that six of the men had +been killed. These were thrown overboard, and then the crew got +at the spirit stores and began to drink. I looked about for Jans, +and found him presently sitting on the deck by the bulwark.</p> + +<p>"'Ah, my leetle boy!' he said, 'you have just come in time. I +have been shot through the body. I was not in de fight, but was +standing near when dey rushed at de officer on watch. De first +pistol he fire missed de man he aim at and hit me. Well, it was +shust as well. I am too old to care for living among de black +peoples, and I did not want a black wife at all. So matters haf +not turned out so vera bad. Get me some water.'</p> + +<p>"I got him some, but in five minutes the poor old Dutchman was +dead. There was no one on deck. All were shouting and singing in +the captain's cabin, so I went and turned in forward. Morning was +just breaking when I suddenly woke. There was a great light, and +running on deck I saw the fire pouring out from the cabin aft. I +suppose they had all drunk themselves stupid and had upset a +light, and the fire had spread and suffocated them all. Anyhow, +there were none of them to be seen. I got hold of a water keg and +placed it in a boat which luckily hung out on its davits, as Jans +had, the day before, been calking a seam in her side just above +the water's edge. I made a shift to lower it, threw off the +falls, and getting out the oars, rowed off. I lay by for some +little time, but did not see a soul on deck. Then, as I had +nowhere particular to go, I lay down and slept. On getting up I +found that I had drifted two or three miles from the ship, which +was now a mere smoking shell, the greater part being burnt to the +Water's edge. Two miles to the north lay the land, and getting +out an oar at the stern I sculled her to shore. I suppose I had +been seen, or that the flames of the ship had called down the +people, for there they were in the bay, and such a lot of +creatures I never set eyes on. Men and women alike was pretty +nigh naked, and dirt is no name for them. Though I was but a boy +I was taller than most. They came round me and jabbered and +jabbered till I was nigh deafened. Over and over again they +pointed to the ship. I thought they wanted to know whether I +belonged to it, but it couldn't have been that, because when I +nodded a lot of 'em jumped into some canoes which was lying +ashore, and taking me with them paddled off to the ship. I +suppose they really wanted to know if they could have what they +could find. That wasn't much, but it seemed a treasure to them. +There was a lot of burned beams floating about alongside, and all +of these which had iron or copper bolts or fastenings they took +in tow and rowed ashore. We hadn't been gone many hundred yards +from the vessel when she sunk. Well, young gentlemen, for upwards +of two years I lived with them critturs. My clothes soon wore +out, and I got to be as naked and dirty as the rest of 'em. They +were good hands at fishing, and could spear a fish by the light +of a torch wonderful. In other respects they didn't seem to have +much sense. They lived, when I first went there, in holes +scratched in the side of a hill, but I taught 'em to make huts, +making a sort of ax out of the iron saved. In summer they used to +live in these, but in winter, when it was awful cold, we lived in +the holes, which were a sight warmer than the huts. Law, what a +time that was! I had no end of adventures with wild beasts. The +way the lions used to roar and the elephants --"</p> + +<p>"I think, Jack," Ruthven interrupted, "that this must be one +of the embellishments which have crept in since you first began +telling the tale. I don't think I should keep it in if I were +you, because the fact that there are neither lions or elephants +in South America throws a doubt upon the accuracy of this portion +of your story."</p> + +<p>"It may be, sir," the sailor said, with a twinkle of his eyes, +"that the elephants and lions may not have been in the first +story. Now I think of it, I can't recall that they were; but, you +see, people wants to know all about it. They ain't satisfied when +I tell 'em that I lived two years among these chaps. They wants +to know how I passed my time, and whether there were any wild +beasts, and a lot of such like questions, and, in course, I must +answer them. So then, you see, naturally, 'bellishments creeps +in; but I did live there for two years, that's gospel truth, and +I did go pretty nigh naked, and in winter was pretty near starved +to death over and over again. When the ground was too hard to dig +up roots, and the sea was too rough for the canoes to put out, it +went hard with us, and very often we looked more like living +skelingtons than human beings. Every time a ship came in sight +they used to hurry me away into the woods. I suppose they found +me useful, and didn't want to part with me. At last I got +desperate, and made up my mind I'd make a bolt whatever came of +it. They didn't watch me when there were no ships near. I suppose +they thought there was nowhere for me to run to, so one night I +steals down to the shore, gets into a canoe, puts in a lot of +roots which I had dug up and hidden away in readiness, and so +makes off. I rowed hard all night, for I knew they would be after +me when they found I had gone. Them straits is sometimes miles +and miles across; at other times not much more than a ship's +length, and the tide runs through 'em like a mill race. I had +chosen a time when I had the tide with me, and soon after morning +I came to one of them narrow places. I should like to have +stopped here, because it would have been handy for any ship as +passed; but the tide run so strong, and the rocks were so steep +on both sides, that I couldn't make a landing. Howsomdever, +directly it widened out, I managed to paddle into the back water +and landed there. Well, gents, would you believe me, if there +wasn't two big allygaters sitting there with their mouths open +ready to swallow me, canoe and all, when I came to shore."</p> + +<p>"No, Jack, I'm afraid we can't believe that. We would if we +could, you know, but alligators are not fond of such cold weather +as you'd been having, nor do they frequent the seashore."</p> + +<p>"Ah, but this, you see, was a straits, Master Ruthven, just a +narrow straits, and I expect the creatures took it for a +river."</p> + +<p>"No, no, Jack, we can't swallow the alligators, any more than +they could swallow you and your canoe."</p> + +<p>"Well," the sailor said with a sigh, "I won't say no more +about the allygaters. I can't rightly recall when they came into +the story. Howsomdever, I landed, you can believe that, you +know."</p> + +<p>"Oh yes, we can quite believe, Jack, that, if you were there, +in that canoe, in that back water, with the land close ahead, you +did land."</p> + +<p>The sailor looked searchingly at Ruthven and then +continued:</p> + +<p>"I hauled the canoe up and hid it in some bushes, and it were +well I did, for a short time afterwards a great --" and he +paused. "Does the hippypotybus live in them ere waters, young +gents?"</p> + +<p>"He does not, Jack," Ruthven said.</p> + +<p>"Then it's clear," the sailor said, "that it wasn't a +hippypotybus. It must have been a seal."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it might have been a seal," Ruthven said. "What did he +do?"</p> + +<p>"Well he just took a look at me, gents, winked with one eye, +as much as to say, 'I see you,' and went down again. There warn't +nothing else as he could do, was there?"</p> + +<p>"It was the best thing he could do anyhow," Ruthven said.</p> + +<p>"Well, gents, I lived there for about three weeks, and then a +ship comes along, homeward bound, and I goes out and hails her. +At first they thought as I was a native as had learned to speak +English, and it wasn't till they'd boiled me for three hours in +the ship's copper as they got at the color of my skin, and could +believe as I was English. So I came back here and found the old +woman still alive, and took to fishing again; but it was weeks +and weeks before I could get her or any one else to believe as I +was Jack Perkins. And that's all the story, young gents. +Generally I tells it a sight longer to the gents as come down +from London in summer; but, you see, I can't make much out of it +when ye won't let me have 'bellishments."</p> + +<p>"And how much of it is true altogether, Jack?" Frank asked. +"Really how much?"</p> + +<p>"It's all true as I have told you, young masters," the boatman +said. "It were every bit true about the running down of the +smack, and me being nearly killed by the skipper, and the mutiny, +and the burning of the vessel, and my living for a long time -- +no, I won't stick to the two years, but it might have been three +weeks, with the natives before a ship picked me up. And that's +good enough for a yarn, ain't it?"</p> + +<p>"Quite good enough, Jack, and we're much obliged to you; but I +should advise you to drop the embellishments in future."</p> + +<p>"It ain't no use, Master Hargate, they will have +'bellishments, and if they will have 'em, Jack Perkins isn't the +man to disappint 'em; and, Lord bless you, sir, the stiffer I +pitches it in the more liberal they is with their tips. Thank ye +kindly all round, gentlemen. Yes, I do feel dry after the +yarn."</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV: A RISING +TIDE</h1> + +<p>The half year was drawing to its close, and it was generally +agreed at Dr. Parker's that it had been the jolliest ever known. +The boating episode and that of the tea at Oak Farm had been +events which had given a fillip to existence. The school had been +successful in the greater part of its cricket matches, and +generally every one was well satisfied with himself. On the +Saturday preceding the breaking up Frank, with Ruthven, Charlie +Goodall and two of the other naturalists, started along the +seashore to look for anemones and other marine creatures among +the rocks and pools at the foot of the South Foreland. Between +Ruthven and Frank a strong feeling of affection had grown up +since the date of their boating adventure. They were constantly +together now; and as Ruthven was also intended for the army, and +would probably obtain his commission about the same time as +Frank, they often talked over their future, and indulged in hopes +that they might often meet, and that in their campaigns, they +might go through adventures together.</p> + +<p>Tide was low when they started. They had nearly three miles to +walk. The pools in front of Deal and Walmer had often been +searched, but they hoped that once round the Foreland they might +light upon specimens differing from any which they had hitherto +found. For some hours they searched the pools, retiring as the +tide advanced. Then they went up to the foot of the cliffs, and +sat down to open their cans and compare the treasures they had +collected. The spot which they had unwittingly selected was a +little bay. For a long time they sat comparing their specimens. +Then Frank said, "Come along, it is time to be moving."</p> + +<p>As he rose to his feet he uttered an exclamation of dismay. +Although the tide was still at some little distance from the spot +where they were sitting, it had already reached the cliffs +extending out at either end of the bay. A brisk wind was blowing +on shore, and the waves were already splashing against the foot +of the rocks.</p> + +<p>The whole party leaped to their feet, and seizing their cans +ran off at the top of their speed to the end of the bay.</p> + +<p>"I will see how deep the water is," Frank exclaimed; "we may +yet be able to wade round."</p> + +<p>The water soon reached Frank's waist. He waded on until it was +up to his shoulders, and he had to leap as each wave approached +him. Then he returned to his friends.</p> + +<p>"I could see round," he said, "and I think I could have got +round without getting into deeper water. The worst of it is the +bottom is all rocky, and I stumbled several times, and should +have gone under water if I could not have swam. You can't swim, +Ruthven, I know; can you other fellows?"</p> + +<p>Goodall could swim, as could one of the others.</p> + +<p>"Now, Ruthven," Frank said, "if you will put your hand on my +shoulder and keep quiet, I think I could carry you around. +Goodall and Jackson can take Childers."</p> + +<p>But neither of the other boys had much confidence in their +swimming. They could get thirty or forty yards, but felt sure +that they would be able to render but little assistance to +Childers, and in fact scarcely liked to round the point alone. +For some time they debated the question, the sea every minute +rising and pushing them farther and farther from the point. "Look +here, Frank," Ruthven said at last; "you are not sure you can +carry me. The others are quite certain that they cannot take +Childers. We must give up that idea. The best thing, old boy, is +for you three who can swim to start together. Then if either of +the others fail you can help them a bit. Childers and I must take +our chance here. When you get round you must send a boat as soon +as possible."</p> + +<p>"I certainly shall not desert you, Ruthven," Frank said. "You +know as well as I do that I'm not likely to find a boat on the +shore till I get pretty near Walmer Castle, and long before we +could get back it would be settled here. No, no, old fellow, we +will see the matter out together. Jackson and Goodall can swim +round if they like."</p> + +<p>These lads, however, would not venture to take the risk alone, +but said they would go if Frank would go with them.</p> + +<p>"Chuck off your boots and coats and waistcoats," Frank said +suddenly, proceeding to strip rapidly to the skin. "I will take +them round, Ruthven, and come back to you. Run round the bay you +and Childers, and see if you can find any sort of ledge or +projection that we can take refuge upon. Now, then, come on you +two as quick as you can."</p> + +<p>The sea had already reached within a few feet of the foot of +the cliff all round the bay.</p> + +<p>"Now, mind," Frank said sharply, "no struggling and nonsense, +you fellows. I will keep quite close to you and stick to you, so +you needn't be afraid. If you get tired just put one hand on my +back and swim with the other and your legs; and above all things +keep your heads as low as possible in the water so as just to be +able to breathe."</p> + +<p>The three lads soon waded out as far as they could go and then +struck out. Jackson and Goodall were both poor swimmers and would +have fared very badly alone. The confidence, however, which they +entertained in Frank gave them courage, and they were well +abreast of the point when first Jackson and then Goodall put +their hands on his shoulders. Thanks to the instructions he had +given them, and to their confidence in him, they placed no great +weight upon him. But every ounce tells heavily on a swimmer, and +Frank gave a gasp of relief as at last his feet touched the +ground. Bidding his companions at once set off at a run he sat +down for two or three minutes to recover his breath.</p> + +<p>"It is lucky," he said to himself, "that I did not try with +Ruthven. It's a very different thing carrying fellows who can +swim and fellows who can't. What fools we've been to let +ourselves he caught here! I had no idea the tide came so high, or +that it was so dangerous, and none of us have ever been round +here before. Now I must go back to Ruthven."</p> + +<p>Frank found it even harder work to get back than it had been +to come out from the bay, for the tide was against him now. At +last he stood beside Ruthven and Childers.</p> + +<p>"We can only find one place, Frank, where there is any +projection a fellow could stand upon, and that is only large +enough for one. See!" he said, pointing to a projecting block of +chalk, whose upper surface, some eight inches wide, was tolerably +flat. "There is a cave here, too, which may go beyond the tide. +It is not deep but it slopes up a bit."</p> + +<p>"That will never do," Frank said; "as the waves come in they +will rush up and fill it to the top. Don't you see it is all +rounded by the water? Now, Childers, we will put you on that +stone. You will be perfectly safe there, for you see it is two +feet above this greenish line, which shows where the water +generally comes to. The tides are not at spring at present, so +though you may get a splashing there is no fear of your being +washed off."</p> + +<p>The water was already knee deep at the foot of the rocks, and +the waves took them nearly up to the shoulders. Ruthven did not +attempt to dispute Frank's allotment of the one place of safety +to Childers. Frank and he placed themselves below the block of +chalk, which was somewhat over six feet from the ground. Then +Childers scrambled up on to their shoulders, and from these +stepped onto the ledge.</p> + +<p>"I am all right," he said; "I wish to Heaven that you were +too."</p> + +<p>"We shall do," Frank said. "Mind you hold tight, Childers! You +had better turn round with your face to the cliff, so as to be +able to grip hold and steady yourself in case the waves come up +high. The tide will turn in three quarters of an hour at the +outside. Now, then, Ruthven, let's make a fight for it, old +man."</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do, Frank?"</p> + +<p>"We will wade along here as far as we can towards the corner, +and than we must swim for it."</p> + +<p>"Don't you think it's possible to stay here," Ruthven said, +"if the tide will turn so soon?"</p> + +<p>"Quite impossible!" Frank said. "I have been nearly taken off +my feet twice already, and the water will rise a yard yet, at +least. We should be smashed against the rocks, even if we weren't +drowned. It must be tried, Ruthven. There is no other way for it. +The distance is a good deal farther than it would have been if we +had started at first; but it isn't the distance that makes much +matter. We've only got to go out a little way, and the tide will +soon take us around the point. Everything depends on you. I can +take you round the point, and land you safely enough, if you will +lie quiet. If you don't, you will drown both of us. So it's +entirely in your hands.</p> + +<p>"Look out!"</p> + +<p>At this moment a larger wave than usual took both boys off +their legs, and dashed them with considerable force against the +cliff. Frank seized Ruthven, and assisted him to regain his +feet.</p> + +<p>"Now, old fellow, let me put you on your back. I will lie on +mine and tow you along. Don't struggle; don't move; above all, +don't try and lift your head, and don't mind if a little water +gets in your mouth. Now!"</p> + +<p>For a moment Ruthven felt himself under water, and had to make +a great effort to restrain himself from struggling to come to the +surface. Then he felt himself lying on his back in the water, +supported by Frank. The motion was not unpleasant as he rose and +fell on the waves, although now and then a splash of water came +over his face, and made him cough and splutter for breath. He +could see nothing but the blue sky overhead, could feel nothing +except that occasionally he received a blow from one or other of +Frank's knees, as the latter swam beneath him, with Ruthven's +head on his chest. It was a dreamy sensation, and looking back +upon it afterwards Ruthven could never recall anything that he +had thought of. It seemed simply a drowsy pleasant time, except +when occasionally a wave covered his face. His first sensation +was that of surprise when he felt the motion change, and Frank +lifted his head from the water and said, "Stand up, old fellow. +Thank God, here we are, safe!"</p> + +<p>Frank had indeed found the journey easier than that which he +had before undertaken with the others. He had scarcely tried to +progress, but had, after getting sufficiently far out to allow +the tide to take him round the point, drifted quietly.</p> + +<p>"I owe my life to you, Frank. I shall never forget it, old +fellow."</p> + +<p>"It's been a close thing," Frank answered; "but you owe your +life as much to your own coolness as to me, and above all, +Ruthven, don't let us forget that we both owe our lives to +God."</p> + +<p>"I sha'n't forget it," Ruthven said quietly, and they stood +for a few minutes without speaking. "Now, what had we better do? +Shall we start to run home?"</p> + +<p>"I can't," Frank laughed, for he had nothing on but his +trousers. These he had slipped on after the return from his first +trip, pushing the rest of his things into a crevice in the rocks +as high up as he could reach.</p> + +<p>"You had better take off your things, Ruthven, and lay them +out to dry in the sun. The boat will be here in half an hour. I +wonder how Childers is getting on!"</p> + +<p>"I think he will be safe," Ruthven said. "The tide will not +rise high enough for there to be much danger of his being washed +off."</p> + +<p>"I don't think so either," Frank agreed, "or I would try and +swim back again; but I really don't think I could get round the +point against the tide again."</p> + +<p>In half an hour a boat rowing four oars was seen +approaching.</p> + +<p>"They are laying out well," Ruthven said. "They couldn't row +harder if they were rowing a race. But had it not been for you, +old fellow, they would have been too late, as far as I am +concerned."</p> + +<p>As the boat approached, the coxswain waved his hat to the +boys. Frank motioned with his arm for them to row on round the +point. The boat swept along at a short distance from the shore. +The boys watched them breathlessly. Presently as it reached the +point they saw the coxswain stand up and say something to the +men, who glanced over their shoulders as they rowed. Then the +coxswain gave a loud shout. "Hold on! We'll be with you +directly."</p> + +<p>"Thank God!" Frank exclaimed, "Childers is all right."</p> + +<p>It was well, however, that the boat arrived when it did, for +Childers was utterly exhausted when it reached him. The sea had +risen so high that the waves broke against his feet, throwing the +spray far above his head, and often nearly washing him from the +ledge on which he stood. Had it not been, indeed, for the hold +which he obtained of the cliff, it would several times have swept +him away. About eighteen inches above his head he had found a +ledge sufficiently wide to give a grip for his hands, and hanging +by these he managed to retain his place when three times his feet +were swept off the rock by the rush of water. The tide was just +on the turn when the boat arrived, and so exhausted was he that +he certainly would not have been able to hold out for the half +hour's buffeting to which he would have been exposed before the +water fell sufficiently to leave him. After helping him into the +boat the men gathered the clothes jammed in fissures of the +cliffs. These were, of course, drenched with water, but had for +the most part remained firm in their places. They now pulled +round to the spot where Frank and Ruthven were awaiting them.</p> + +<p>"Childers must have been pretty nearly done," Frank said. "He +must be lying in the bottom of the boat."</p> + +<p>Childers gave a smile of pleasure as his schoolfellows jumped +on board. He had, glancing over his shoulder, seen them drift out +of sight round the point, and had felt certain that they had +reached shore. It was, however, a great pleasure to be assured of +the fact.</p> + +<p>"You have made quite a stir upon the beach, young gentlemen," +the coxswain of the boat said. "When they two came running up +without their shoes or coats and said there were three of you cut +off in the bay under the Foreland, there didn't seem much chance +for you. It didn't take us two minutes to launch the boat, for +there were a score of hands helping to run her down; and my mates +bent to it well, I can tell you, though we didn't think it would +be of any use. We were glad when we made you two out on this side +of the point. Look, there's half Deal and Walmer coming along the +shore."</p> + +<p>It was as the boatman said. Numbers of persons were streaming +along the beach, and loud were the cheers which rose as the +coxswain stood up and shouted in a stentorian voice, "All +saved!"</p> + +<p>Frank put on his things as they approached Walmer. His shoes +were lost, as were those of Ruthven, and he had difficulty in +getting his arms into his wet and shrunken jacket. Quite a crowd +were gathered near the castle as the boat rowed to shore, and a +hearty cheer arose as it was run up on the shingle and the boys +were helped out. Frank and Ruthven, indeed, required no +assistance. They were in no way the worse for the adventure, but +Childers was so weak that he was unable to stand. He was carried +up and laid on a fly, the others sitting opposite, the driver +having first taken the precaution of removing the cushions.</p> + +<p>There were among the crowd most of the boys from Dr. Parker's. +Goodall and Jackson had arrived nearly an hour and a half before, +and the news had spread like wildfire. Bats and balls had been +thrown down and every one had hurried to the beach. Goodall and +his companion had already related the circumstance of their being +cut off by the water and taken round the point by Frank; and as +Ruthven on jumping out had explained to his comrades who flocked +round to shake his hand, "I owe my life to Hargate," the +enthusiasm reached boiling point, and Frank had difficulty in +taking his place in the fly, so anxious were all to shake his +hand and pat him on the shoulder. Had it not been for his anxiety +to get home as soon as possible, and his urgent entreaties, they +would have carried him on their shoulders in triumph through the +town. They drove first to the school, where Childers was at once +carried up to a bed, which had been prepared with warm blankets +in readiness; Ruthven needed only to change his clothes.</p> + +<p>The moment they had left the fly Frank drove straight home, +and was delighted at finding, from his mother's exclamation of +surprise as he alighted from the cab, that she had not been +suffering any anxiety, no one, in the general excitement, having +thought of taking the news to her. In answer to her anxious +inquiries he made light of the affair, saying only that they had +stupidly allowed themselves to be cut off by the sea and had got +a ducking. It was not, indeed, till the next morning, when the +other four boys came around to tell Mrs. Hargate that they were +indebted to Frank for their lives, that she had any notion that +he had been in danger.</p> + +<p>Frank was quite oppressed by what he called the fuss which was +made over the affair. A thrilling description of it appeared in +the local papers. A subscription was got up in the school, and a +gold watch with an inscription was presented to him; and he +received letters of heart felt thanks from the parents of his +four schoolfellows, for Childers maintained that it was entirely +to Frank's coolness and thoughtfulness that his preservation was +also due.</p> + +<p>On the following Wednesday the school broke up. Frank had +several invitations from the boys to spend his holidays with +them; but he knew how lonely his mother would feel in his +absence, and he declined all the invitations. Mrs. Hargate was +far from strong, and had had several fits of fainting. These, +however, had taken place at times when Frank was at school, and +she had strictly charged her little servant to say nothing about +it.</p> + +<p>One day on returning from a long walk he saw the doctor's +carriage standing at the door. Just as he arrived the door opened +and the doctor came out. Upon seeing Frank he turned.</p> + +<p>"Come in here, my boy," he said.</p> + +<p>Frank followed him, and seeing that the blinds were down, went +to draw them up. The doctor laid his hand on his arm.</p> + +<p>"Never mind that," he said gently.</p> + +<p>"My boy," he said, "do you know that your mother has been for +some time ailing?"</p> + +<p>"No, indeed," Frank said with a gasp of pain and surprise.</p> + +<p>"It is so, my boy. I have been attending her for some time. +She has been suffering from fainting fits brought on by weakness +of the heart's action. Two hours since I was sent for and found +her unconscious. My poor boy, you must compose yourself. God is +good and merciful, though his decrees are hard to bear. Your +mother passed away quietly half an hour since, without recovering +consciousness."</p> + +<p>Frank gave a short cry, and then sat stunned by the suddenness +of the blow. The doctor drew out a small case from his pocket and +poured a few drops from the phial into a glass, added some water, +and held it to Frank's lips.</p> + +<p>"Drink this, my boy," he said.</p> + +<p>Frank turned his head from the offered glass. He could not +speak.</p> + +<p>"Drink this, my boy," the doctor said again; "it will do you +good. Try and be strong for the sake of your little sister, who +has only you in the world now."</p> + +<p>The thought of Lucy touched the right chord in the boy's +heart, and he burst into a passionate fit of crying. The doctor +allowed his tears to flow unchecked.</p> + +<p>"You will be better now," he said presently. "Now drink this, +then lie down on the sofa. We must not be having you ill, you +know."</p> + +<p>Frank gulped down the contents of the glass, and, passive as a +child, allowed the doctor to place him upon the sofa.</p> + +<p>"God help and strengthen you, my poor boy," he said; "ask help +from Him."</p> + +<p>For an hour Frank lay sobbing on the sofa, and then, +remembering the doctor's last words, he knelt beside it and +prayed for strength.</p> + +<p>A week had passed. The blinds were up again. Mrs. Hargate had +been laid in her last home, and Frank was sitting alone again in +the little parlor thinking over what had best be done. The +outlook was a dark one, enough to shake the courage of one much +older than Frank. His mother's pension, he knew, died with her. +He had, on the doctor's advice, written to the War Office on the +day following his mother's death, to inform the authorities of +the circumstances, and to ask if any pension could be granted to +his sister. The reply had arrived that morning and had relieved +him of the greatest of his cares. It stated that as he was now +just fifteen years old he was not eligible for a pension, but +that twenty-five pounds a year would be paid to his sister until +she married or attained the age of twenty-one.</p> + +<p>He had spoken to the doctor that morning, and the latter said +that he knew a lady who kept a small school, and who would, he +doubted not, be willing to receive Lucy and to board and clothe +her for that sum. She was a very kind and motherly person, and he +was sure that Lucy would be most kindly treated and cared for by +her. It was then of his own future only that Frank had to think. +There were but a few pounds in the house, but the letter from the +War Office inclosed a check for twenty pounds, as his mother's +quarterly pension was just due. The furniture of the little house +would fetch but a small sum, not more, Frank thought, than thirty +or forty pounds. There were a few debts to pay, and after all was +settled up there would remain about fifty pounds. Of this he +determined to place half in the doctor's hands for the use of +Lucy.</p> + +<p>"She will want," he said to himself, "a little pocket money. +It is hard on a girl having no money to spend of her own. Then, +as she gets on, she may need lessons in something or other. +Besides, half the money rightly belongs to her, The question is, +What am I to do?"</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V: ALONE IN +THE WORLD</h1> + +<p>"What am I to do?"</p> + +<p>A difficult question indeed, for a boy of fifteen, with but +twenty-five pounds, and without a friend in the world. Was he, +indeed, without a friend? he asked himself. There was Dr. Parker. +Should he apply to him? But the doctor had started for a trip on +the Continent the day after the school had broken up, and would +not return for six weeks. It was possible that, had he been at +home, he might have offered to keep Frank for a while; but the +boys seldom stayed at his school past the age of fifteen, going +elsewhere to have their education completed. What possible claim +had he to quarter himself upon the doctor for the next four +years, even were the offer made? No, Frank felt; he could not +live upon the doctor's charity. Then there were the parents of +the boys he had saved from drowning. But even as he sat alone +Frank's face flushed at the thought of trading upon services so +rendered. The boy's chief fault was pride. It was no petty +feeling, and he had felt no shame at being poorer than the rest +of his schoolfellows. It was rather a pride which led him unduly +to rely upon himself, and to shrink from accepting favors from +any one. Frank might well, without any derogation, have written +to his friends, telling them of the loss he had suffered and the +necessity there was for him to earn his living, and asking them +to beg their fathers to use their interest to procure him a +situation as a boy clerk, or any other position in which he could +earn his livelihood.</p> + +<p>Frank, however, shrunk from making any such appeal, and +determined to fight his battle without asking for help. He knew +nothing of his parents' relations. His father was an only son, +who had been left early an orphan. His mother, too, had, he was +aware, lost both her parents, and he had never heard her speak of +other relations. There was no one, therefore, so far as he knew, +to whom he could appeal on the ground of ties of blood. It must +be said for him that he had no idea how hard was the task which +he was undertaking. It seemed to him that it must be easy for a +strong, active lad to find employment of some sort in London. +What the employment might be he cared little for. He had no pride +of that kind, and so that he could earn his bread he cared not +much in what capacity he might do it.</p> + +<p>Already preparations had been made for the sale of the +furniture, which was to take place next day. Everything was to be +sold except the scientific books which had belonged to his +father. These had been packed in a great box until the time when +he might place them in a library of his own, and the doctor +kindly offered to keep it for him until such time should arrive. +Frank wrote a long letter to Ruthven, telling him of his loss, +and his reasons for leaving Deal, and promising to write some day +and tell him how he was getting on in London. This letter he did +not intend to post until the last thing before leaving Deal. Lucy +had already gone to her new home, and Frank felt confident that +she would be happy there. His friend, the doctor, who had tried +strongly, but without avail, to dissuade Frank from going up to +London to seek his fortune there, had promised that if the lad +referred any inquiries to him he would answer for his +character.</p> + +<p>He went down to the beach the last evening and said goodbye to +his friends among the fishermen, and he walked over in the +afternoon and took his last meal with Farmer Gregson.</p> + +<p>"Look ye here, my lad," the farmer said as they parted. "I +tell ye, from what I've heerd, this London be a hard nut to +crack. There be plenty of kernel, no doubt, when you can get at +it, but it be hard work to open the shell. Now, if so be as at +any time you run short of money, just drop me a line, and there's +ten pound at your service whenever you like. Don't you think it's +an obligation. Quite the other way. It would be a real pleasure +to me to lend you a helping hand."</p> + +<p>Two days after the sale Frank started for London. On getting +out of the train he felt strange and lonely amid the bustle and +confusion which was going on on the platform. The doctor had +advised him to ask one of the porters, or a policeman, if he +could recommend him to a quiet and respectable lodging, as +expenses at an hotel would soon make a deep hole in his money. +He, therefore, as soon as the crowd cleared away, addressed +himself to one of the porters.</p> + +<p>"What sort of lodgings do you want, sir?" the man said, +looking at him rather suspiciously, with, as Frank saw, a strong +idea in his mind that he was a runaway schoolboy.</p> + +<p>"I only want one room," he said, "and I don't care how small +it is, so that it is clean and quiet. I shall be out all day, and +should not give much trouble."</p> + +<p>The porter went away and spoke to some of his mates, and +presently returned with one of them.</p> + +<p>"You're wanting a room I hear, sir," the man said. "I have a +little house down the Old Kent Road, and my missus lets a room or +two. It's quiet and clean, I'll warrant you. We have one room +vacant at present."</p> + +<p>"I'm sure that would suit me very well," Frank said. "How much +do you charge a week?"</p> + +<p>"Three and sixpence, sir, if you don't want any cooking +done."</p> + +<p>Frank took the address, and leaving his portmanteau in charge +of the porter, who promised, unless he heard to the contrary, +that he would bring it home with him when he had done his work, +he set off from the station.</p> + +<p>Deal is one of the quietest and most dreary places on the +coast of England, and Frank was perfectly astounded at the crowd +and bustle which filled the street, when he issued from the +railway approach, at the foot of London Bridge. The porter had +told him that he was to turn to his left, and keep straight along +until he reached the "Elephant and Castle." He had, therefore, no +trouble about his road, and was able to give his whole attention +to the sights which met his eye. For a time the stream of +omnibuses, cabs, heavy wagons, and light carts, completely +bewildered him, as did the throng of people who hastened along +the footway. He was depressed rather than exhilarated at the +sight of this busy multitude. He seemed such a solitary atom in +the midst of this great moving crowd. Presently, however, the +thought that where so many millions gained their living there +must be room for one boy more, somewhat cheered him. He was a +long time making his way to his place of destination, for he +stared into every shop window, and being, although he was +perfectly ignorant of the fact, on the wrong side of the +pavement, he was bumped and bustled continually, and was not long +in arriving at the conclusion that the people of London must be +the roughest and rudest in the world. It was not until he ran +against a gentleman, and was greeted with the angry, "now then, +boy. Where are you going? Why the deuce don't you keep on your +own side of the pavement?" that he perceived that the moving +throng was divided into two currents, that on the inside meeting +him, while the outside stream was proceeding in the same +direction as himself. After this he got on better, and arrived +without adventure at the house of the porter, in the Old Kent +Road.</p> + +<p>It was a small house, but was clean and respectable, and Frank +found that the room would suit him well.</p> + +<p>"I do not wait upon the lodgers," the landlady said, "except +to make the beds and tidy the rooms in the morning. So if you +want breakfast and tea at home you will have to get them +yourself. There is a separate place downstairs for your coals. +There are some tea things, plates and dishes, in this cupboard. +You will want to buy a small tea kettle, and a gridiron, and a +frying pan, in case you want a chop or a rasher. Do you think you +can cook them yourself?"</p> + +<p>"Frank, amused at the thought of cooking and catering for +himself, said boldly that he should soon learn.</p> + +<p>"You are a very young gentleman," the landlady said, eyeing +him doubtfully, "to be setting up on your own hook. I mean," she +said, seeing Frank look puzzled, "setting up housekeeping on your +own account. You will have to be particular careful with the +frying pan, because if you were to upset the fat in the fire you +might have the house in a blaze in a jiffey."</p> + +<p>Frank said that he would certainly be careful with the frying +pan.</p> + +<p>"Well," she went on, "as you're a stranger to the place I +don't know as you could do better than get your tea, and sugar, +and things at the grocer's at the next corner. I deals there +myself, and he gives every satisfaction. My baker will be round +in a few minutes, and, if you likes, I can take in your bread for +you. The same with milk."</p> + +<p>These matters being arranged, and Frank agreeing at once to +the proposition that as he was a stranger it would make things +more comfortable were he to pay his rent in advance, found +himself alone in his new apartment. It was a room about ten feet +square. The bed occupied one corner, with the washstand at its +foot. There was a small table in front of the fireplace, and two +chairs; a piece of carpet half covered the floor, and these with +the addition of the articles in the cupboard constituted the +furniture of the room. Feeling hungry after his journey Frank +resolved to go out at once and get something to eat, and then to +lay in a stock of provisions. After some hesitation regarding the +character of the meal he decided upon two Bath buns, determining +to make a substantial tea. He laid in a supply of tea, sugar, +butter, and salt, bought a little kettle, a frying pan, and a +gridiron. Then he hesitated as to whether he should venture upon +a mutton chop or some bacon, deciding finally in favor of the +latter, upon the reflection that any fellow could see whether +bacon were properly frizzled up, while as to a chop there was no +seeing anything about it till one cut it. He, therefore, invested +in a pound of prime streaky Wiltshire bacon, the very best, as +the shopman informed him, that could be bought. He returned +carrying all his purchases, with the exception of the hardware. +Then he inquired of his landlady where he could get coal.</p> + +<p>"The green grocer's round the corner," the landlady said. +"Tell him to send in a hundredweight of the best, that's a +shilling, and you'll want some firewood too."</p> + +<p>The coal arrived in the course of the afternoon, and at half +past six the porter came in with Frank's trunk. He had by this +time lit a fire, and while the water was boiling got some of his +things out of the box, and by hanging some clothes on the pegs on +the back of the door, and by putting the two or three favorite +books he had brought with him on to the mantelpiece, he gave the +room a more homelike appearance. He enjoyed his tea all the more +from the novelty of having to prepare it himself, and succeeded +very fairly for a first attempt with his bacon.</p> + +<p>When tea was over he first washed up the things and then +started for a ramble. He followed the broad straight road to +Waterloo Bridge, stood for a long time looking at the river, and +then crossed into the Strand. The lamps were now alight and the +brightness and bustle of the scene greatly interested him. At +nine o'clock he returned to his lodgings, but was again obliged +to sally out, as he found he had forgotten candles.</p> + +<p>After breakfast next morning he went out and bought a +newspaper, and set himself to work to study the advertisements. +He was dismayed to find how many more applicants there were for +places than places requiring to be filled. All the persons +advertising were older than himself, and seemed to possess +various accomplishments in the way of languages; many too could +be strongly recommended from their last situation. The prospect +did not look hopeful. In the first place he had looked to see if +any required boy clerks, but this species of assistant appeared +little in demand; and then, although he hoped that it would not +come to that, he ran his eye down the columns to see if any +required errand boys or lads in manufacturing businesses. He +found, however, no such advertisements. However, as he said to +himself, it could not be expected that he should find a place +waiting for him on the very day after his arrival, and that he +ought to be able to live for a year on his five and twenty +pounds; at this reflection his spirits rose and he went out again +for a walk.</p> + +<p>For the first week, indeed, of his arrival in London Frank did +not set himself very earnestly to work to look for a situation. +In his walks about the streets he several times observed cards in +the window indicating that an errand boy was wanted. He resolved, +however, that this should be the last resource which he would +adopt, as he would much prefer to go to work as a common lad in a +factory to serving in a shop. After the first week he answered +many advertisements, but in no case received a reply. In one +case, in which it was stated that a lad who could write a good +fast hand was required in an office, wages to begin with eight +shillings a week, he called two days after writing. It was a +small office with a solitary clerk sitting in it. The latter, +upon learning Frank's business, replied with some exasperation +that his mind was being worried out by boys.</p> + +<p>"We have had four hundred and thirty letters," he said; "and I +should think that a hundred boys must have called. We took the +first who applied, and all the other letters were chucked into +the fire as soon as we saw what they were about."</p> + +<p>Frank returned to the street greatly disheartened.</p> + +<p>"Four hundred and thirty letters!" he said. "Four hundred and +thirty other fellows on the lookout, just as I am, for a place as +a boy clerk, and lots of them, no doubt, with friends and +relations to recommend them! The lookout seems to be a bad +one."</p> + +<p>Two days later, when Frank was walking along the strand he +noticed the placards in front of a theater.</p> + +<p>"Gallery one shilling!" he said to himself; "I will go. I have +never seen a theater yet."</p> + +<p>The play was <i>The Merchant of Venice</i>, and Frank sat in +rapt attention and interest through it. When the performance was +over he walked briskly homewards. When he had proceeded some +distance he saw a glare in the sky ahead, and presently a steam +engine dashed past him at full speed.</p> + +<p>"That must be a house on fire," he said. "I have never seen a +fire;" and he broke into a run.</p> + +<p>Others were running in the same direction, and as he passed +the "Elephant and Castle" the crowd became thicker, and when +within fifty yards of the house he could no longer advance. He +could see the flames now rising high in the air. A horrible fear +seized him.</p> + +<p>"It must be," he exclaimed to himself, "either our house or +the one next door."</p> + +<p>It was in vain that he pressed forward to see more nearly. A +line of policemen was drawn up across the road to keep a large +space clear for the firemen. Behind the policemen the crowd were +thickly packed. Frank inquired of many who stood near him if they +could tell him the number of the house which was on fire; but +none could inform him.</p> + +<p>Presently the flames began to die away, and the crowd to +disperse. At length Frank reached the first line of +spectators.</p> + +<p>"Can you tell me the number of the houses which are burned?" +Frank said to a policeman.</p> + +<p>"There are two of them," the policeman said "a hundred and +four and a hundred and five. A hundred and four caught first, and +they say that a woman and two children have been burned to +death."</p> + +<p>"That is where I live!" Frank cried. "Oh, please let me +pass!"</p> + +<p>"I'll pass you in," the policeman said good naturedly, and he +led him forward to the spot where the engines were playing upon +the burning houses. "Is it true, mate," he asked a fireman, "that +a woman and two children have been burned?"</p> + +<p>"It's true enough," the fireman said. "The landlady and her +children. Her husband was a porter at the railway station, and +had been detained on overtime. He only came back a quarter of an +hour ago, and he's been going on like a madman;" and he pointed +to the porter, who was sitting down on the doorsteps of a house +facing his own, with his face hidden in his hands.</p> + +<p>Frank went and sat down beside him.</p> + +<p>"My poor fellow," he said, "I am sorry for you."</p> + +<p>Frank had had many chats with his landlord of an evening, and +had become quite friendly with him and his wife.</p> + +<p>"I can't believe it," the man said huskily. "Just to think! +When I went out this morning there was Jane and the kids, as well +and as happy as ever, and there, where are they now?"</p> + +<p>"Happier still," Frank said gently. "I lost my mother just as +suddenly only five weeks ago. I went out for a walk, leaving her +as well as usual, and when I came back she was dead; so I can +feel for you with all my heart."</p> + +<p>"I would have given my life for them," the man said, wiping +his eyes, "willing."</p> + +<p>"I'm sure you would," Frank answered.</p> + +<p>"There's the home gone," the man said, "with all the things +that it took ten years' savings of Jane and me to buy; not that +that matters one way or the other now. And your traps are gone, +too, I suppose, sir."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank replied quietly, "I have lost my clothes and +twenty-three pounds in money; every penny I've got in the world +except half a crown in my pocket."</p> + +<p>"And you don't say nothing about it!" the man said, roused +into animation. "But, there, perhaps you've friends as will make +it up to you."</p> + +<p>"I have no one in the world," Frank answered, "whom I could +ask to give me a helping hand."</p> + +<p>"Well, you are a plucky chap," the man said. "That would be a +knock down blow to a man, let alone a boy like you. What are you +going to do now?" he asked, forgetting for the moment his own +loss, in his interest in his companion.</p> + +<p>"I don't know," Frank replied. "Perhaps," he added, seeing +that the interest in his condition roused the poor fellow from +the thought of his own deep sorrow, "you might give me some +advice. I was thinking of getting a place in an office, but of +course I must give that up now, and should be thankful to get +anything by which I can earn my bread."</p> + +<p>"You come along with me," the man said rising. "You've done me +a heap of good. It's no use sitting here. I shall go back to the +station, and turn in on some sacks. If you've nothing better to +do, and nowhere to go to, you come along with me. We will talk it +all over."</p> + +<p>Pleased to have some one to talk to, and glad that he should +not have to look for a place to sleep, Frank accompanied the +porter to the station. With a word or two to the nightmen on +duty, the porter led the way to a shed near the station, where a +number of sacks were heaped in a corner.</p> + +<p>"Now," the man said, "I will light a pipe. It's against the +regulations, but that's neither here nor there now. Now, if +you're not sleepy, would you mind talking to me? Tell me +something about yourself, and how you come to be alone here in +London. It does me good to talk. It prevents me from +thinking."</p> + +<p>"There is very little to tell," Frank said; and he related to +him the circumstances of the deaths of his father and mother, and +how it came that he was alone in London in search of a place.</p> + +<p>"You're in a fix," the porter said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I can see that."</p> + +<p>"You see you're young for most work, and you never had no +practice with horses, or you might have got a place to drive a +light cart. Then, again, your knowing nothing of London is +against you as an errand boy; and what's worse than all this, +anyone can see with half an eye that you're a gentleman, and not +accustomed to hard work. However, we will think it over. The +daylight's breaking now, and I has to be at work at six. But look +ye here, young fellow, tomorrow I've got to look for a room, and +when I gets it there's half of it for you, if you're not too +proud to accept it. It will be doing me a real kindness, I can +tell you, for what I am to do alone of an evening without Jane +and the kids, God knows. I can't believe they're gone yet."</p> + +<p>Then the man threw himself down upon the sacks, and broke into +sobs. Frank listened for half an hour till these gradually died +away, and he knew by the regular breathing that his companion was +asleep. It was long after this before be himself closed his eyes. +The position did, indeed, appear a dark one. Thanks to the offer +of his companion, which he at once resolved to accept for a time, +he would have a roof to sleep under. But this could not last; and +what was he to do? Perhaps he had been wrong in not writing at +once to Ruthven and his schoolfellows. He even felt sure he had +been wrong; but it would be ten times as hard to write now. He +would rather starve than do this. How was he to earn his living? +He would, he determined, at any rate try for a few days to +procure a place as an errand boy. If that failed, he would sell +his clothes, and get a rough working suit. He was sure that he +should have more chance of obtaining work in such a dress than in +his present attire.</p> + +<p>Musing thus, Frank at last dropped off to sleep. When he woke +he found himself alone, his companion having left without +disturbing him. From the noises around him of trains coming in +and out, Frank judged that the hour was late.</p> + +<p>"I have done one wise thing," he said, "anyhow, and as far as +I can see it's the only one, in leaving my watch with the doctor +to keep. He pointed out that I might have it stolen if I carried +it, and that there was no use in keeping it shut up in a box. +Very possibly it might be stolen by the dishonesty of a servant. +That's safe anyhow, and it is my only worldly possession, except +the books, and I would rather go into the workhouse than part +with either of them."</p> + +<p>Rising, he made his way into the station, where he found the +porter at his usual work.</p> + +<p>"I would not wake you," the man said; "you were sleeping so +quiet, and I knew 'twas no use your getting up early. I shall go +out and settle for a room at dinner time. If you will come here +at six o'clock we'll go off together. The mates have all been +very kind, and have been making a collection to bury my poor girl +and the kids. They've found 'em, and the inquest is tomorrow, so +I shall be off work. The governor has offered me a week; but +there, I'd rather be here where there's no time for thinking, +than hanging about with nothing to do but to drink."</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI: THE FIRST +STEP</h1> + +<p>All that day Frank tramped the streets. He went into many +shops where he saw notices that an errand boy was required, but +everywhere without success. He perceived at once that his +appearance was against him, and he either received the abrupt +answer of, "You're not the sort of chap for my place," or an +equally decided refusal upon the grounds that he did not know the +neighborhood, or that they preferred one who had parents who +lived close by and could speak for him.</p> + +<p>At six o'clock he rejoined the porter. He brought with him +some bread and butter and a piece of bacon. When, on arriving at +the lodging of his new friend, a neat room with two small beds in +it, he produced and opened his parcel, the porter said angrily, +"Don't you do that again, young fellow, or we shall have words. +You're just coming to stop with me for a bit till you see your +way, and I'm not going to have you bring things in here. My money +is good for two months, and your living here with me won't cost +three shillings a week. So don't you hurt my feelings by bringing +things home again. There, don't say no more about it."</p> + +<p>Frank, seeing that his companion was really in earnest, said +no more, and was the less reluctant to accept the other's +kindness as he saw that his society was really a great relief to +him in his trouble. After the meal they sallied out to a second +hand clothes shop. Here Frank disposed of his things, and +received in return a good suit of clothes fit for a working +lad.</p> + +<p>"I don't know how it is," the porter said as they sat together +afterwards, "but a gentleman looks like a gentleman put him in +what clothes you will. I could have sworn to your being that if +I'd never seen you before. I can't make it out, I don't know what +it is, but there's certainly something in gentle blood, whatever +you may say about it. Some of my mates are forever saying that +one man's as good as another. Now I don't mean to say they ain't +as good; but what I say is, as they ain't the same. One man ain't +the same as another any more than a race horse is the same as a +cart horse. They both sprang from the same stock, at least so +they says; but breeding and feeding and care has made one into a +slim boned creature as can run like the wind, while the other has +got big bones and weight and can drag his two ton after him +without turning a hair. Now, I take it, it's the same thing with +gentlefolks and working men. It isn't that one's bigger than the +other, for I don't see much difference that way; but a +gentleman's lighter in the bone, and his hands and his feet are +smaller, and he carries himself altogether different. His voice +gets a different tone. Why, Lord bless you, when I hears two men +coming along the platform at night, even when I can't see 'em, +and can't hear what they says, only the tone of their voices, I +knows just as well whether it's a first class or a third door as +I've got to open as if I saw <i>'</i>em in the daylight. Rum, +ain't it?"</p> + +<p>Frank had never thought the matter out, and could only give +his general assent to his companion's proposition.</p> + +<p>"Now," the porter went on, "if you go into a factory or +workshop, I'll bet a crown to a penny that before you've been +there a week you'll get called Gentleman Jack, or some such name. +You see if you ain't."</p> + +<p>"I don't care what they call me," Frank laughed, "so that +they'll take me into the factory."</p> + +<p>"All in good time," the porter said; "don't you hurry +yourself. As long as you can stay here you'll be heartily +welcome. Just look what a comfort it is to have you sitting here +sociable and comfortable. You don't suppose I could have sat here +alone in this room if you hadn't been here? I should have been in +a public house making a beast of myself, and spending as much +money as would keep the pair of us."</p> + +<p>Day after day Frank went out in search of work. In his tramps +he visited scores of workshops and factories, but without +success. Either they did not want boys, or they declined +altogether to take one who had no experience in work, and had no +references in the neighborhood. Frank took his breakfast and tea +with the porter, and was glad that the latter had his dinner at +the station, as a penny loaf served his purposes. One day in his +walks Frank entered Covent Garden and stood looking on at the +bustle and flow of business, for it happened to be market day. He +leaned against one of the columns of the piazza, eating the bread +he had just bought. Presently a sharp faced lad, a year or two +younger than himself, came up to him.</p> + +<p>"Give us a hit," he said, "I ain't tasted nothing today."</p> + +<p>Frank broke the bread in half and gave a portion to him.</p> + +<p>"What a lot there is going on here!" Frank said.</p> + +<p>"Law!" the boy answered, "that ain't nothing to what it is of +a morning. That's the time, <i>'</i>special on the mornings of +the flower market. It's hard lines if a chap can't pick up a +tanner or even a bob then."</p> + +<p>"How?" Frank asked eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Why, by holding horses, helping to carry out plants, and such +like. You seems a green 'un, you do. Up from the country, eh? +Don't seem like one of our sort."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank said, "I'm just up from the country. I thought it +would be easy to get a place in London, but I don't find it +so."</p> + +<p>"A place!" the boy repeated scornfully. "I should like any one +to see me in a place. It's better a hundred times to be your own +master."</p> + +<p>"Even if you do want a piece of bread sometimes?" Frank put +in.</p> + +<p>"Yes," the boy said. "When it ain't market day and ye haven't +saved enough to buy a few papers or boxes of matches it does come +hard. In winter the times is bad, but in summer we gets on +fairish, and there ain't nothing to grumble about. Are you out of +work yourself?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank answered, "I'm on the lookout for a job."</p> + +<p>"You'd have a chance here in the morning," said the boy, +looking at him. "You look decent, and might get a job unloading. +They won't have us at no price, if they can help it."</p> + +<p>"I will come and try anyhow," Frank said.</p> + +<p>That evening Frank told his friend, the porter, that he +thought of going out early next morning to try and pick up odd +jobs at Covent Garden.</p> + +<p>"Don't you think of it," the porter said. "There's nothing +worse for a lad than taking to odd jobs. It gets him into bad +ways and bad company. Don't you hurry. I have spoken to lots of +my mates, and they're all on the lookout for you. We on the +platform can't do much. It ain't in our line, you see; but in the +goods department, where they are constant with vans and wagons +and such like, they are likely enough to hear of something before +long."</p> + +<p>That night, thinking matters over in bed, Frank determined to +go down to the docks and see if he could get a place as cabin +boy. He had had this idea in his mind ever since he lost his +money, and had only put it aside in order that he might, if +possible, get some berth on shore which might seem likely in the +end to afford him a means of making his way up again. It was not +that he was afraid of the roughness of a cabin boy's life; it was +only because he knew that it would be so very long before, +working his way up from boy to able bodied seaman, he could +obtain a mate's certificate, and so make a first step up the +ladder. However, he thought that even this would be better than +going as a wagoner's boy, and he accordingly crossed London +Bridge, turned down Eastcheap, and presently found himself in +Ratcliff Highway. He was amused here at the nautical character of +the shops, and presently found himself staring into a window full +of foreign birds, for the most part alive in cages, among which, +however, were a few cases of stuffed birds.</p> + +<p>"How stupid I have been!" he thought to himself. "I wonder I +never thought of it before! I can stuff birds and beasts at any +rate a deal better than those wooden looking things. I might have +a chance of getting work at some naturalist's shop. I will get a +directory and take down all the addresses in London, and then go +around."</p> + +<p>He now became conscious of a conversation going on between a +little old man with a pair of thick horn rimmed spectacles and a +sailor who had a dead parrot and a cat in his hand.</p> + +<p>"I really cannot undertake them," the old man said. "Since the +death of my daughter I have had but little time to attend to that +branch. What with buying and selling, and feeding and attending +to the live ones, I have no time for stuffing. Besides, if the +things were poisoned, they would not be worth stuffing."</p> + +<p>"It isn't the question of worth, skipper," the sailor said; +"and I don't say, mind ye, that these here critturs was pisoned, +only if you looks at it that this was the noisiest bird and the +worst tempered thievingest cat in the neighborhood -- though, +Lord bless you, my missus wouldn't allow it for worlds -- why, +you know, when they were both found stiff and cold this morning +people does have a sort of a suspicion as how they've been +pisoned;" and he winked one eye in a portentous manner, and +grinned hugely. "The missus she's in a nice taking, screeching, +and yelling as you might hear her two cables' length away, and +she turns round on me and will have it as I'd a hand in the +matter. Well, just to show my innocence, I offers to get a glass +case for 'em and have 'em stuffed, if it cost me a couple of +pounds. I wouldn't care if they fell all to pieces a week +afterwards, so that it pacified the old woman just at present. If +I can't get 'em done I shall ship at once, for the place will be +too hot to hold me. So you can't do it nohow?"</p> + +<p>The old man shook his head, and the sailor was just turning +off when Frank went up to him:</p> + +<p>"Will you please wait a moment? Can I speak to you, sir, a +minute?" he asked the old man.</p> + +<p>The naturalist went into his shop, and Frank followed him.</p> + +<p>"I can stuff birds and animals, sir," he said. "I think I +really stuff them well, for some which I did for amusement were +sold at ten shillings a case, and the man who bought them of me +told me they would be worth four times as much in London. I am +out of work, sir, and very very anxious to get my living. You +will find me hard working and honest. Do give me a chance. Let me +stuff that cat and parrot for the sailor. If you are not +satisfied then, I will go away and charge nothing for it."</p> + +<p>The man looked at him keenly.</p> + +<p>"I will at any rate give you a trial," he said. Then he went +to the door and called in the sailor. "This lad tells me he can +stuff birds. I know nothing about him, but I believe he is +speaking truthfully. If you like to intrust them to him he will +do his best. If you're not satisfied he will make no charge."</p> + +<p>Much pleased at seeing a way out of his dilemma, the sailor +placed the dead animals on the counter.</p> + +<p>"Now," the old man said to Frank, "you can take these out into +the back yard and skin them. Then you can go to work in that back +room. You will find arsenical soap, cotton wool, wires, and +everything else you require there. This has been a fine cat," he +said, looking at the animal.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it has been a splendid creature," Frank answered. "It is +a magnificent macaw also."</p> + +<p>"Ah! you know it is a macaw!" the old man said.</p> + +<p>"Of course," Frank said simply; "it has a tail."</p> + +<p>The old man then furnished Frank with two or three sharp +knives and scissors. Taking the bird and cat, he went out into +the yard and in the course of an hour had skinned them both. Then +he returned to the shop and set to work in the room behind.</p> + +<p>"May I make a group of them?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Do them just as you like," the old man said.</p> + +<p>After settling upon his subject, Frank set to work, and, +except that he went out for five minutes to buy and eat a penny +loaf, continued his work till nightfall. The old man came in +several times to look at him, but each time went out again +without making a remark. At six o'clock Frank laid down his +tools.</p> + +<p>"I will come again tomorrow, sir," he said.</p> + +<p>The old man nodded, and Frank went home in high spirits. There +was a prospect at last of getting something to do, and that in a +line most congenial to his own tastes.</p> + +<p>The old man looked up when he entered next morning.</p> + +<p>"I shall not come in today," he remarked. "I will wait to see +them finished."</p> + +<p>Working without interruption till the evening, Frank finished +them to his satisfaction, and enveloped them with many wrappings +of thread to keep them in precisely the attitudes in which he had +placed them.</p> + +<p>"They are ready for drying now, sir," he said. "If I might +place them in an oven they would be dried by morning."</p> + +<p>The old man led the way to the kitchen, where a small fire was +burning.</p> + +<p>"I shall put no more coals on the fire," he said, "and it will +be out in a quarter of an hour. Put them in there and leave the +door open. I will close it in an hour when the oven cools."</p> + +<p>The next day Frank was again at work. It took him all day to +get fur and feather to lie exactly as he wished them. In the +afternoon he asked the naturalist for a piece of flat board, +three feet long, and a perch, but said that instead of the piece +of board he should prefer mounting them in a case at once. The +old man had not one in the shop large enough, and therefore Frank +arranged his group temporarily on the table. On the board lay the +cat. At first sight she seemed asleep, but it was clearly only +seeming. Her eyes were half open, the upper lip was curled up, +and the sharp teeth showed. The hind feet were drawn somewhat +under her as in readiness for an instant spring. Her front paws +were before her, the talons were somewhat stretched, and one paw +was curved. Her ears lay slightly back. She was evidently on the +point of springing. The macaw perch, which had been cut down to a +height of two feet, stood behind her. The bird hung by its feet, +and, head downwards, stretched with open beak towards the tip of +the cat's tail, which was slightly uplifted. On a piece of paper +Frank wrote, "Dangerous Play."</p> + +<p>It was evening before he had finished perfectly to his +satisfaction. Then he called the naturalist in. The old man +stopped at the door, surveying the group. Then he entered and +examined it carefully.</p> + +<p>"Wonderful!" he said. "Wonderful! I should have thought them +alive. There is not a shop in the West End where it could have +been turned out better, if so well.</p> + +<p>"Lad, you are a wonder! Tell me now who and what are you? I +saw when you first addressed me that you were not what you seemed +to be, a working lad."</p> + +<p>"I have been well educated," Frank said, "and was taught to +preserve and stuff by my father, who was a great naturalist. My +parents died suddenly, and I was left on my own resources, +which," he said, smiling faintly, "have hitherto proved of very +small avail. I am glad you are pleased. If you will take me into +your service I will work hard and make myself useful in every +way. If you require references I can refer you to the doctor who +attended us in the country; but I have not a single friend in +London except a railway porter, who has most kindly and +generously taken me in and sheltered me for the last two +months."</p> + +<p>"I need no references," the old man said; "your work speaks +for itself as to your skill, and your face for your character. +But I can offer you nothing fit for you. With such a genius as +you have for setting up animals, you ought to be able to earn a +good income. Not one man in a thousand can make a dead animal +look like a live one. You have the knack or the art."</p> + +<p>"I shall be very content with anything you can give me," Frank +said; "for the present I only ask to earn my living. If later on +I can, as you say, do more, all the better."</p> + +<p>The old man stood for some time thinking, and presently said, +"I do but little except in live stock. When I had my daughter +with me I did a good deal of stuffing, for there is a +considerable trade hereabout. The sailors bring home skins of +foreign birds, and want them stuffed and put in cases, as +presents for their wives and sweethearts. You work fast as well +as skillfully. I have known men who would take a fortnight to do +such a group as that, and then it would be a failure. It will be +quite a new branch for my trade. I do not know how it will act +yet, but to begin with I will give you twelve shillings a week, +and a room upstairs. If it succeeds we will make other +arrangements. I am an old man, and a very lonely one. I shall be +glad to have such a companion."</p> + +<p>Frank joyfully embraced the offer, and ran all the way home to +tell his friend, the porter, of the engagement.</p> + +<p>"I am very glad," the man said; "heartily glad. I shall miss +you sorely. I do not know what I should have done without you +when I first lost poor Jane and the kids. But now I can go back +to my old ways again."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps," Frank suggested, "you might arrange to have a room +also in the house. It would not be a very long walk, not above +twenty or five and twenty minutes, and I should be so glad to +have you with me."</p> + +<p>The man sat silent for a time. "No," he said at last, "I thank +you all the same. I should like it too, but I don't think it +would be best in the end. Here all my mates live near, and I +shall get on in time. The Christmas holiday season will soon be +coming on and we shall be up working late. If you were always +going to stop at the place you are going to, it would be +different; but you will rise, never fear. I shall be seeing you +in gentleman's clothes again some of these days. I've heard you +say you were longing to get your books and to be studying again, +and you'll soon fall into your own ways; but if you will let me, +I'll come over sometimes and have a cup of tea and a chat with +you. Now, look here, I'm going out with you now, and I'm going to +buy you a suit of clothes, something like what you had on when I +first saw you. They won't be altogether unsuitable in a shop. +This is a loan, mind, and you may pay me off as you get +flush."</p> + +<p>Frank saw he should hurt the good fellow's feelings by +refusing, and accordingly went out with him, and next morning +presented himself at the shop in a quiet suit of dark gray tweed, +and with his other clothes in a bundle.</p> + +<p>"Aha!" said the old man; "you look more as you ought to do +now, though you're a cut above an assistant in a naturalist's +shop in Ratcliff Highway. Now, let me tell you the names of some +of these birds. They are, every one of them, foreigners; some of +them I don't know myself."</p> + +<p>"I can tell all the family names," Frank said quietly, "and +the species, but I do not know the varieties."</p> + +<p>"Can you!" the old man said in surprise. "What is this +now?"</p> + +<p>"That is a mockingbird, the great black capped mockingbird, I +think. The one next to it is a golden lory."</p> + +<p>So Frank went round all the cages and perches in the shop.</p> + +<p>"Right in every case," the old man said enthusiastically; "I +shall have nothing to teach you. The sailor has been here this +morning. I offered him two pounds for the cat and bird to put in +my front window, but he would not take it, and has paid me that +sum for your work. Here it is. This is yours, you know. You were +not in my employment then, and you will want some things to start +with, no doubt. Now come upstairs, I will show you your room. I +had intended at first to give you the one at the back, but I have +decided now on giving you my daughter's. I think you will like +it."</p> + +<p>Frank did like it greatly. It was the front room on the second +floor. The old man's daughter had evidently been a woman of taste +and refinement. The room was prettily papered, a quiet carpet +covered the floor, and the furniture was neat and in good +keeping. Two pairs of spotless muslin curtains hung across the +windows.</p> + +<p>"I put them up this morning," the old man said, nodding. "I +have got the sheets and bedding airing in the kitchen. They have +not been out of the press for the last three years. You can cook +in the kitchen. There is always a fire there.</p> + +<p>"Now, the first thing to do," he went on when they returned to +the shop, "will be for you to mount a dozen cases for the +windows. These drawers are full of skins of birds and small +animals. I get them for next to nothing from the sailors, and +sell them to furriers and feather preparers, who supply ladies' +hat and bonnet makers. In future, I propose that you shall mount +them and sell them direct. We shall get far higher prices than we +do now. I seem to be putting most of the work on your shoulders, +but do not want you to help me in the shop. I will look after the +birds and buy and sell as I used to do; you will have the back +room private to yourself for stuffing and mounting."</p> + +<p>Frank was delighted at this allotment of labor, and was soon +at work rummaging the drawers and picking out specimens for +mounting, and made a selection sufficient to keep him employed +for weeks. That evening he sallied out and expended his two +pounds in underlinen, of which he was sorely in need. As he +required them his employer ordered showcases for the window, of +various sizes, getting the backgrounds painted and fitted up as +Frank suggested.</p> + +<p>Frank did not get on so fast with his work as he had hoped, +for the fame of the sailor's cat and macaw spread rapidly in the +neighborhood, and there was a perfect rush of sailors and their +wives anxious to have birds and skins, which had been brought +from abroad, mounted. The sailor himself looked in one day.</p> + +<p>"If you like another two pounds for that 'ere cat, governor, +I'm game to pay you. It's the best thing that ever happened to +me. Every one's wanting to see 'em, and there's the old woman +dressed up in her Sunday clothes a-sitting in the parlor as proud +as a peacock a showing of 'em off. The house ain't been so quiet +since I married. Them animals would be cheap to me at a ten pound +note. They'll get you no end of orders, I can tell you."</p> + +<p>The orders, indeed, came in much faster than Frank could +fulfill them, although he worked twelve hours a day; laying aside +all other work, however, for three hours in order to devote +himself to the shop cases, which were to be <i>chef +d'oeuvres</i>.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII: AN OLD +FRIEND</h1> + +<p>For three months Frank passed a quiet and not unpleasant life +with the old naturalist in Ratcliff Highway. The latter took a +great liking to him, and treated him like a son rather than an +assistant. The two took their meals together now, and Frank's +salary had been raised from twelve to eighteen shillings a week. +So attractive had the cases in the windows proved that quite a +little crowd was generally collected round them, and the business +had greatly augmented. The old naturalist was less pleased at +this change than most men would have been in his position. He had +got into a groove and did not care to get out of it. He had no +relatives or any one dependent on him, and he had been well +content to go on in a jog trot way, just paying his expenses of +shop and living. The extra bustle and push worried rather than +pleased him.</p> + +<p>"I am an old man," he said to Frank one day, as after the shop +was closed they sat over their tea. "I have no motive in laying +by money, and had enough for my wants. I was influenced more by +my liking for your face and my appreciation of your talent, than +by any desire of increasing my business. I am taking now three +times as much as I did before. Now I should not mind, indeed, I +should be glad, if I thought that you would succeed me here as a +son would do. I would gladly take you into partnership with me, +and you would have the whole business after my death. But I know, +my boy, that it wouldn't do. I know that the time will come when +you will not be content with so dull a life here. You will either +get an offer from some West End house which would open higher +prospects to you, or you will be wandering away as a collector. +In any case you would not stop here, of that I am quite sure, and +therefore do not care, as I should have done, had you been my +son, for the increase of the business. As it is, lad, I could not +even wish to see you waste your life here."</p> + +<p>Frank, after he was once fairly settled at his new work, had +written to his friend the doctor, at Deal, telling him of the +position he had taken, and that he was in a fair way to make at +least a comfortable living, and that at a pursuit of which he was +passionately fond. He asked him, however, while writing to him +from time to time to give him news of his sister, not to tell any +one his address, as although he was not ashamed of his berth, +still he would rather that, until he had made another step up in +life, his old schoolfellows should not know of his whereabouts. +He had also written to his friend Ruthven a bright chatty letter, +telling him somewhat of his adventures in London and the loss of +his money, and saying that he had now got employment at a +naturalist's, with every chance of making his way.</p> + +<p>"When I mount a bit higher," he concluded, "I shall be awfully +glad to see you again, and will let you know what my address may +then be. For the present I had rather keep it dark. If you will +write to me, addressed to the General Post Office, telling me all +about yourself and the fellows at school, I shall be very, very +glad to get your letter. I suppose you will be breaking up for +Christmas in a few days."</p> + +<p>Christmas came and went. It was signalized to Frank only by +the despatch of a pretty present to Lucy, and the receipt of a +letter from her written in a round childish hand. A week +afterwards he heard somebody come into the shop. His employer was +out, and he therefore went into the shop.</p> + +<p>"I knew it was!" shouted a voice. "My dear old Frank, how are +you?" and his hand was warmly clasped in that of Ruthven.</p> + +<p>"My dear Ruthven," was all Frank could say.</p> + +<p>"I had intended," Ruthven exclaimed, "to punch your head +directly I found you; but I am too glad to do it, though you +deserve it fifty times over. What a fellow you are! I wouldn't +have believed it of you, running away in that secret sort of way +and letting none of us know anything about you. Wasn't I angry, +and sorry too, when I got the letter you wrote me from Deal! When +I went back to school and found that not even Dr. Parker, not +even your sister, knew where you were, I was mad. So were all the +other fellows. However, I said I would find you wherever you had +hidden yourself."</p> + +<p>"But how did you find me?" Frank asked greatly moved at the +warmth of his schoolfellow's greeting.</p> + +<p>"Oh! it wasn't so very difficult to find you when once I got +your letter saying what you were doing. The very day I came up to +town I began to hunt about. I found from the Directory there were +not such a great number of shops where they stuffed birds and +that sort of thing. I tried the places in Bond Street, and +Piccadilly, and Wigmore Street, and so on to begin with. Then I +began to work east, and directly I saw the things in the window +here I felt sure I had found you at last. You tiresome fellow! +Here I have wasted nearly half my holidays looking for you."</p> + +<p>"I am so sorry, Ruthven."</p> + +<p>"Sorry! you ought to be more than sorry. You ought to be +ashamed of yourself, downright ashamed. But, there, I won't say +any more now. Now, can't you come out with me?"</p> + +<p>"No, I can't come out now, Ruthven; but come into this room +with me."</p> + +<p>There for the next hour they chatted, Frank giving a full +account of all he had gone through since he came up to town, +while Ruthven gave him the gossip of the half year at school.</p> + +<p>"Well," Ruthven said at last, "this old Horton of yours must +be a brick. Still, you know, you can't stop here all your life. +You must come and talk it over with my governor."</p> + +<p>"Oh, no, indeed, Ruthven! I am getting on very well here, and +am very contented with my lot, and I could not think of troubling +your father in the matter."</p> + +<p>"Well, you will trouble him a great deal," Ruthven said, "if +you don't come, for you will trouble him to come all the way down +here. He was quite worried when he first heard of your +disappearance, and has been almost as excited as I have over the +search for you.</p> + +<p>"You are really a foolish fellow, Frank," he went on more +seriously; "I really didn't think it of you. Here you save the +lives of four or five fellows and put all their friends under a +tremendous obligation, and then you run away and hide yourself as +if you were ashamed. I tell you you can't do it. A fellow has no +more right to get rid of obligations than he has to run away +without paying his debts. It would be a burden on your mind if +you had a heavy debt you couldn't pay, and you would have a right +to be angry if, when you were perfectly able to pay, your +creditor refused to take the money. That's just the position in +which you've placed my father. Well, anyhow, you've got to come +and see him, or he's got to come and see you. I know he has +something in his mind's eye which will just suit you, though he +did not tell me what it was. For the last day or two he has been +particularly anxious about finding you. Only yesterday when I +came back and reported that I had been to half a dozen places +without success, he said, 'Confound the young rascal, where can +he be hiding? Here are the days slipping by and it will be too +late. If you don't find him in a day or two, Dick, I will set the +police after him -- say he has committed a murder or broken into +a bank and offer a reward for his apprehension.' So you must +either come home with me this afternoon, or you will be having my +father down here tonight."</p> + +<p>"Of course, Ruthven," Frank said, "I would not put your father +to such trouble. He is very kind to have taken so much interest +in me, only I hate --"</p> + +<p>"Oh, nonsense! I hate to see such beastly stuck up pride, +putting your own dignity above the affection of your friends; for +that's really what it comes to, old boy, if you look it fairly in +the face."</p> + +<p>Frank flushed a little and was silent for a minute or two.</p> + +<p>"I suppose you are right, Ruthven; but it is a little hard for +a fellow --"</p> + +<p>"Oh, no, it isn't," Ruthven said. "If you'd got into a scrape +from some fault of your own one could understand it, although +even then there would be no reason for you to cut your old +friends till they cut you. Young Goodall, who lives over at +Bayswater, has been over four or five times to ask me if I have +succeeded in finding you, and I have had letters from Handcock, +and Childers, and Jackson. Just as if a fellow had got nothing to +do but to write letters. How long will you be before you can come +out?"</p> + +<p>"There is Mr. Horton just come in," Frank said. "I have no +doubt he will let me go at once."</p> + +<p>The old naturalist at once assented upon Frank's telling him +that a friend had come who wished him to go out.</p> + +<p>"Certainly, my dear boy. Why, working the hours and hours of +overtime that you do, of course you can take a holiday whenever +you're disposed."</p> + +<p>"He will not be back till late," Ruthven said as they went +out. "I shall keep him all the evening."</p> + +<p>"Oh, indeed, Ruthven, I have no clothes!"</p> + +<p>"Clothes be bothered," Ruthven said. "I certainly shall end by +punching your head, Frank, before the day's out."</p> + +<p>Frank remonstrated no more, but committed himself entirely to +his friend's guidance. At the Mansion House they mounted on the +roof of an omnibus going west, and at Knightsbridge got off and +walked to Eaton Square, where Ruthven's father resided. The +latter was out, so Frank accompanied his friend to what he called +his sanctum, a small room littered up with books, bats, insect +boxes, and a great variety of rubbish of all kinds. Here they +chatted until the servant came up and said that Sir James had +returned.</p> + +<p>"Come on, Frank," Ruthven said, running downstairs. "There's +nothing of the ogre about the governor."</p> + +<p>They entered the study, and Ruthven introduced his friend.</p> + +<p>"I've caught him, father, at last. This is the culprit."</p> + +<p>Sir James Ruthven was a pleasant looking man, with a kindly +face.</p> + +<p>"Well, you troublesome boy," he said, holding out his hand, +"where have you been hiding all this time?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know that I've been hiding, sir," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"Not exactly hiding," Sir James smiled, "only keeping away +from those who wanted to find you. Well, and how are you getting +on?"</p> + +<p>"I am getting on very well, sir. I am earning eighteen +shillings a week and my board and lodging, and my employer says +he will take me into partnership as soon as I come of age."</p> + +<p>"Ah, indeed!" Sir James said. "I am glad to hear that, as it +shows you must be clever and industrious."</p> + +<p>"Yes, father, and the place was full of the most lovely cases +of things Frank had stuffed. There was quite a crowd looking in +at the window."</p> + +<p>"That is very satisfactory. Now, Frank, do you sit down and +write a note to your employer, asking him to send down half a +dozen of the best cases. I want to show them to a gentleman who +will dine with me here today, and who is greatly interested in +such matters. When you have written the note I will send a +servant off at once in a cab to fetch them."</p> + +<p>"And, father," Dick continued, "if you don't mind, might Frank +and I have our dinner quietly together in my room? You've got a +dinner party on, and Frank won't enjoy it half as much as he +would dining quietly with me."</p> + +<p>"By all means," Sir James said. "But mind he is not to run +away without seeing me.</p> + +<p>"You are a foolish lad," he went on in a kind voice to Frank; +"and it was wrong as well as foolish to hide yourself from your +friends. However independent we may be in this world, all must, +to a certain extent, rely upon others. There is scarcely a man +who can stand aloof from the rest and say, 'I want nothing of +you.' I can understand your feeling in shrinking from asking a +favor of me, or of the fathers of the other boys who are, like +myself, deeply indebted to you for the great service you have +rendered their sons. I can admire the feeling if not carried too +far; but you should have let your schoolfellows know exactly how +you were placed, and so have given us the opportunity of repaying +the obligation if we were disposed, not to have run away and +hidden yourself from us."</p> + +<p>"I am sorry, sir," Frank said simply. "I did not like to seem +to trade upon the slight service I rendered some of my +schoolfellows. Dr. Bateman told me I was wrong, but I did not see +it then. Now I think, perhaps he was right, although I am afraid +that if it happened again I should do the same."</p> + +<p>Sir James smiled.</p> + +<p>"I fear you are a stiff necked one, Master Frank. However, I +will not scold you any further. Now, what will you do with +yourselves till dinner time?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, we'll just sit and chat, father. We have got lots more +things to tell each other."</p> + +<p>The afternoon passed in pleasant talk. Frank learned that +Ruthven had now left Dr. Parker's for good, and that he was going +down after the holidays to a clergyman who prepared six or eight +boys for the army. Before dinner the footman returned with half a +dozen of the best cases from the shop, which were brought up to +Dick's room, and the latter was delighted with them. They greatly +enjoyed their dinner together. At nine o'clock a servant came up +and took down the cases. Five minutes later he returned again +with a message, saying that Sir James wished Mr. Richard and his +friend to go down into the dining room. Frank was not shy, but he +felt it rather a trial when he entered the room, where seven or +eight gentlemen were sitting round the table, the ladies having +already withdrawn. The gentlemen were engaged in examining and +admiring the cases of stuffed birds and animals.</p> + +<p>"This is my young friend," Sir James said, "of whom I have +been speaking to you, and whose work you are all admiring. This, +Frank, is Mr. Goodenough, the traveler and naturalist, of whom +you may have heard."</p> + +<p>"Yes, indeed," Frank said, looking at the gentleman indicated. +"I have Mr. Goodenough's book on <i>The Passerine Family</i> at +home."</p> + +<p>"It is rather an expensive book too," the gentleman said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir. My father bought it, not I. He was very fond of +natural history and taught me all I know. He had a capital +library of books on the subject, which Dr. Bateman is keeping for +me, at Deal, till I have some place where I can put them. I was +thinking of getting them up soon."</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough asked him a few questions as to the books in +the library, and then put him through what Frank felt was a sort +of examination, as to his knowledge of their contents.</p> + +<p>"Very good indeed!" Mr. Goodenough said. "I can see from your +work here that you are not only a very clever preparer, but a +close student of the habits and ways of wild creatures. But I was +hardly prepared to find your scientific knowledge so accurate and +extensive. I was at first rather inclined to hesitate when Sir +James Ruthven made me a proposal just now. I do so no longer. I +am on the point of starting on an expedition into the center of +Africa in search of specimens of natural history. He has proposed +that you should accompany me, and has offered to defray the cost +of your outfit, and of your passage out and home. I may be away +for two years. Of course you would act as my assistant, and have +every opportunity of acquiring such knowledge as I possess. It +will be no pleasure trip, you know, but hard work, with all sorts +of hardships and, perhaps, some dangers. At the same time it +would be a fine opening in a career as a naturalist. Well, what +do you say?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, sir!" Frank exclaimed, clasping his hands, "it is of all +things in the world what I should like most. How can I thank you +enough? And you, Sir James, it is indeed kind and thoughtful of +you."</p> + +<p>"We are not quits yet by any means, Frank," Sir James said +kindly. "I am glad indeed to be able to forward your wishes; and +now you must go upstairs and be introduced to my wife. She is +most anxious to see you. She only returned home just before +dinner."</p> + +<p>Frank was taken upstairs, where he and his cases of birds were +made much of by Lady Ruthven and the ladies assembled in the +drawing room. He himself was so filled with delight at the +prospect opened to him that all thought of his dark tweed suit +being out of place among the evening dresses of the ladies and +gentlemen, which had troubled him while he was awaiting the +summons to the dining room, quite passed out of his mind, and he +was able to do the honors of his cases naturally and without +embarrassment. At eleven o'clock he took his leave, promising to +call upon Mr. Goodenough, who was in lodgings in Jermyn Street, +upon the following morning, that gentleman having at Sir James' +request undertaken to procure all the necessary outfit.</p> + +<p>"I feel really obliged to you, Sir James," Mr. Goodenough said +when Frank had left. "The lad has a genius for natural history, +and he is modest and self possessed. From what you tell me he has +done rather than apply for assistance to anyone, he must have +plenty of pluck and resolution, and will make a capital traveling +companion. I feel quite relieved, for it is so difficult to +procure a companion who will exactly suit. Clever naturalists are +rare, and one can never tell how one will get on with a man when +you are thrown together. He may want to have his own way, may be +irritable and bad tempered, may in many respects be a +disagreeable companion. With that lad I feel sure of my ground. +We shall get on capitally together."</p> + +<p>On his return to the shop Frank told his employer, whom he +found sitting up for him, the change which had taken place in his +life, and the opening which presented itself.</p> + +<p>Mr. Horton expressed himself as sincerely glad.</p> + +<p>"I shall miss you sadly," he said, "shall feel very dull for a +time in my solitary house here; but it is better for you that you +should go, and I never expected to keep you long. You were made +for better things than this shop, and I have no doubt that a +brilliant career will be open before you. You may not become a +rich man, for natural history is scarcely a lucrative profession, +but you may become a famous one. Now, my lad, go off to bed and +dream of your future."</p> + +<p>The next morning Frank went over, the first thing after +breakfast, to see his friend the porter. He, too, was very +pleased to hear of Frank's good fortune, but he was too busy to +talk much to him, and promised that he would come over that +evening and hear all about it. Then Frank took his way to Jermyn +Street, and went with Mr. Goodenough to Silver's, where an outfit +suited for the climate of Central Africa was ordered. The clothes +were simple. Shirts made of thin soft flannel, knickerbockers and +Norfolk jackets of tough New Zealand flax, with gaiters of the +same material.</p> + +<p>"There is nothing like it," Mr. Goodenough said; "it is the +only stuff which has a chance with the thorns of an African +forest. Now you will want a revolver, a Winchester repeating +carbine, and a shotgun. My outfit of boxes and cases is ready, so +beyond two or three extra nets and collecting boxes there is +nothing farther to do in that way. For your head you'd better +have a very soft felt hat with a wide brim; with a leaf or two +inside they are as cool as anything, and are far lighter and more +comfortable than the helmets which many people use in the +tropics."</p> + +<p>"As far as shooting goes," Frank said, "I think that I shall +do much better with my blowgun than with a regular one. I can hit +a small bird sitting nineteen times out of twenty."</p> + +<p>"That is a good thing," Mr. Goodenough answered. "For shooting +sitting there is nothing better than a blowgun in skillful hands. +They have the advantage too of not breaking the skin; but for +flying a shotgun is infinitely more accurate. You will have +little difficulty in learning to shoot well, as your eye is +already trained by the use of your blowpipe. Will you want any +knives for skinning?"</p> + +<p>"No, sir. I have a plentiful stock of them."</p> + +<p>"Are you going back to Eaton Square? I heard Sir James ask you +to stop there until we start."</p> + +<p>"No," Frank replied; "I asked his permission to stay where I +am till tomorrow. I did not like to seem in a hurry to run away +from Mr. Horton, who has been extremely kind to me."</p> + +<p>"Mind, you must come here in three days to have your things +tried on," Mr. Goodenough said. "I particularly ordered that they +are to be made easy and comfortable, larger, indeed, than you +absolutely require, but we must allow for growing, and two years +may make a difference of some inches to you. Now, we have only to +go to a bootmaker's and then we have done."</p> + +<p>When the orders were completed they separated, as Mr. +Goodenough was going down that afternoon to the country, and was +not to return until the day preceding that on which they were to +sail. That evening Frank had a long chat with his two friends, +and was much pleased when the old naturalist, who had taken a +great fancy to the honest porter, offered him the use of a room +at his house, saying that he should be more than paid by the +pleasure of his company of an evening. The offer was accepted, +and Frank was glad to think that his two friends would be sitting +smoking their pipes together of an evening instead of being in +their solitary rooms. The next day he took up his residence in +Eaton square.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII: TO +THE DARK CONTINENT</h1> + +<p>After spending two or three days going about London and +enjoying himself with his friend Dick, Frank started for Deal, +where he was pleased to find his sister well and happy. He bade +goodbye to her, to the doctor, and such of his schoolfellows as +lived in Deal, to whom his start for Central Africa was quite an +event. Dr. Bateman handed over to him his watch and chain and his +blowgun, which he had taken care of for him, also his skinning +knives and instruments. The same evening he returned to town, and +spent the days very pleasantly until the afternoon came when he +was to depart. Then he bade farewell to his kind friends Sir +James and Lady Ruthven. Dick accompanied him in the cab to Euston +station, where a minute or two later Mr. Goodenough arrived. The +luggage was placed in a carriage, and Frank stood chatting with +Dick at the door, until the guard's cry, "Take your places!" +caused him to jump into the carriage. There was one more hearty +handshake with his friend, and then the train steamed out of the +station.</p> + +<p>It was midnight when they arrived at Liverpool, and at once +went to bed at the Station Hotel. On coming down in the morning +Frank was astonished at the huge heap of baggage piled up in the +hall, but he was told that this was of daily occurrence, as six +or eight large steamers went out from Liverpool every week for +America alone, and that the great proportion of the passengers +came down, as they had done, on the previous night, and slept at +the Station hotel. Their own share of the baggage was not large, +consisting only of a portmanteau each, Mr. Goodenough having sent +down all his boxes two days previously. At twelve o'clock they +went on board the <i>Niger</i>, bound for the west coast of +Africa. This would carry them as far as Sierra Leone, whence Mr. +Goodenough intended to take passage in a sailing ship to his +starting point for the interior.</p> + +<p>Frank enjoyed the voyage out intensely, and three days after +sailing they had left winter behind; four days later they were +lying in the harbor of Funchal.</p> + +<p>"What a glorious place that would be to ramble about!" he said +to Mr. Goodenough.</p> + +<p>"Yes, indeed. It would be difficult to imagine a greater +contrast than between this mountainous island of Madeira and the +country which we are about to penetrate. This is one of the most +delightful climates in the world, the west coast of Africa one of +the worst. Once well in the interior, the swamp fevers, which are +the curse of the shores, disappear, but African travelers are +seldom long free from attacks of fever of one kind or the other. +However, quinine does wonders, and we shall be far in the +interior before the bad season comes on."</p> + +<p>"You have been there before, you said, Mr. Goodenough?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have been there twice, and have made excursions for +short distances from the coast. But this time we are going into a +country which may be said to be altogether unknown. One or two +explorers have made their way there, but these have done little +towards examining the natural productions of the country, and +have been rather led by inducements of sport than by those of +research."</p> + +<p>"Did you have fever, sir?"</p> + +<p>"Two or three little attacks. A touch of African fever, during +what is called the good season, is of little more importance than +a feverish cold at home. It lasts two or three days, and then +there is an end of it. In the bad season the attacks are +extremely violent, sometimes carrying men off in a few hours. I +consider, however, that dysentery is a more formidable enemy than +fever. However, even that, when properly treated, should be +combated successfully."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean to hire the men to go with you at Sierra +Leone?"</p> + +<p>"Certainly not, Frank. The negroes of Sierra Leone are the +most indolent, the most worthless, and the most insolent in all +Africa. It is the last place in the world at which to hire +followers. We must get them at the Gaboon itself, and at each +place we arrive at afterwards we take on others, merely retaining +one of the old lot to act as interpreter. The natives, although +they may allow white men to pass safely, are exceedingly jealous +of men of other tribes. I shall, however, take with me, if +possible, a body of, say six Houssas, who are the best fighting +negroes on the coast. These I shall take as a bodyguard; the +carriers we shall obtain from the different tribes we visit. The +Kroomen, whom you will see at Cape Palmas, are a magnificent set +of men. They furnish sailors and boatmen to all the ships trading +on these shores. They are strong, willing, and faithful, but they +do not like going up into the interior. Now we will land here and +get a few hours' run on shore. There are one or two peculiarities +about Madeira which distinguish it from other places. To begin +with we will go for a ride in a bullock cart without wheels."</p> + +<p>"But surely it must jolt about terribly," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"Not at all. The roads are paved with round, knubbly stones, +such as you see sometimes in narrow lanes and courts in seaside +places at home. These would not make smooth roads for wheeled +vehicles; but here, as you will see, the carts are placed on long +runners like those of sledges. These are greased, and the driver +always has a pound of candles or so hanging to the cart. When he +thinks that the runners want greasing he takes a candle, lays it +down on the road in front of one of the runners, and lets this +pass over it. This greases it sufficiently, and it glides along +over the stones almost as smoothly as if passing over ice."</p> + +<p>Frank thoroughly enjoyed his run on shore, but was surprised +at the air of listlessness which pervaded the inhabitants. Every +one moved about in the most dawdling fashion. The shopkeepers +looked out from their doors as if it were a matter of perfect +indifference to them whether customers called or not. The few +soldiers in Portuguese uniform looked as if they had never done a +day's drill since they left home. Groups sat in chairs under the +trees and sipped cooling drinks or coffee. The very bullocks +which drew the gliding wagons seemed to move more slowly than +bullocks in other places. Frank and his friend drove in a wagon +to the monastery, high up on the mountain, and then took their +places on a little hand sledge, which was drawn by two men with +ropes, who took them down the sharp descent at a run, dashing +round corners at a pace which made Frank hold his breath. It took +them but a quarter of an hour to regain the town, while an hour +and a half had been occupied in the journey out.</p> + +<p>"I shall buy a couple of hammocks here," Mr. Goodenough said. +"They are made of knotted string, and are lighter and more +comfortable than those to be met with on the coast. I will get a +couple of their cane chairs, too, they are very light and +comfortable."</p> + +<p>In the afternoon they again embarked, and then steamed away +for Sierra Leone. After several days' passage, they arrived there +at daylight, and Frank was soon on deck.</p> + +<p>"What a beautiful place!" he exclaimed. "It is not a bit what +I expected."</p> + +<p>"No," Mr. Goodenough said; "no one looking at it could suppose +that bright pretty town had earned for itself the name of the +white man's grave."</p> + +<p>Sierra Leone is built on a somewhat steep ascent about a mile +up the river. Freetown, as the capital is properly called, stands +some fifty feet or so above the sea, and the barracks upon a +green hill three hundred feet above it, a quarter of a mile back. +The town, as seen from the sea, consists entirely of the houses +of the merchants and shopkeepers, the government buildings, +churches, and other public and European buildings. The houses are +all large and bright with yellow tinged whitewash, and the place +is completely embowered in palms and other tropical trees. The +native town lies hidden from sight among trees on low ground to +the left of the town. Everywhere around the town the hills rise +steep and high, wooded to the summit. Altogether there are few +more prettily situated towns than the capital of Sierra +Leone.</p> + +<p>"It is wonderful," Mr. Goodenough said, "that generations and +generations of Europeans have been content to live and die in +that wretchedly unhealthy place, when they might have established +themselves on those lofty hills but a mile away. There they would +be far above the malarious mists which rise from the low ground. +The walk up and down to their warehouses and offices here would +be good for them, and there is no reason why Sierra Leone should +be an unhealthy residence. Unfortunately the European in Africa +speedily loses his vigor and enterprise. When he first lands he +exclaims, 'I certainly shall have a bungalow built upon those +hills;' but in a short time his energy leaves him. He falls into +the ways of the place, drinks a great deal more spirits than is +good for him, stops down near the water, and at the end of a year +or so, if he lives so long, is obliged to go back to Europe to +recruit.</p> + +<p>"Look at the boats coming out."</p> + +<p>A score of boats, each containing from ten to twelve men, +approached the ship. They remained at a short distance until the +harbor master came on board and pronounced the ship free from +quarantine. Then the boats made a rush to the side, and with +shouts, yells, and screams of laughter scrambled on board. Frank +was at once astonished and amused at the noise and confusion.</p> + +<p>"What on earth do they all want?" he asked Mr. Goodenough.</p> + +<p>"The great proportion of them don't want anything at all," Mr. +Goodenough answered, "but have merely come off for amusement. +Some of them come to be hired, some to carry luggage, others to +tout for the boatmen below. Look at those respectable negresses +coming up the gangway now. They are washerwomen, and will take +our clothes ashore and bring them on board again this afternoon +before we start."</p> + +<p>"It seems running rather a risk," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"No, you will see they all have testimonials, and I believe it +is perfectly safe to intrust things to them."</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough and Frank now prepared to go on shore, but this +was not easily accomplished, for there was a battle royal among +the boatmen whose craft thronged at the foot of the ladder. Each +boat had about four hands, three of whom remained on board her, +while the fourth stood upon the ladder and hauled at the painter +to keep the boat to which he belonged alongside. As out of the +twenty boats lying there not more than two could be at the foot +of the ladder together, the conflict was a desperate one. All the +boatmen shouted, "Here, sar. This good boat, sar. You come wid +me, sar," at the top of their voices, while at the same time they +were hard at work pulling each other's boats back and pushing +their own forward. So great was the struggle as Frank and Mr. +Goodenough approached the gangway, so great the crowd upon the +ladder, that one side of the iron bar from which the ladder +chains depend broke in two, causing the ladder to drop some +inches and giving a ducking to those on the lower step, causing +shouts of laughter and confusion. These rose into perfect yells +of amusement when one of the sailors suddenly loosed the ladder +rope, letting five or six of the negroes into the water up to +their necks. So intense was the appreciation by the sable mind of +this joke that the boatmen rolled about with laughter, and even +the victims, when they had once scrambled into their boats, +yelled like people possessed.</p> + +<p>"They are just like children," Mr. Goodenough said. "They are +always either laughing or quarreling. They are good natured and +passionate, indolent, but will work hard for a time; clever up to +a certain point, densely stupid beyond. The intelligence of an +average negro is about equal to that of a European child of ten +years old. A few, a very few, go beyond this, but these are +exceptions, just as Shakespeare was an exception to the ordinary +intellect of an Englishman. They are fluent talkers, but their +ideas are borrowed. They are absolutely without originality, +absolutely without inventive power. Living among white men, their +imitative faculties enable them to attain a considerable amount +of civilization. Left alone to their own devices they retrograde +into a state little above their native savagery."</p> + +<p>This was said as, after having fixed upon a boat and literally +fought their way into it, they were rowed towards the shore. On +landing Frank was delighted with the greenness of everything. The +trees were heavy with luxuriant foliage, the streets were green +with grass as long and bright as that in a country lane in +England. The hill on which the barracks stand was as bright a +green as you would see on English slopes after a wet April, while +down the streets clear streams were running. The town was alive +with a chattering, laughing, good natured, excitable population, +all black, but with some slight variation in the dinginess of the +hue.</p> + +<p>Never was there such a place for fun as Sierra Leone. Every +one was brimful of it. Every one laughed when he or she spoke, +and every one standing near joined freely in the conversation and +laughed too. Frank was delighted with the display of fruit in the +market, which is probably unequaled in the world. Great piles +there were of delicious big oranges, green but perfectly sweet, +and of equally refreshing little green limes; pineapples and +bananas, green, yellow, and red, guava, and custard apples, +alligator pears, melons, and sour sops, and many other native +fruits.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough purchased a large basket of fruit, which they +took with them on board the ship. The next morning they started +down the coast. They passed Liberia, the republic formed of +liberated slaves, and of negroes from America, and brought up a +mile or two off Monrovia, its capital. The next day they anchored +off Cape Palmas, the headquarters of the Kroomen. A number of +these men came off in their canoes, and caused great amusement to +Frank and the other passengers by their fun and dexterity in the +management of their little craft. These boats are extremely +light, being hollowed out until little thicker than pasteboard, +and even with two Kroomen paddling it is difficult for a European +to sit in them, so extremely crank are they. Light as they are +the Krooboy can stand up and dive from his boat without upsetting +it if he take time; but in the hurry and excitement of diving for +coppers, when half a dozen men would leap overboard together, the +canoes were frequently capsized. The divers, however, thought +nothing of these mishaps, righting the boats and getting in again +without difficulty. Splendidly muscular fellows they were. +Indeed, except among the Turkish hamals it is doubtful whether +such powerful figures could be found elsewhere.</p> + +<p>"They would be grand fellows to take with us, Mr. Goodenough," +Frank said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, if they were as plucky as they are strong, one could +wish for nothing better; but they are notorious cowards, and no +offer would tempt them to penetrate into such a country as that +into which we are going."</p> + +<p>Stopping a few hours at Cape Coast Castle, Accra, and other +ports they at last arrived at Bonny.</p> + +<p>"It is not tempting in appearance," Frank said, +"certainly."</p> + +<p>"No," Mr. Goodenough replied, "this is one of the most +horribly unhealthy spots in Africa. As you see, the white traders +do not dare to live on shore, but take up their residence in +those old floating hulks which are thatched over, and serve as +residences and storehouses. I have a letter from one of the +African merchants in London, and we shall take up our abode on +board his hulk until we get one of the coasting steamers to carry +us down. I hope it will not be many days."</p> + +<p>The very bulky luggage was soon transferred to the hulk, where +Frank and Mr. Goodenough took up their residence. The agent in +charge was very glad to receive them, as any break in the +terrible monotony of such a life is eagerly welcomed. He was a +pale, unhealthy looking man, and had just recovered from an +unusually bad attack of fever. Like most of the traders on the +coast he had an immense faith in the power of spirits.</p> + +<p>"It is the ruin of them," Mr. Goodenough said to Frank when +they were alone. "Five out of six of the men here ruin their +constitutions with spirits, and then fall an easy prey to the +fever."</p> + +<p>"But you have brought spirits with you, Mr. Goodenough. I saw +some of the cases were labeled Brandy.'"</p> + +<p>"Brandy is useful when taken as a medicine, and in moderation. +A little mixed with water at the end of a long day of exhausting +work acts as a restorative, and frequently enables a worn out man +to sleep. But I have brought the brandy you see for the use of +others rather than myself. One case is of the very best spirits +for our own use. The rest is common stuff and is intended as +presents. Our main drink will be tea and chocolate. These are +invaluable for the traveler. I have, besides, large quantities of +calico, brass stair rods, beads, and powder. These are the money +of Africa, and pass current everywhere. With these we shall pay +our carriers and boatmen, with these purchase the right of way +through the various tribes we shall meet. Moreover it is almost +necessary in Africa to pass as traders. The people perfectly +understand that white men come here to trade; but if we said that +our object was to shoot birds and beasts, and to catch +butterflies and insects, they would not believe us in the +slightest degree, but would suspect us of all sorts of hidden +designs. Now we will go ashore and pay our respects to the +king."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean to say that there is a king in that wretched +looking village?" Frank asked in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Kings are as plentiful as peas in Africa," Mr. Goodenough +said, "but you will not see much royal state."</p> + +<p>Frank was disappointed indeed upon landing. Sierra Leone had +given him an exalted idea of African civilization, but this was +at once dispelled by the appearance of Bonny. The houses were +constructed entirely of black mud, and the streets were narrow +and filthy beyond description. The palace was composed of two or +three hovels, surrounded by a mud wall. In one of these huts the +king was seated. Mr. Goodenough and Frank were introduced by the +agent, who had gone ashore with them, and His Majesty, who was an +almost naked negro, at once invited them to join him in the meal +of which he was partaking. As a matter of courtesy they +consented, and plates were placed before them, heaped with a stew +consisting of meat, vegetables, and hot peppers. While the meal +went on the king asked Mr. Goodenough what he had come to the +coast for, and was disappointed to find that he was not going to +set up as a trader at Bonny, as it was the custom for each +newcomer to make a handsome present to him. When the meal was +over they took their leave.</p> + +<p>"Do you know what you have been eating?" the agent asked +Frank.</p> + +<p>"Not in the least," Frank said. "It was not bad; what was +it?"</p> + +<p>"It was dog flesh," the agent answered.</p> + +<p>"Not really!" Frank exclaimed with an uncomfortable sensation +of sickness.</p> + +<p>"Yes, indeed," the agent replied. "Dog's meat is considered a +luxury in Bonny, and dogs are bred specially for the table."</p> + +<p>"You'll eat stranger things than that before you've done, +Frank," Mr. Goodenough continued, "and will find them just as +good, and in many cases better, than those to which you are +accustomed. It is a strange thing why in Europe certain animals +should be considered fit to eat and certain animals altogether +rejected, and this without the slightest reason. Horses and +donkeys are as clean feeders as oxen and sheep. Dogs, cats, and +rats are far cleaner than pigs and ducks. The flesh of the one +set is every bit as good as that of the other, and yet the +poorest peasant would turn up his nose at them. Here sheep and +oxen, horses and donkeys, will not live, and the natives very +wisely make the most of the animals which can do so."</p> + +<p>Frank was soon tired of Bonny, and was glad to hear that they +would start the next day for Fernando Po in a little steamer +called the <i>Retriever</i>. The island of Fernando Po is a very +beautiful one, the peak rising ten thousand feet above the sea, +and wooded to the very summit. Were the trees to some extent +cleared away the island might be very healthy. As it is, it is +little better than the mainland.</p> + +<p>There was not much to see in the town of Clarence, whose +population consists entirely of traders from Sierra Leone, +Kroomen, etc. The natives, whose tribal name is Adiza, live in +little villages in the interior. They are an extremely primitive +people, and for the most part dispense altogether with clothing. +The island belongs to Spain, and is used as a prison, the +convicts being kept in guard ships in the harbor. After a stay of +three days there Mr. Goodenough and Frank took passage in a +sailing ship for the Gaboon.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX: THE START +INLAND</h1> + +<p>After the comforts of a fine steamer the accommodation on +board the little trader was poor indeed. The vessel smelt +horribly of palm oil and was alive with cockroaches. These, +however, Mr. Goodenough and Frank cared little for, as they +brought up their mattresses and slept on deck. Upon their voyage +out from England Frank, as well as several of the other +passengers, had amused himself by practicing with his rifle at +empty bottles thrown overboard, and other objects, and having +nothing else to do now, he resumed the practice, accustoming +himself also to the use of his revolver, the mark being a small +log of wood swung from the end of a yard.</p> + +<p>"I told you," Mr. Goodenough said, "that your skill with the +blowgun would prove useful to you in shooting. You are as good a +shot as I am, and I am considered a fair one. I have no doubt +that with a little practice you will succeed as well with your +double barrel. The shooting of birds on the wing is a knack which +seems to come naturally to some people, while others, practice as +they will, never become good shots."</p> + +<p>The ship touched twice upon its way down to the Gaboon. Once +at the Malimba river, the second time at Botauga, the latter +being the principal ivory port in equatorial Africa.</p> + +<p>"Shall we meet with any elephants, do you think?" Frank asked +his friend.</p> + +<p>"In all probability," Mr. Goodenough said. "Elephant shooting, +of course, does not come within our line of action, and I should +not go at all out of my way for them. Still, if we meet them we +will shoot them. The ivory is valuable and will help to pay our +expenses, while the meat is much prized by the natives, who will +gladly assist us in consideration of the flesh."</p> + +<p>On the sixteenth day after leaving Fernando Po they entered +the Gaboon. On the right hand bank were the fort and dwellings of +the French. A little farther up stood the English factories; and +upon a green hill behind, the church, school, and houses of an +American mission. On the left bank was the wattle town of King +William, the sable monarch of the Gaboon. Mr. Goodenough at once +landed and made inquiries for a house. He succeeded in finding +one, consisting of three rooms, built on piles, an important +point in a country in which disease rises from the soil. At Bonny +Mr. Goodenough had, with the assistance of the agent, enlisted +six Houssas. These people live much higher up on the coast, but +they wander a good deal and may be met with in most of the ports. +The men had formed a guard in one of the hulks, but trade having +been bad the agent had gone home, and they were glad to take +service with Mr. Goodenough. They spoke a few words of English, +and, like the Kroomen, rejoiced in names which had been given +them by sailors. They were called Moses, Firewater, Ugly Tom, +Bacon, Tatters, and King John. They were now for the first time +set to work, and the goods were soon transported from the brig to +the house.</p> + +<p>"Is anything the matter with you, Frank?" Mr. Goodenough asked +that evening.</p> + +<p>"I don't know, sir. My head feels heavy, somehow, and I am +giddy."</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough felt his pulse.</p> + +<p>"You have got your first touch of fever," he said. "I wonder +you've been so long without it. You had better lie down at +once."</p> + +<p>A quarter of an hour afterwards Frank was seized with an +overpowering heat, every vein appearing to be filled with liquid +fire; but his skin, instead of being, as usual, in a state of +perspiration, was dry and hard.</p> + +<p>"Now, Frank, sit up and drink this. It's only some mustard and +salt and water. I have immense faith in an emetic."</p> + +<p>The draught soon took its effect. Frank was violently sick, +and the perspiration broke in streams from him.</p> + +<p>"Here is a cup of tea," Mr. Goodenough said; "drink that and +you will find that there will be little the matter with you in +the morning."</p> + +<p>Frank awoke feeling weak, but otherwise perfectly well. Mr. +Goodenough administered a strong dose of quinine, and after he +had had his breakfast he felt quite himself again.</p> + +<p>"Now," Mr. Goodenough said, "we will go up to the factories +and mission and try and find a really good servant. Everything +depends upon that."</p> + +<p>In a short time an engagement was made with a negro of the +name of Ostik. He was a Mpongwe man, that being the name of the +tribe on the coast. He spoke English fairly, as well as two or +three of the native languages. He had before made a journey some +distance into the interior with a white traveler. He was a tall +and powerfully built negro, very ugly, but with a pleasant and +honest face. Frank felt at once that he should like him.</p> + +<p>"You quite understand," Mr. Goodenough explained, "we are +going through the Fan country, far into the interior. We may be +away from the coast for many months."</p> + +<p>"Me ready, sar," the man answered with a grin. "Mak no odds to +Ostik. He got no wife, no piccanniny. Ostik very good cook. +Master find good grub; he catch plenty of beasts."</p> + +<p>"You're not afraid, Ostik, because it is possible we may have +trouble on the way?"</p> + +<p>"Me not very much afraid, massa. You good massa to Ostik he no +run away if fightee come; but no good fight whole tribe."</p> + +<p>"I hope not to have any fighting at all, Ostik; but as I have +got six Houssas with me who will all carry breech loading guns, I +think we should be a match for a good sized tribe, if +necessary."</p> + +<p>Ostik looked thoughtful. "More easy, massa, go without +Houssas," he said. "Black man not often touch white +traveler."</p> + +<p>"No, Ostik, that is true; but I must take with me trade goods +for paying my way and hiring carriers, and if alone I should be +at the mercy of every petty chief who chose to plunder and delay +me. I am going as a peaceful traveler, ready to pay my way, and +to make presents to the different kings through whose territories +I may pass. But I do not choose to put myself at the mercy of any +of them. I do not say that eight men armed with breech loaders +could defeat a whole tribe; but they would be so formidable, that +any of these negro kings would probably prefer taking presents +and letting us pass peacefully to trying to rob us. The first +thing to do, will be to hire one large canoe, or two if +necessary. The men must agree to take us up into the Fan country, +as far as the rapids on the Gaboon. Then we shall take carriers +there, and the boat can return by itself. These are the things +which will have to go."</p> + +<p>The baggage consisted of ten large tin cases, each weighing +about eighty pounds. These contained cotton cloths, powder, +beads, tea, chocolate, sugar, and biscuits. There were in +addition three bundles of stair rods, each about the same weight +as the boxes. These were done up in canvas. There was also a tent +made of double canvas weighing fifty pounds, and two light +folding tressel beds weighing fifteen pounds apiece. Thus +fourteen men would be required as carriers, besides some for +plantains and other provisions, together with the portmanteaus, +rugs, and waterproof sheets of the travelers. There were besides +six great chests made of light iron. Four of these were fitted +with trays with cork bottoms, for insects. The other two were for +the skins of birds. All the boxes and cases had strips of India +rubber where the lids fitted down, in order to keep out both damp +and the tiny ants which are the plague of naturalists in +Africa.</p> + +<p>Four or five days were occupied in getting together a crew, +for the natives had an abject fear of entering the country of the +cannibal Fans. Mr. Goodenough promised that they should not be +obliged to proceed unless a safe conduct for their return was +obtained from the King of the Fans. A large canoe was procured, +sufficient to convey the whole party. Twelve paddlers were hired, +and the goods taken down and arranged in the boat. The Houssas +had been, on landing, furnished with their guns, which were +Snider rifles, had been instructed in the breech loading +arrangement, and had been set to work to practice at a mark at a +hundred and fifty yards distance -- the stump of an old tree, +some five feet in height, serving for the purpose. The men were +delighted with the accuracy of their pieces and the rapidity at +which they could be fired. Mr. Goodenough impressed upon them +that unless attacked at close quarters, and specially ordered to +fire fast, they must aim just as slowly and deliberately as if +using their old guns, for that in so long a journey ammunition +would be precious, and must, therefore, on no account whatever, +be wasted. In the boxes were six thousand rounds of ammunition, a +thousand for each gun, besides the ammunition for the rifles and +fowling pieces of Mr. Goodenough and Frank.</p> + +<p>In order to render the appearance of his followers as imposing +as possible, Mr. Goodenough furnished each of the Houssas with a +pair of trousers made of New Zealand flax, reaching to their +knees. These he had brought from England with him. They were all +found to be too large, but the men soon set to work with rough +needles and thread and took them in. In addition to these, each +man was furnished with a red sash, which went several times round +the waist, and served to keep the trousers up and to give a gay +aspect to the dress. The Houssas were much pleased with their +appearance. All of them carried swords in addition to the guns, +as in their own country they are accustomed to fight with these +weapons.</p> + +<p>They started early in the morning, and after four hours' +paddling passed Konig Island, an abandoned Dutch settlement. Here +they stopped for an hour or two, and then the sea breeze sprang +up, a sail was hoisted, and late at night they passed a French +guardship placed to mark the boundary of that settlement at a +point where a large tributary called the Boqui runs into it. Here +is a little island called Nenge Nenge, formerly a missionary +station, where the natives are still Christians. At this place +the canoe was hauled ashore. The Houssas had already been +instructed in the method of pitching the tent, and in a very few +minutes this was erected. It was a double poled tent, some ten +feet square, and there was a waterproof sheet large enough to +cover the whole of the interior, thus preventing the miasma from +arising from the ground within it. The beds were soon opened and +fixed, two of the large cases formed a table and two smaller ones +did service as chairs. A lamp was lit, and Frank was charmed with +the comfort and snugness of the abode.</p> + +<p>The men's weapons were fastened round one of the poles to keep +them from the damp night air. Ostik had at once set to work on +landing, leaving the Houssas to pitch the tent. A fire was soon +blazing and a kettle and saucepans suspended over it. Rice was +served out to the men, with the addition of some salt meat, of +which sufficient had been purchased from the captain of the brig +to last throughout the journey in the canoe. The men were all in +high spirits at this addition to their fare, which was more than +had been bargained for, and their songs rose merrily round the +fire in the night air.</p> + +<p>In the morning, after breakfast, they again took their places +in the canoe. For twelve miles they paddled, the tide at first +assisting them, but after this the water from the mountains ahead +overpowered it. Presently they arrived at the first Fan village, +called Olenga, which they reached six hours after starting. The +natives crowded round as the canoe approached, full of curiosity +and excitement, for never but once had a white man passed up the +river. These Fans differed widely from the coast negroes. Their +hair was longer and thicker, their figures were slight, their +complexion coffee colored, and their projecting upper jaws gave +them a rabbit mouthed appearance. They wore coronets on their +heads adorned with the red tail feathers of the common gray +parrot. Most of the men had beards, which were divided in the +middle, red and white beads being strung up the tips. Some wore +only a strip of goatskin hanging from the waist, or the skin of a +tigercat, while others had short petticoats made of cloth woven +from the inner bark of a tree. The travelers were led to the hut +of the chief, where they were surrounded by a mob of the +cannibals. The Houssas had been strictly enjoined to leave their +guns in the bottom of the canoe, as Mr. Goodenough desired to +avoid all appearance of armed force. The chief demanded of Ostik +what these two white men wanted here, and whether they had come +to trade. Ostik replied that the white men were going up the +river into the country beyond to shoot elephants and buy ivory, +that they did not want to trade for logwood or oil, but that they +would give presents to the chiefs of the Fan villages. A score of +cheap Birmingham muskets had been brought from England by Mr. +Goodenough for this purpose. One of these was now bestowed upon +the chief, together with some powder and ball, three bright +cotton handkerchiefs, some gaudy glass beads, and two looking +glasses for his wives. This was considered perfectly +satisfactory.</p> + +<p>The crowd was very great, and at Mr. Goodenough's dictation +Ostik informed the chief that if the white men were left quiet +until the evening they would show his people many strange things. +On the receipt of this information the crowd dispersed. But when +at sunset the two travelers took a turn through the village, the +excitement was again very great. The men stood their ground and +stared at them, but the women and children ran screaming away to +hide themselves. The idea of the people of Central Africa of the +whites is that they are few in number, that they live at the +bottom of the sea, and are possessed of great wealth, but that +they have no palm oil or logwood, and are, therefore, compelled +to come to land to trade for these articles. They believe that +the strange clothes they wear are manufactured from the skins of +sea beasts.</p> + +<p>When night fell Mr. Goodenough fastened a sheet against the +outside of the chief's hut, and then placed a magic lantern in +position ten paces from it. The Fans were then invited to gather +round and take their seats upon the ground. A cry of astonishment +greeted the appearance of the bright disk. This was followed by a +wilder yell when this was darkened, and an elephant bearing some +men sitting on his back was seen to cross the house. The men +leaped to their feet and seized their spears. The women screamed, +and Ostik, who was himself somewhat alarmed, had great difficulty +in calming their fears and persuading them to sit down again, +assuring them that they would see many wonderful things, but that +nothing would hurt them.</p> + +<p>The next view was at first incomprehensible to many of them. +It was a ship tossing in a stormy sea; but some of those present +had been down to the mouth of the river, and these explained to +the others the nature of the phenomenon. In all there were twenty +slides, all of which were provided with movable figures; the last +two being chromatropes, whose dancing colors elicited screams of +delight from the astonished natives. This concluded the +performance, but for hours after it was over the village rang +with a perfect Babel of shouts, screams, and chatter. The whole +thing was to the Fans absolutely incomprehensible, and their +astonishment was equalled by their awe at the powers of the white +men.</p> + +<p>The next two days they remained at Olenga, as word was sent up +to Itchongue, the next town, asking the chief there for leave to +come forward. The people had now begun to get over their first +timidity, and when Frank went out for a walk after breakfast he +was somewhat embarrassed by the women and girls crowding round +him, feeling his clothes and touching his hands and face to +assure themselves that these felt like those of human beings. He +afforded them huge delight by taking off his Norfolk jacket and +pulling up the sleeves of his shirt to show them that his arms +were the same color as his hands, and so elated were they with +this exhibition that it was with great difficulty that he +withstood their entreaties that he would disrobe entirely. +Indeed, Ostik had at last to come to his rescue and carry him off +from the laughing crowd by which he was surrounded.</p> + +<p>After dinner Mr. Goodenough invited the people to sit down in +a vast circle holding each other's hands. He then told them that +he should at a word make them all jump to their feet. Then taking +out a small but powerful galvanic battery, he arranged it and +placed wires into the hands of the two men nearest to him in the +great circle.</p> + +<p>"Now," he said, "when I clap my hands you will find that you +are all obliged to jump up."</p> + +<p>He gave the signal. Frank turned on the battery, and in an +instant the two hundred men and women, with a wild shriek, either +leapt to their feet or rolled backward on the ground. In another +minute not a native was to be seen, with the exception of the +chief, who had not been included in the circle. The latter, at +Mr. Goodenough's request, shouted loudly to his subjects to +return, for that the white men would do them no harm; but it was +a long time before, slowly and cautiously, they crept back again. +When they had reassembled Mr. Goodenough showed them several +simple but astonishing chemical experiments, which stupefied them +with wonder; and concluded with three or four conjuring tricks, +which completed their amazement. A long day's paddling took them +to Itchongue, where they were as well received as at Olenga. Here +they stopped for two days, and the magic lantern was again +brought out, and the other tricks repeated with a success equal +to that which they had before obtained. As another day's paddling +would take them to the rapids Mr. Goodenough now set up a +negotiation for obtaining a sufficient number of carriers. After +great palaver, and the presentation of three guns to the chief to +obtain his assistance, thirty men were engaged. These were each +to receive a yard of calico or one brass stair rod a day, and +were to proceed with the party until such time as they could +procure carriers from another tribe.</p> + +<p>The new recruits were taken up in another canoe. Several +villages were passed on the way. The river became a mere rapid, +against which the canoes with difficulty made their way. They had +now entered the mountains which rose steeply above them, +embowered in wood. Two days of severe work took them to the foot +of the falls. Here the canoes were unloaded. The men hired on the +coast received their pay, and turned the boat's head down stream. +The other canoe accompanied it, and the travelers remained with +their bodyguard of Houssas and their carriers.</p> + +<p>"Now," Mr. Goodenough said, "we are fairly embarked on our +journey, and we will commence operations at once. I have heard +the cries of a great many birds which are strange to me today, +and I expect that we shall have a good harvest. We may remain +here for some time. The first thing to do is to find food for our +followers. We have got six sacks of rice, but it will never do to +let our men depend solely upon these. They would soon come to an +end."</p> + +<p>"But how are we to feed forty people?" Frank asked in +astonishment.</p> + +<p>"I pointed out to you today," Mr. Goodenough said, "the tracks +of hippopotami in various places. One of these beasts will feed +the men for nearly a week. There were, too, numbers of +alligators' eggs on the banks, and these creatures make by no +means bad eating. Your rifle will be of no use against such +animals as these. You had better take one of the Sniders. I have +some explosive shells which will fit them. My own double +barrelled rifle is of the same bore."</p> + +<p>After dinner Mr. Goodenough told two of the Houssas to +accompany them with their rifles, together with three or four of +the Fans. He made his way down the stream to a point where the +hills receded, and where he had observed a great many marks of +the river horses. As they approached the spot they heard several +loud snorts, and making their way along as quietly as possible +they saw two of the great beasts standing in the stream. At this +point it widened a good deal and was shallow and quite near the +bank. The Fans had been told to stay behind directly the snorting +was heard, and Mr. Goodenough and Frank, rifle in hand, crept +forward, with the Houssas as still and noiseless as cats close +behind them.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X: LOST IN THE +FOREST</h1> + +<p>The hippopotami were playing together, floundering in the +shallow water, and the noise they made prevented their hearing +the stealthy approach of their enemies.</p> + +<p>"You take the one nearest shore, Frank, I will take the other. +Aim at the forehead between the eyes. I will make a slight sound +to attract their attention."</p> + +<p>Frank knelt on one knee and took steady aim. Mr. Goodenough +then gave a shout, and the two animals turning their heads stood +staring at the foliage, scarce a dozen yards away, in which the +travelers were concealed. The guns flashed at the same moment, +and as if struck by lightning the hippopotami fell in the stream. +The explosive balls had both flown true to the mark, invariably a +fatal one in the case of the river horse. Frank as he fired had +taken another rifle which the Houssas held in readiness for him, +but there was no occasion for its use. The Fans came running up, +and on seeing the great beasts lying in the stream, gave a shout +of joy.</p> + +<p>"That will do for this evening," Mr. Goodenough said. "They +are large beasts, and will give food enough for a week or ten +days."</p> + +<p>They then returned to the camp which, at the news brought by +one of the Fans, had already been deserted. Before the natives +retired to sleep the hippopotami had been cut up and carried to +the camp. Portions were already frizzling over the fires, other +parts set aside for the consumption of the next two days, and the +rest cut up in strips to be dried in the sun. The tongue of one +was cut up and fried as a great luxury for the white men's supper +by Ostik. It is not often that the natives of equatorial Africa +are able to indulge in meat, and the joy of the Fans at this +abundant supply, and the prospect afforded them of further good +eating, raised their spirits to the highest extent.</p> + +<p>Next morning at daybreak Mr. Goodenough and Frank set out from +the camp. Each carried a double barreled gun, and was accompanied +by one of the Houssas carrying his rifle and a butterfly net, and +when three hours later they returned to the camp for breakfast +and compared their spoils they found that an excellent beginning +had been made. Nearly a score of birds, of which several were +very rare, and five were pronounced by Mr. Goodenough to be +entirely new, had been shot, and many butterflies captured. Frank +had been most successful in this respect, as he had come across a +small clearing in which were several deserted huts. This was just +the place in which butterflies delight, for, although many kinds +prefer the deep shades of the forest, by far the greater portion +love the bright sunlight.</p> + +<p>After breakfast they again set out, Frank this time keeping +along the edge of the stream, where he had observed many +butterflies as he came up, and where many birds of the kingfisher +family had also been seen. He had been very successful, and was +walking along by the edge of the water with his eyes fixed upon +the trees above, where he had a minute before heard the call of a +bird, when he was startled by a shout from the Houssa behind him. +He involuntarily sprang back, and it was well he did so; for on +the instant something swept by within an inch or two of his head. +Looking round he saw, at the edge of the stream below him, a huge +alligator. This had struck at him with its tail -- the usual +manner in which the alligator supplies itself with food -- and +had it not been for the warning cry of the Houssa, would have +knocked him into the stream. Its mouth was open and Frank, as if +by instinct, fired the contents of both barrels into its throat. +The animal rolled over on to its back in the water and then +turned as if to struggle to regain the bank. The Houssa, however, +had run up, and, placing the muzzle of his gun within a foot of +its eye, fired, and the creature rolled over dead, and was swept +away by the stream.</p> + +<p>The Houssa gave a loud shout which was answered in the +distance. He then shouted two or three words, and turning to +Frank said: "Men get alligator," and proceeded on his way without +concerning himself further in the matter.</p> + +<p>On his return to camp in the evening Frank found that the +alligator had been discovered and fished out, and that its steaks +were by no means bad eating. Frank told Mr. Goodenough of the +narrow escape he had had, and the latter pointed out to him the +necessity of always keeping his eyes on the watch.</p> + +<p>"Alligators frequently carry off the native women when engaged +in washing," he said, "and almost invariably strike them, in the +first place, into the river with a blow of their tails. Once in +the water they are carried off, drowned, and eaten at leisure. +Sometimes, indeed, a woman may escape with the loss of a foot or +arm, but this is the exception."</p> + +<p>"What is the best thing to do when so attacked?" Frank asked. +"I don't mean to be caught napping again, still it is as well to +know what to do if I am."</p> + +<p>"Men when so attacked have been known frequently to escape by +thrusting their thumbs or fingers into the creature's eyes. If it +can be done the alligator is sure to lose his hold, but it +demands quickness and great presence of mind. When a reptile is +tearing at one's leg, and hurrying one along under water, you can +see that the nerve required to keep perfectly cool, to feel for +the creature's eyes, and to thrust your finger into them is very +great. The best plan, Frank, distinctly is to keep out of their +reach altogether."</p> + +<p>After remaining for a fortnight at their camp they prepared +for a move. Another hippopotamus was killed, cut up and dried, +and the flesh added to the burdens. Then the tent was struck and +they proceeded farther into the mountains. Two days later they +halted again, the site being chosen beside a little mountain +rivulet. They were now very high up in the hills, Mr. Goodenough +expecting to meet with new varieties of butterflies and insects +at this elevation. They had scarcely pitched their camp when +Frank exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"Surely, Mr. Goodenough, I can hear some dogs barking! I did +not know that the native dogs barked."</p> + +<p>"Nor do they. They may yelp and howl, but they never bark like +European dogs. What you hear is the bark of some sort of monkey +or baboon."</p> + +<p>This opinion was at once confirmed by the Fans.</p> + +<p>"We will sally out with our guns at once," Mr. Goodenough +said.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the thought of shooting monkeys," Frank +muttered, as he took up his Winchester carbine.</p> + +<p>"They are very excellent eating," Mr. Goodenough continued, +"superior in my opinion, and, indeed, in that of most travelers, +to any other meat. We shall meet with no other kind of creature +fit for food up here. The birds, indeed, supply us amply, but for +the men it is desirable that we should obtain fresh meat when we +have the chance. These baboons are very mischievous creatures, +and are not to be attacked with impunity. Let four of the Houssas +with their guns come with us."</p> + +<p>Following the direction of the sounds they had heard, the +travelers came upon a troupe of great baboons. It was a curious +sight. The males were as big as large dogs, some were sitting +sunning themselves on rocks, others were being scratched by the +females. Many of these had a baby monkey clinging on their necks, +while others were playing about in all directions.</p> + +<p>"I'd rather not shoot at them, Mr. Goodenough," Frank +said.</p> + +<p>"You will be glad enough to eat them," Mr. Goodenough +answered, and selecting a big male he fired. The creature fell +dead. The others all sprang to their feet. The females and little +ones scampered off. The males, with angry gestures, rushed upon +their assailants, barking, showing their teeth, and making +menacing gestures. Mr. Goodenough fired again, and Frank now, +seeing that they were likely to be attacked, also opened fire. +Six of the baboons were killed before the others abstained from +the attack and went screaming after the females. The dead baboons +were brought down, skinned, and two were at once roasted, the +others hung up to trees. It required a great effort on Frank's +part to overcome his repugnance to tasting these creatures, but, +when he did so, he admitted that the meat was excellent.</p> + +<p>That night they were disturbed by a cry of terror from the +men. Seizing their rifles they ran out.</p> + +<p>"There are two leopards, sar," Ostik said; "they have smelt +the monkeys."</p> + +<p>The shouts scared the creatures away, and the natives kept up +a great fire till morning.</p> + +<p>"We must get the skins if we can," Mr. Goodenough said. "The +skins of the equatorial leopard are rare. If we can get them both +they will make a fine group for you to stuff when you get back, +Frank."</p> + +<p>"Are you thinking of following their trail?" Frank asked.</p> + +<p>"That would be useless," Mr. Goodenough answered. "In soft +swampy ground we might do so, but up here it would be out of the +question. We must set a bait for them tonight, but be careful +while you are out today. They have probably not gone far from the +camp, and they are very formidable beasts. They not unfrequently +attack and kill the natives."</p> + +<p>The Fans were much alarmed at the neighborhood of the +leopards, and none would leave the camp during the day. Two of +the Houssas were left on guard, although Mr. Goodenough felt sure +that the animals would not attempt to carry off any meat in the +daylight, and two Houssas accompanied each of the travelers while +out in search of butterflies.</p> + +<p>Nothing was heard of the leopards during the day. At nightfall +a portion of one of the monkeys was roasted and hung up, so as to +swing within four feet of the ground from the arm of a tree, a +hundred yards from the camp. Mr. Goodenough and Frank took their +seats in another tree a short distance off. The night was fine +and the stars clear and bright. The tree on which the meat hung +stood somewhat alone, so that sufficient light penetrated from +above to enable any creatures approaching the bait to be seen. +Instead of his little Winchester, Frank had one of the Sniders +with explosive bullets. The Houssas were told to keep a sharp +watch in camp, in case the leopards, approaching from the other +side, might be attracted by the smell of meat there, rather than +by the bait. The Fans needed no telling to induce them to keep up +great fires all night.</p> + +<p>Soon after dark the watchers heard a roaring in the forest. It +came from the other side of the camp.</p> + +<p>"That is unlucky," Mr. Goodenough said. "We have pitched on +the wrong side. However, they will probably be deterred by the +fire from approaching the camp, and will wander round and round: +so we may hope to hear of them before long."</p> + +<p>In answer to the roar of the leopards the natives kept up a +continued shouting. For some hours the roaring continued at +intervals, sometimes close at hand, sometimes at a considerable +distance. Frank had some difficulty in keeping awake, and was +beginning to wish that the leopards would move off altogether. +Two or three times he had nearly dozed off, and his rifle had +almost slipped from his hold. All at once he was aroused by a +sharp nudge from his companion. Fixing his eyes on the bait he +made out something immediately below it. Directly afterwards +another creature stole forward. They were far less distinct than +he had expected.</p> + +<p>"You take the one to the left," Mr. Goodenough whispered; +"Now!"</p> + +<p>They fired together. Two tremendous roars were heard. One of +the leopards immediately bounded away. The other rolled over and +over, and then, recovering its feet, followed its companion, Mr. +Goodenough firing his second barrel after him.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you missed altogether, Frank," he said.</p> + +<p>"I don't think so, sir. I fancied I saw the flash of the shell +as it struck him, but where, I have not the remotest idea. I +could not make him out clear enough. It was merely a dim shape, +and I fired as well as I could at the middle of it.</p> + +<p>"Shall we go back to the camp now?" Frank asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes, we can safely do so. You can tell by the sound of the +roars that they are already some distance away. There is little +chance of their returning tonight. In the morning we will follow +them. There is sure to be blood, and the natives will have no +difficulty in tracking them."</p> + +<p>The rest of the night passed quietly, although roars and +howling could be heard from time to time in the distance.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning they started with the Houssas.</p> + +<p>"We must be careful today," Mr. Goodenough said, "for a +wounded leopard is a really formidable beast."</p> + +<p>There was no difficulty in taking up the traces.</p> + +<p>"One of them at least must be hard hit," Mr. Goodenough +remarked; "there are traces of blood every yard."</p> + +<p>They had gone but a short distance when one of the Houssas +gave a sudden exclamation, and pointed to something lying at the +edge of a clump of bushes.</p> + +<p>"Leopard," he said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, there is one of them, sure enough. I think it's dead, +but we cannot be too cautious. Advance very carefully, Frank, +keeping ready to fire instantly."</p> + +<p>They moved forward slowly in a body, but their precaution was +unnecessary. There was no movement in the spotted, tawny skin as +they advanced, and when they came close they could see that the +leopard was really dead. He had been hit by two bullets. The +first had struck his shoulder and exploded there, inflicting so +terrible a wound that it was wonderful he had been able to move +afterwards. The other had struck him on the back, near the tail, +and had burst inside him. Frank on seeing the nature of the +wounds was astonished at the tenacity of life shown by the +animal.</p> + +<p>"I wonder whether I hit the other," he said.</p> + +<p>"I have no doubt at all about it," Mr. Goodenough answered, +"although I did not think so before. It seemed to me that I only +heard the howls of one animal in the night, and thought it was +the one I had hit. But as this fellow must have died at once, it +is clear that the cries were made by the other."</p> + +<p>A sharp search was now set up for the tracks of the other +leopard, the Houssas going back to the tree and taking it up +anew. They soon found traces of blood in a line diverging from +that followed by the other animal. For an hour they followed +this, great care being required, as at times no spots of blood +could be seen for a considerable distance. At last they seemed to +lose it altogether. Mr. Goodenough and Frank stood together, +while the Houssas, scattered round, were hunting like well +trained dogs for a sign. Suddenly there was a sharp roar, and +from the bough of a tree close by a great body sprang through the +air and alighted within a yard of Frank. The latter, in his +surprise, sprang back, stumbled and fell, but in an instant the +report of the two barrels of Mr. Goodenough's rifle rang out. In +a moment Frank was on his feet again ready to fire. The leopard, +however, lay dead, its skull almost blown off.</p> + +<p>"You have had another narrow escape," Mr. Goodenough said. "I +see that your ball last night broke one of his hind legs. That +spoilt his spring. Had it not been for that he would undoubtedly +have reached you, and a blow with his paw, given with all his +weight and impetus, would probably have killed you on the spot. +We ought not to have stood near a tree strong enough to bear him +when in pursuit of a wounded leopard. They will always take to +trees if they can, and you see this was a very suitable one for +him. This bough on which he was lying starts from the trunk only +about four feet from the ground, so that even with his broken leg +he was able to get upon it without difficulty. Well, thank God, +you've not been hurt, my boy. It will teach us both to be more +careful in future."</p> + +<p>That afternoon Frank was down with his second attack of fever, +a much more severe one than the first had been. Mr. Goodenough's +favorite remedy had its effect of producing profuse perspiration, +but two or three hours afterwards the hot fit again came on, and +for the next four days Frank lay half delirious, at one time +consumed with heat, and the next shivering as if plunged into ice +water. Copious doses of quinine, however, gradually overcame the +fever, and on the fifth day he was convalescent. It was, +nevertheless, another week before he was sufficiently recovered +to be able to resume his hunting expeditions. They again shifted +their camp, and this time traveled for three weeks, making short +journeys, and halting early so as to give half a day from each +camping place for their work.</p> + +<p>Frank was one day out as usual with one of the Houssas. He had +killed several birds when he saw a butterfly, of a species which +he had not before met with, flitting across a gleam of sunshine +which streamed in through a rift in the trees. He told his Houssa +to wait where he was in charge of the two guns and birds, and +started off with his net in pursuit of the butterfly. The +creature fluttered away with Frank in full pursuit. Hither and +thither it flitted, seemingly taking an impish delight in +tantalizing Frank, settling on a spot where a gleam of sunlight +streamed upon the bark of a tree, till Frank had stolen up within +a couple of paces of it, and then darting away again at a pace +which defied Frank's best attempts to keep up with it until it +chose to play with him again. Intent only upon his chase Frank +thought of nothing else. At last, with a shout of triumph, he +inclosed the creature in his net, shook it into the wide pickle +bottle, containing a sponge soaked with chloroform, and then, +after tightly fitting in the stopper, he looked around. He +uttered an exclamation of dismay as he did so. He saw by the +bands of light the sun was already setting, and knew that he must +have been for upwards of an hour in chase of the butterfly. He +had not the slightest idea of the direction in which he had come. +He had, he knew, run up hill and down, but whether he had been +traveling in a circle or going straight in one direction, he had +not the least idea. He might be within a hundred yards of the +spot where he had left the Houssa. He might be three or four +miles away.</p> + +<p>He at once drew out his revolver, which he always carried +strapped to his belt, and discharged the six chambers, waiting +for half a minute between each shot, and listening intently for +an answer to his signal. None came. The stillness of the wood was +unbroken, and Frank felt that he must have wandered far indeed +from his starting place, and that he was completely lost. His +first impulse was to start off instantly at the top of his speed, +but a moment's thought convinced him that this would be useless. +He had not an idea of the direction which he should pursue. +Besides the sun was sinking, twilight is short in the tropics, +and in half an hour it would be as dark as midnight in the +forest. Remembering his adventure with the leopard he determined +to climb into a tree and pass the night there. He knew that an +active search would be set on foot by his friends next morning, +and that, as every step he took was as likely to lead him from as +towards the camp, it was better to stay where he was.</p> + +<p>He soon found a tree with a branch which would suit his +purpose, and, climbing up into it, lit his pipe and prepared for +an uncomfortable night. Frank had never smoked until he reached +Africa, but he had then taken to it on the advice of Mr. +Goodenough, who told him that smoking was certainly a preventive, +to some extent, of fever in malarious countries, and, although he +had not liked it at first, he had now taken kindly to his pipe, +and smoked from the time when the evening mists began to rise +until he went to bed.</p> + +<p>The time passed very slowly. The cries of wild creatures could +be heard in the woods, and although Frank did not expect to be +attacked, it was impossible to sleep with these calls of +leopards, with which the forest seemed to abound, in his ears. He +had reloaded his revolver immediately after discharging it, and +had replaced it in his pouch, and felt confident that nothing +could climb the tree. Besides, he had heard that leopards seldom +attack men unless themselves attacked. Sleep, however, was out of +the question, for when he slept he might have fallen from his +seat in the crotch of the tree. Occasionally, however, he dozed +off, waking up always with an uncomfortable start, and a feeling +that he had just saved himself from falling. With the earliest +dawn of morn he descended, stiff and weary, from the tree. +Directly the sun rose he set off walking. He knew at least that +he was to the south of the camp, and that by keeping the sun on +his right hand till it reached the zenith he must get in time to +the little stream on which it was pitched. As he walked he +listened intently for the sound of guns. Once or twice he fancied +that he heard them, but he was quite unable to judge of the +direction. He had been out with the Houssa about six hours before +he strayed from him in the pursuit of the butterfly, and they had +for some time been walking towards the camp, in order to reach it +by nightfall. Thus he thought, that at that time, he could only +have been some three or four miles distant from it. Supposing +that he had run due south, he could still be but eight miles from +the stream, and he thought that in three hours' walking he might +arrive there. In point of fact, after leaving the Houssa the +butterfly had led him towards the southeast, and as the stream +took a sharp bend to the north a little distance above the camp, +he was many miles farther from it than he expected. This stream +was one of the upper tributaries of the Gaboon.</p> + +<p>After walking for two hours the character of the forest +changed. The high trees were farther apart, and a thick +undergrowth began to make its appearance, frequently causing him +to make long detours and preventing his following the line he had +marked out for himself. This caused him much uneasiness, for he +knew that he had passed across no such country on his way from +the camp, and the thought that he might experience great +difficulties in recovering it, now began to press upon him.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI: A HOSTILE +TRIBE</h1> + +<p>Every step that he went the ground grew softer and more +swampy, and he at length determined to push on no farther in this +direction, but turning to his left to try and gain higher ground, +and then to continue on the line he had marked out for +himself.</p> + +<p>His progress was now very slow. The bush was thick and close, +thorny plants and innumerable creepers continually barred his +way, and the necessity for constantly looking up through the +trees to catch a glimpse of the sun, which was his only guide, +added to his difficulty. At length, when his watch told him it +was eleven o'clock, he came to a standstill, the sun being too +high overhead to serve him as a reliable guide. He had now been +walking for nearly six hours, and he was utterly worn out and +exhausted, having had no food since his midday meal on the +previous day. He was devoured with thirst, having merely rinsed +his mouth in the black and poisonous water of the swamps he had +crossed. His sleepless night, too, had told on him. He was bathed +in perspiration, and for the last hour had scarcely been able to +drag his feet along.</p> + +<p>He now lay down at the foot of a great tree, and for three or +four hours slept heavily. When he awoke he pursued his journey, +the sun serving as a guide again. In two hours' time he had got +upon higher ground. The brushwood was less dense, and he again +turned his face to the north, and stepped forward with renewed +hopes.</p> + +<p>It was late in the afternoon when he came upon a native path. +Here he sat down to think. He did not remember having crossed +such a path on the day before. Probably it crossed the stream at +some point above the encampment. Therefore it would serve as a +guide, and he might, too, come upon some native village where he +could procure food. By following it far enough he must arrive +somewhere. He sat for a quarter of an hour to rest himself, and +then proceeded along the path, whose direction seemed to be the +northwest.</p> + +<p>For an hour he proceeded and then paused, hearing a sudden +outcry ahead. Scampering along the path came a number of great +baboons, and Frank at once stepped aside into the bush to avoid +them, as these are formidable creatures when disturbed. They were +of a very large species, and several of the females had little +ones clinging around their necks. In the distance Frank could +hear the shouts of some natives, and supposed that the monkeys +had been plundering their plantations, and that they were driving +them away. The baboons passed without paying any attention to +him, but Frank observed that the last of the troop was carrying a +little one in one of its forearms.</p> + +<p>Frank glanced at the baby monkey and saw that it had round its +waist a string of blue beads. As a string of beads is the only +attire which a negro child wears until it reaches the age of ten +or eleven years old, the truth at once flashed upon Frank that +the baboons were carrying off a native baby, which had probably +been set down by its mother while she worked in the plantation. +Instantly he drew his pistol, leaped into the road, and fired at +the retreating ape. It gave a cry, dropped the baby and turned to +attack its aggressor.</p> + +<p>Frank waited till it was within six feet, and then shot it +through the head. He sprang forward and seized the baby, but in a +moment he was attacked by the whole party of baboons, who, +barking like dogs, and uttering angry cries, rushed at him. Frank +stood his ground, and discharged the four remaining barrels of +his revolver at the foremost animals. Two of these dropped, but +the others who were only wounded sprang upon him. Frank struck +out with the butt end of his pistol, but in a minute he was +overpowered.</p> + +<p>One monkey seized him by the leg with his teeth, while another +bit his arm. Others struck and scratched at him, and he was at +once thrown down. He tried to defend his face with his arms, +kicking and struggling to the best of his power. With one hand he +drew the long knife for skinning animals, which he wore at his +belt, and struck out fiercely, but a baboon seized his wrist in +its teeth, and Frank felt that all was over, when suddenly his +assailants left him, and the instant afterwards he was lifted to +his feet by some negroes.</p> + +<p>He had, when attacked by the apes, thrown the baby into a +clump of ferns close by, in order to have the use of both his +hands, and when he looked round he found that a negress had +already picked it up, and was crying and fondling it. The negroes +appeared intensely astonished at Frank's color, and he judged by +their exclamations of surprise that, not only had they not seen a +white man before, but that they had not heard of one being in the +neighborhood.</p> + +<p>Frank had been too severely bitten and mauled by the baboons +to be able to walk, and the negroes, seeing this, raised him, and +four of them carried him to their village, which was but a +quarter of a mile distant. Here he was taken to the principal +hut, and laid on a bed. His wounds were dressed with poultices +formed of bruised leaves of some plant, the natives evincing the +utmost astonishment as Frank removed his clothes to enable these +operations to be performed.</p> + +<p>By pointing to his lips he indicated that he was hungry and +thirsty. Water was brought to him, and cakes made from pounded +yams pressed and baked. Having eaten and drank he closed his eyes +and lay back, and the natives, who had before been all noisily +chattering together, now became suddenly silent, and stealing +away left the strange white visitor to sleep.</p> + +<p>When Frank woke he could see by the light that it was early +morning. A woman with a child in her lap, whom Frank recognized +as the negress who had picked up the baby, was sitting on a low +stool by his side. On seeing him open his eyes she came to the +bed, took his hand and put it to her lips, and then raised the +baby triumphantly and turned it round and round to show that it +had escaped without damage. Then when Frank pointed again to his +lips she brought him a pineapple, roughly cut off the skin, and +sliced it. Frank ate the juicy fruit, and felt immensely +refreshed, for the West Coast pineapple is even more delicious +than that found in the West Indies. Then the woman removed the +bandages and applied fresh poultices to his wounds, talking in +low soft tones, and, as Frank had no doubt, expressing sorrow at +their cause.</p> + +<p>Frank now endeavored to explain to her that he had a white +companion in the woods, but the woman, not understanding, brought +in two or three other natives, who stood round the couch and +endeavored to gather what he wished to say.</p> + +<p>Frank held up two fingers. Then he pointed to himself and shut +down one finger, keeping the other erect, and then pointed all +round to signify that he had a friend somewhere in the wood. A +grin of comprehension stole over the faces of the negroes, and +Frank saw that he was understood.</p> + +<p>Then he again held up his two fingers, and taking the hands of +the negress raised all her fingers by the side of the white ones +to signify that there were many natives with them. Then he took +aim, with an imaginary gun, up at the roof of the hut, and said +"Bang" very loud, and a chorus of approving laughter from the +negroes showed that he was understood. Then one of them pointed +towards the various points of the compass, and looked +interrogatively at Frank. The sun was streaming in through the +doorway, and he was thus able to judge of the direction in which +the camp must lie. He made a sweep with his hand towards the +northwest, signifying that they were somewhere in that +direction.</p> + +<p>That afternoon fever set in, and for the two next days Frank +was delirious. When he recovered consciousness he found Mr. +Goodenough sitting beside him. The latter would not suffer him to +talk, but gave him a strong dose of quinine and told him to lie +quiet and go to sleep.</p> + +<p>It was not till the next day that Frank learned what had +happened in his absence. The Houssa had not returned until long +after nightfall. He reported that Frank had told him to wait with +the guns, and that he had waited until it grew nearly dark. Then +he had fired several times and had walked about, firing his gun +at intervals. Obtaining no responses he had made his way back to +the camp, where his arrival alone caused great consternation.</p> + +<p>It was impossible to do anything that night, and the next +morning Mr. Goodenough, accompanied by five of the Houssas, one +only remaining to keep guard over the camp, had gone to the place +where Frank had last been seen. Then they scattered in various +directions, shouting and firing their guns. The search had been +continued all day without success, and at nightfall, disheartened +and worn out, they had returned to the camp. The next day the +search had been continued with an equal want of success, and the +fears that a leopard had attacked and killed Frank became +stronger and stronger. On the third day the whole of the carriers +were sent out with instructions to search the woods for native +paths, to follow these to villages, and to enlist the natives in +the search. One of these men had met one of the villagers on the +search for the party of the white man.</p> + +<p>It was another ten days before Frank was sufficiently +recovered from his fever and wounds to march back to the camp. +After a stay there of two or three more days, to enable him +completely to regain his strength, the party started again on +their journey.</p> + +<p>In another three weeks they had descended the hills, and the +Fans announced their unwillingness to travel farther. Mr. +Goodenough, however, told them quietly that they had promised to +go on until he could obtain other carriers, and that if they +deserted him he should pay them nothing. They might now expect +every day to meet people of another tribe, and as soon as they +should do so they would be allowed to depart. Finding that he was +firm, and having no desire to forfeit the wages they had earned, +the Fans agreed to go forward, although they were now in a +country entirely unknown to them, where the people would +presumably be hostile. They had, however, such faith in the arms +carried by the white men and Houssas, that they felt +comparatively easy as to the result of any attack which might be +made upon them.</p> + +<p>The very day after this little mutiny, smoke was seen curling +up from the woods. Mr. Goodenough deemed it inexpedient to show +himself at once with so large a number of men. He, therefore, +sent forward Ostik with two of the Fans, each of whom could speak +several native dialects, to announce his coming. They returned in +an hour saying that the village was a very large one, and that +the news of the coming of two white men had created great +excitement. The people spoke of sending at once to their king, +whom they called Malembe, whose place, it seemed, was a day's +march off.</p> + +<p>They now prepared to enter the village. Ostik went first +carrying himself with the dignity of a beadle at the head of a +school procession. Two of the Houssas walked next. Mr. Goodenough +and Frank followed, their guns being carried by two Fans behind +them. Then came the long line of bearers, two of the Houssas +walking on each side as a baggage guard. The villagers assembled +in great numbers as they entered. The head man conducted the +whites to his hut. No women or children were to be seen, and the +expression of the men was that of fear rather than curiosity.</p> + +<p>"They are afraid of the Fans," Mr. Goodenough said. "The other +tribes all have a species of terror of these cannibals. We must +reassure them as soon as possible."</p> + +<p>A long palaver then took place with the chief, with whose +language one of the Fans was sufficiently acquainted to make +himself understood. It was rather a tedious business, as each +speech had to be translated twice, through Ostik and the Fan.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough informed the chief that the white men were +friends of his people, that they had come to see the country and +give presents to the chiefs, that they only wished to pass +quietly through and to journey unmolested, and that they would +pay handsomely for food and all that they required. They wished +to obtain bearers for their baggage, and these they would pay in +cloth and brass rods, and as soon as they procured carriers the +Fans would return to their own country.</p> + +<p>The chief answered expressing his gratification at seeing +white men in his village, saying that the king would, no doubt, +carry out all their wishes. One of the boxes was opened and he +was presented with five yards of bright colored calico, a gaudy +silk handkerchief, and several strings of bright beads. In return +a large number of plantains were presented to the white men. +These were soon distributed among the Fans.</p> + +<p>"Me no like dat nigger," Ostik said. "Me think we hab trouble. +You see all women and children gone, dat bad. Wait till see what +do when king come."</p> + +<p>That day and the next passed quietly. The baggage had been +piled in a circle, as usual, in an open space outside the +village; the tent being pitched in the center, and Ostik advised +Mr. Goodenough to sleep here instead of in the village. The day +after their arrival passed but heavily. The natives showed but +little curiosity as to the newcomers, although these must have +been far more strange to them than to the people nearer the +coast. Still no women or children made their appearance. Towards +evening a great drumming was heard in the distance.</p> + +<p>"Here is his majesty at last," Mr. Goodenough said, "we shall +soon see what is his disposition."</p> + +<p>In a short time the village was filled with a crowd of men all +carrying spears and bows and arrows. The drumming came nearer and +nearer, and then, carried in a chair on the shoulders of four +strong negroes, while ten others armed with guns marched beside +him, the king made his appearance.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough and Frank advanced to meet him. The king was a +tall man with a savage expression of countenance. Behind Mr. +Goodenough, Ostik and the Fan who spoke the language advanced. +The king's chair was lowered under the shade of a tree, and two +attendants with palm leaf fans at once began to fan his +majesty.</p> + +<p>"Tell the king," Mr. Goodenough said, "that we are white men +who have come to see his country, and to pass through to the +countries beyond. We have many presents for him, and wish to buy +food and to hire carriers in place of those who have brought our +things thus far."</p> + +<p>The king listened in silence.</p> + +<p>"Why do the white men bring our enemies into our land?" he +asked angrily.</p> + +<p>"We have come up from the coast," Mr. Goodenough said; "and as +we passed through the Fan country we hired men there to carry our +goods, just as we wish to hire men here to go on into the country +beyond. There were none of the king's men in that country or we +would have hired them."</p> + +<p>"Let me see the white men's presents," the king said.</p> + +<p>A box was opened, a bright scarlet shirt and a smoking cap of +the same color, worked with beads, a blue silk handkerchief and +twenty yards of bright calico, were taken out. To these were +added twelve stair rods, five pounds of powder, and two pounds of +shot.</p> + +<p>The king's eye sparkled greedily as he looked at the +treasures.</p> + +<p>"The white men must be very rich," he said, pointing to the +pile of baggage.</p> + +<p>"Most of the boxes are empty," Mr. Goodenough said. "We have +brought them to take home the things of the country and show them +to the white men beyond the sea;" and to prove the truth of his +words, Mr. Goodenough had two of the empty cases opened, as also +one already half filled with bird skins, and another with trays +of butterflies and beetles.</p> + +<p>The king looked at them with surprise.</p> + +<p>"And the others?" he asked, pointing to them.</p> + +<p>"The others," Mr. Goodenough said, "contain, some of them, +food such as white men are accustomed to eat in their own +country, the others, presents for the other kings and chiefs I +shall meet when we have passed on.</p> + +<p>"The fellow is not satisfied," he said to Ostik, "give him two +of the trade guns and a bottle of brandy."</p> + +<p>The king appeared mollified by these additional presents, and +saying that he would talk to the white men in the morning, he +retired into the village.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the looks of things," Mr. Goodenough said. "I +fear that the presents we have given the king will only stimulate +his desire for more. However, we shall see in the morning."</p> + +<p>When night fell, two of the Houssas were placed on guard. The +Fans slept inside the circle formed by the baggage. Several times +in the night the Houssas challenged bodies of men whom they heard +approaching, but these at once retired.</p> + +<p>In the morning a messenger presented himself from the king, +saying that he required many more presents, that the things which +had been given were only fit for the chief of a village, and not +for a great king. Mr. Goodenough answered, that he had given the +best he had, that the presents were fit for a great king, and +that he should give no more.</p> + +<p>"If we are to have trouble," he said to Frank, "it is far +better to have it at once while the Fans are with us, than when +we are alone with no one but the Houssas and the subjects of this +man. The Fans will fight, and we could hold this encampment +against any number of savages."</p> + +<p>A quarter of an hour later the drums began beating furiously +again. Loud shouts and yells arose in the village, and the +natives could be seen moving excitedly about. Presently these all +disappeared.</p> + +<p>"Fight come now," Ostik said.</p> + +<p>"You'd better lower the tent at once, Ostik. It will only he +in our way."</p> + +<p>The tent was speedily lowered. The Fans grasped their spears +and lay down behind the circle of boxes and bales, and the six +Houssas, the two white men and Ostik, to whom a trade musket had +been entrusted, took their places at regular intervals round the +circle, which was some eight yards in diameter. Presently the +beat of the drums again broke the silence, and a shower of +arrows, coming apparently from all points of the compass, fell in +and around the circle.</p> + +<p>"Open fire steadily and quietly," Mr. Goodenough said, "among +the bushes, but don't fire fast. We must tempt them to show +themselves."</p> + +<p>A dropping fire commenced against the invisible foe, the fire +being no more frequent than it would have been had they been +armed with muzzle loading weapons. Presently musketry was heard +on the enemy's side, the king's bodyguard having opened fire. +This was disastrous to them, for, whereas the arrows had afforded +but slight index as to the position of those who shot them, the +puffs of smoke from the muskets at once showed the lurking places +of those who used them, and Mr. Goodenough and Frank replied so +truly that in a very short time the musketry fire of the enemy +ceased altogether. The rain of arrows continued, the yells of the +natives rose louder and louder, and the drums beat more +furiously.</p> + +<p>"They will be out directly," Mr. Goodenough said. "Fire as +quickly as you can when they show, but be sure and take good +aim."</p> + +<p>Presently the sound of a war horn was heard, and from the wood +all round a crowd of dark figures dashed forward, uttering +appalling yells. On the instant the dropping fire of the +defenders changed into an almost continuous fusillade, as the +Sniders of the Houssas, the breech loading rifle of Mr. +Goodenough, and the repeating Winchester of Frank were brought +into play at their full speed. Yells of astonishment broke from +the natives, and a minute later, leaving nearly a score of their +comrades on the ground, the rest dashed back into the forest.</p> + +<p>There was silence for a time and then the war drums began +again.</p> + +<p>"Dey try again hard dis time, massa," Ostik said. "King tell +'em he cut off deir heads dey not win battle."</p> + +<p>This time the natives rushed forward with reckless bravery, in +spite of the execution made among them by the rapid fire of the +defenders, and rushed up to the circle of boxes. Then the Fans +leaped to their feet, and, spear in hand, dashed over the +defenses and fell upon the enemy.</p> + +<p>The attack was decisive. Uttering yells of terror the natives +fled, and two minutes later not a sound was to be heard in the +forest.</p> + +<p>"I tink dey run away for good dis time, sar," Ostik said. "Dey +hav' 'nuf of him. Dey fight very brave, much more brave than +people down near coast. Dere in great battle only three, four men +killed. Here as many men killed as we got altogether."</p> + +<p>This was so, nearly fifty of the natives having fallen between +the trees and the encampment. When an hour passed and all was +still, it became nearly certain that the enemy had retreated, and +the Houssas, who are splendid scouts, divested themselves of +their clothing and crawled away into the wood to reconnoiter. +They returned in half an hour in high glee, bearing the king's +chair.</p> + +<p>"Dey all run away, sar, ebery one, de king an' all, and leab +his chair behind. Dat great disgrace for him."</p> + +<p>A council was now held. The Fans were so delighted with the +victory they had won, that they expressed their readiness to +remain with their white companions as long as they chose, +providing these would guarantee that they should be sent home on +the expiration of their service. This Mr. Goodenough readily +promised. After discussing the question with Frank, he determined +to abstain from pushing farther into the interior, but to keep +along northward, and then turning west with the sweep of the +coast to travel slowly along, keeping at about the same distance +as at present from the sea, and finally to come down either upon +Cape Coast or Sierra Leone.</p> + +<p>This journey would occupy a considerable time. They would +cross countries but little known, and would have an ample +opportunity for the collection of specimens, which they might, +from time to time, send down by the various rivers they would +cross, to the trading stations at their mouths.</p> + +<p>It was felt that after this encounter with the natives it +would be imprudent in the extreme to push further into the +interior. They would have continual battles to fight, large +numbers of the natives would be killed, and their collecting +operations would be greatly interfered with. As a lesson to the +natives the village was burnt to the ground; the presents, which +the king in the hurry of his flight had left behind him, being +recovered.</p> + +<p>A liberal allowance of tobacco was served out as a "dash" or +present to the Fans, and a bright silk handkerchief given to +each. Then they turned off at right angles to the line they had +before been pursuing and continued their journey.</p> + +<p>Two days later Mr. Goodenough was prostrated by fever, and for +several days lay between life and death. When he became +convalescent he recovered strength very slowly. The heat was +prodigious and the mosquitos rendered sleep almost impossible at +night. The country at this place was low and swampy, and, weak as +he was, Mr. Goodenough determined to push forward. He was, +however, unable to walk, and, for the first time, a hammock was +got out and mounted.</p> + +<p>There is no more comfortable conveyance in the world than a +hammock in Africa. It is slung from a long bamboo pole, overhead +a thick awning keeps the sun from the hammock. Across the ends of +the pole boards of some three feet long are fastened. The natives +wrap a piece of cloth into the shape of a muffin and place it on +their heads, and then take their places, two at each end of the +pole, with the ends of the board on their heads. They can trot +along at the rate of six miles an hour, for great distances, +often keeping up a monotonous song. Their action is perfectly +smooth and easy, and the traveler in the hammock, by shutting his +eyes, might imagine himself swinging in a cot on board ship on an +almost waveless sea.</p> + +<p>After two days traveling they got on to higher ground, and +here they camped for some time, Mr. Goodenough slowly recovering +strength, and Frank busy in adding to their collections. In this +he was in no slight degree assisted by the Fans, who, having +nothing else to do, had now come to enter into the occupation of +their employers. A good supply of muslin had been brought, and +nets having been made, the Fans captured large quantities of +butterflies, the great difficulty being in convincing them that +only a few of each species were required. They were still more +valuable in grubbing about in the decaying trunks of fallen +trees, under loose bark, and in broken ground, for beetles and +larvae, a task which suited them better than running about after +butterflies, which, moreover, they often spoilt irreparably by +their rough handling. Thus Frank was able to devote himself +entirely to the pursuit of birds, and although all the varieties +more usually met with had been obtained, the collection steadily +increased in size.</p> + +<p>Frank himself had severe attacks of fever, but none of these +were so severe as that which he had had on the day of the death +of the leopards.</p> + +<p>At the end of a month Mr. Goodenough had recovered his +strength, and they again moved forward.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII: A +NEGRO'S STORY</h1> + +<p>On arriving at a large village one day, they were struck as +they approached by the far greater appearance of comfort and +neatness than generally distinguish African villages. The plots +of plantations were neatly fenced, the street was clean and well +kept. As they entered the village they were met by the principal +people, headed by an old white haired negro.</p> + +<p>"Me berry glad to see you, white men," he said. "Long time me +no see white men."</p> + +<p>"And it is a long time," said Mr. Goodenough, shaking hands +with him, "since I have heard the sound of my own tongue outside +my party."</p> + +<p>"Me berry glad to see you," repeated the negro. "Me chief of +dis village. Make you berry comfortable, sar. Great honor for dis +village dat you come here. Plenty eberyting for you, fowl, and +eggs, and plantain, and sometime a sheep."</p> + +<p>"We have, indeed, fallen into the lap of luxury," Mr. +Goodenough said to Frank; and they followed the negro to his hut. +"I suppose the old man has been employed in one of the factories +upon the coast."</p> + +<p>The interior of the hut was comfortably furnished and very +clean. A sort of divan covered with neatly woven mats extended +round three sides. In the center was an attempt at a table. A +doubled barreled gun and a rifle hung over the hearth. A small +looking glass and several colored prints in cheap frames were +suspended from the walls. A great chest stood at one end of the +room, while on a shelf were a number of plates and dishes of +English manufacture.</p> + +<p>The negro begged his guests to be seated, and presently a girl +entered, bringing in a large calabash full of water for them to +wash their hands and faces. In the meantime the old negro had +gone to his chest, and, to the immense surprise of the travelers, +brought out a snow white tablecloth, which he proceeded to lay on +the table, and then to place knives, forks, and plates upon +it.</p> + +<p>"You must 'scuse deficiencies, sar," he said. "We berry long +way from coast, and dese stupid niggers dey break tings most +ebery day."</p> + +<p>"Don't talk about deficiencies," Mr. Goodenough answered +smiling. "All this is, indeed, astonishing to us here."</p> + +<p>"You berry good to say dat, sar, but dis chile know how tings +ought to be done. Me libed in good Melican family. He know berry +well how tings ought to be done."</p> + +<p>"Ah, you have traveled a good deal!" Mr. Goodenough said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sar, me trabel great deal. Me lib in Cuba long time. Den +me lib slave states, what you call Confederate. Den me lib +Northern state, also Canada under Queen Victoria. Me trabel bery +much. Now, sar, dinner come. Time to eat not to talk. After +dinner white gentlemen tell me what they came here for. Me tell +dem if they like about my trabels, but dat berry long story."</p> + +<p>The dinner consisted of two fowls cut in half and grilled over +a fire, fried plantains, and, to the astonishment of the +travelers, green peas, followed by cold boiled rice over which +honey had been poured. Their host had placed plates only for two, +but they would not sit down until he had consented to join +them.</p> + +<p>Two girls waited, both neatly dressed in cotton, in a fashion +which was a compromise between European and negro notions.</p> + +<p>After dinner the negro presented them with two large and +excellent cigars, made, as he said, from tobacco grown in his own +garden, and the astonishment of the travelers was heightened by +the reappearance of one of the girls bearing a tray with three +small cups of excellent black coffee.</p> + +<p>Their host now asked them for the story of their journey from +the coast, and the object with which they had penetrated Africa. +Mr. Goodenough related their adventures, and said that they were +naturalists in search of objects of natural history. When he had +finished Ostik, in obedience to a whisper from him, brought in a +bottle of brandy, at the sight of which the negro broke into a +chuckle.</p> + +<p>"Me tree months widout taste dat. Once ebery year me send down +to coast, get coffee, tea, sugar, calico, beads, and rum. Dis +time de rum am finish too soon. One of de cases get broke and +half de bottles smash. Dat berry bad job. Dis chile calculate dat +six dozen last for a year, dat give him one bottle each week and +twenty bottles for presents to oder chiefs. Eighteen bottles go +smash, and as de oder chiefs expec' deir present all de same, Sam +hab ta go widout. De men start three weeks ago for coast. Me hope +dey come back in six weeks more."</p> + +<p>"Well," Mr. Goodenough said, "you need not go without it till +they come back, for I can give you eight bottles which will last +you for two months. I have got a good supply, and as I never use +it for trade unless a chief particularly wants it, I can very +well spare it."</p> + +<p>The old negro was greatly pleased, and when he had drank his +glass of brandy and water he responded to Mr. Goodenough's +request, and, lighting a fresh cigar, he began the story of his +adventures.</p> + +<p>"I was born in dis berry village somewhere about seventy years +ago. I not know for sure widin two or three year, for when I +young man I no keep account. My fader was de chief of dis +village, just as I am now, but de village was not like dis. It +was not so big, and was berry dirty and berry poor, just like the +oder nigger villages. Well, sar, dere am nothing perticlar to +tell about de first years of my life. I jus' dirty little naked +nigger like de rest. Dose were berry bad times. Ebery one fight +against ebery one else. Ebery one take slabes and send dem down +de river, and sell to white men dere to carry ober sea. When I +grow up to seventeen, I s'pose, I take spear and go out wid de +people of dis village and de oder villages of dis part ob country +under king, and fight against oder villages and carry the people +away as slabes. All berry bad business dat. But Sam he tink +nothing, and just do the same as oder people. Sometimes oder +tribes come and fight against our villages and carry our people +away. So it happened to Sam.</p> + +<p>"Jus' when he about twenty years old we had come back from a +long 'spedition. Dis village got its share ob slabes, and we +drink and sing and make merry wid de palm tree wine and tink +ourselves berry grand fellows. Well, sar, dat night great +hullyballoo in de village. De dogs bark, de men shout and seize +deir arms and run out to fight, but it no good. Anoder tribe fall +on us ten times as many as we. We fight hard but no use. All de +ole men and de ole women and de little babies dat no good to sell +dey killed, and de rest of us, de men and de women and de boys +and girls, we tied together and march away wid de people dat had +taken us.</p> + +<p>"Berry bad time dat, sar. De season was dry and de water +scarce. We make long march ebery day, and berry little food +given. Dey beat us wid sticks and prod us wid spear to make us +go. A good many ob de weak ones dey die, but de most ob us arribe +at mouth ob riber; me neber know what riber dat was, but we were +berry nigh two months in getting dere. By dis time Sam arribe at +the conclusion berry strong, dat de burning ob villages and +carrying off ob slabes berry bad affair altogether. Sam hab +changed his mind about a great many things, but about dat he am +fixed right up to dis time.</p> + +<p>"Well, at de mouth ob dat riber Sam saw de white man for de +first time; and me tell you fair, sar, Sam not like him no way. +Dey were Spanish men, and de way dey treat us poor niggers was +someting awful. We huddle up night and day in a big shed dey call +a barracoon. Dey gabe us berry little food, berry little water. +Dey flog us if we grumble. Dese men belong to ships, and had +bought us from dose who brought us down from up country. Deir +ship not come yet, and for a long time we wait in the barracoon +wishing dat we could die. At last de ship came, and we were taken +on board and huddled down below. Law, what a place dat was to be +sure! Not more than tree feet high, just high enough to sit up, +and dere we chained to deck. De heat, sar, was someting terrible. +Some ob us yell out and scream for air, but dey only come down +and beat us wid whips.</p> + +<p>"De day after we got on board de ship set sail. Tree hours +after dat we hear a great running about on deck, and a shouting +by the white men. Den we hear big gun fire ober head, almost make +us jump out of skin wid de noise. Den more guns. Den dere was a +crash, and before we knew what was de matter dere was a big hole +in de side, and six niggers was killed dead. Ebery one yelled +berry loud. We tink for sure that de last day come. For a long +time de guns keep firing, and den everyting quiet again. At de +time no one could tink what de matter, but I s'pose dat British +cruiser chase us and dat de slaber sail away.</p> + +<p>"Dat was an awful voyage, sar. At first de sea smoove, and de +ship go along straight. Den de ship begin to toss about jus' as +nigger does when he has taken too much palm wine, and we all feel +berry bad. Ebery one groan and cry and tink dat dey must have +been poisoned. For tree days it was a terrible time. De hatches +were shut down and no air could come to us, and dere we was all +alone in de dark, and no one could make out why de great house on +de water roll and tumble so much. We cry and shout till all +breaff gone, and den lie quiet and moan, till jus' when ebery one +tink he dead, dey take off de hatch and come down and undo de +padlocks and tell us to go up on deck. Dat berry easy to say, not +at all easy to do. Most of us too weak to walk, and say dat we +dead and cannot move. Den dey whip all about, and it was +astonishing, sar, to see what life dat whip put into dead nigger. +Somehow people feel dat dey could crawl after all, and when dey +get up on deck and see de blessed sun again and de blue sky dey +feel better. But not all. In spite ob de whip many hab to be +carried up on deck, and dere de sailor men lay 'em down and trow +cold water ober dem till dey open dere eyes and come to life. +Some neber come to life. Dere were about six hundred when we +start, and ob dese pretty nigh a hundred die in dose tree +days.</p> + +<p>"After dat tings not so bad. De weather was fine and no more +English cruisers seen, so dey let half ob us up on deck at once +for tree or four hours ebery day. Dey give us more food, too, and +fatten us up. We talk dis ober among ourselves, and s'pose dat +dey going to eat us when we get to land again. Some propose not +to eat food, but when dey try dat on they get de whip, and +conclude dat if dey must be eaten dey might as well be eaten fat +as lean.</p> + +<p>"At last we come in sight of land. Den we all sent below and +stay dere till night. Den we brought on deck, and find de vessel +lying in a little creek. Den we all land in boats, and march up +country all night. In de morning we halt. Tree or four white men +come on horses and look at us. Dey separate us into parties, and +each march away into country again. Den we separate again, till +at last me and twenty oders arribe at a plantation up in de +hills. Here we range along in line before a white man. He speak +in berry fierce tones, and a nigger by his side tell us dat dis +man our master, dat he say if we work well he gib us plenty of +food and treat us well, but dat if we not work wid all our might +he whip us to death. After dis it was ebident that de best ting +to do was to work hard.</p> + +<p>"I was young and berry strong, sar, and soon got de name of a +willing hard working nigger. De massa he keep his word. Dose who +work well not bad treated, plenty ob food and a piece of ground +to plant vegetables and to raise fowls for ourselves. So we +passed two or tree year, plenty ob hard work, but not berry much +to grumble at. Den me and a gal of my own village, who had been +bought in de same batch wid me, we go to massa and say we want to +marry. Massa say, berry well. I fine strong nigger and work well, +so he gib de gal four yards ob bright cotton for wedding dress, +and a bottle ob rum to me, and we married.</p> + +<p>"Two or tree years pass, and my wife hab two piccanninies. Den +de massa go home to Spain, and leab overseer in plantation. Berry +bad man dat. Before, if nigger work well he not beaten. Now he +beaten wheder he work or not. For two or tree months we 'tand it, +but tings get worse and worse. De oberseer he always drunk and go +on like wild beast. One day he passed by my wife hoeing de +sugarcane and he gib her cut wid whip, jus' out of 'musement. She +turn round and ask, 'What dat for?' He get mad, cut her wid whip, +knock her down wid de handle, and den seizing de chile dat she +had fastened to her back, he catch him by de leg and smash him +skull against a tree. Den, sar, I seize my hoe, I rush at him, +and I chop him down wid all my strength, cut his skull clean in +sunder, and he drop down dead.</p> + +<p>"Den I knew dat dat was no place for Sam, so I take my hoe and +I run away as fast as I could. No one try to stop me. De oder +niggers dance and sing when dey saw de oberseer fall dead. I ran +all dat day up among de hills, skirting round de different +plantations till I get quite into de wild part. Wheneber I came +to stream I walk a long way in him till I get to tree hanging +ober. Den pull myself up into de branches, climb along and drop +at de farthest end, and den run again, for I knew dat dey would +set de bloodhounds after me.</p> + +<p>"At last I tink dat it am quite safe, and when de night came +on lie down to sleep for a few hours. Before morning me off +again, and by night get to de center of de wild country. Here I +light a fire, and sit down, and, just as I 'spected, in two or +tree hours five or six men come down to me. Dose were niggers who +had run away from plantations. I tell dem my story, dey agree dat +I did berry right in killing oberseer. Dey take me away to place +where dey hab little huts and patches of yams. Two or tree days +pass and no one come, so, we s'pose dat dey hab lost de scent. Me +waited a month and den determined to go down and see about wife. +I journey at night, and reach plantation in two days. Dere I hide +till I see nigger come along close to bush. I call him and he +come. I tell him to tell my wife to steal away when night come, +and to meet me dere. He nod and go away. Dat night my wife come +wid de oder chile. We not talk much but start away for mountains. +Me berry much afraid now because my wife not berry strong, she +hurt by de blow and fretting after me. Howeber, we follow the way +I had gone before. I make shift to help her up into trees from +the streams, and dis time after tree days' travel we got back to +hut in the mountain.</p> + +<p>"Dere we lib berry happy for a year. Sometimes some ob us go +down to plantation and take down baskets and oder tings dat we +had made and chop dem for cotton. We had tobacco of our own, and +some fowls which we got from the plantations in de fust place. +Altogether we did berry well. Sometimes band of soldiers come and +march trough the country, but we hab plenty hiding places and dey +never find us. More and more runway slabes come, and at last we +hear dat great 'spedition going to start to search all de +mountains. Dey come, two tree thousand ob dem. Dey form long +skirmishing line, five or six mile long, and dey go ober +mountain. Ebery nigger dey find who not surrender when dey call +to him dey shoot. When I heard ob deir coming I had long talk wid +wife. We agree that it better to leave de mountains altogether +and go down and live in the bushes close to the old plantation. +Nobody look for us dere. So we make our way down and lib there +quiet. We get the yams out ob de plantations and lib very +comfortable. When we tink all ober in the mountain we go +back.</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, when we tink it all safe, and we get widin a mile +ob de huts whar we had libed, all at once we came upon a lot of +soldiers in camp. Dey see us and make shout. I call to my wife to +run, when dey fire. A bullet hit de baby, which she hab at her +back, and pass through both deir bodies. I did not run any more, +but jus' stood looking at my wife and chile as if my senses had +gone. Dere I stood till the soldiers came up. Dey put a cord +round my arms and led me away. After a time I was taken down the +country. Dere I was claimed, and when it was known I had killed a +white oberseer I was tried. But de new oberseer did not want me +to be hung, for I was a strong slave and worth money, so he told +a story about how it happen, and after dey had flogged me very +hard dey sent me back to plantation. Dere I work for a long time +wid a great log of wood chained to my ankle to prevent me from +running away again.</p> + +<p>"For a time I not care whether I lib or die, but at last I +made up my mind to 'scape again. After six months dey took off de +log, tinking dat I had had enuf of de mountains and would not try +to 'scape, and de log prevented my doing so much work. De bery +next night I ran away again but dis time I determined to make for +de town in hopes ob getting on board an English ship, for I had +heard from de oder slabes dat de English did not keep black men +as slabes, but dat, on de contry, dey did what dey could to stop +de Spanish from getting dem away from Africa, and I understood +now dat de dreful noise we had heard on de first day we were on +board ship was an attack upon our vessel by an English +cruiser.</p> + +<p>"It was four days' journey down to de town by de sea. Dere was +no difficulty in finding de way, for de road was good, and I +s'pose dat dey only looked for me towards de hills. Anyhow I got +dar safe, walking at night and sleeping in the bushes by day. I +got as near de town as I dar, and could see seberal vessels lying +near de shore. I could see dat some ob dem had de Spanish flag -- +I knew dat flag -- de oders had flags which I did not know. When +it was dark I walked boldly into the town; no one asked me any +question, and I make my way through de streets down to de shore. +Dere I get into a boat and lay quiet till all de town was asleep. +Den I get into water and swim off to a ship -- one dat I had +noticed had a flag which was not Spanish. Dere was a boat +alongside. I climb into it and pull myself up by the rope on +deck. Den some white men seize me and say someting in language +which I not understand. Den dey take me into cabin and say +someting to captain; me not know what it was, but de captain +laugh, and me not like his laugh at all. Howeber, dey give me +someting to eat, and den take me down into hold of ship and tell +me to go to sleep on some sacks of sugar, and throw some empty +sacks ober me to cover me. Den dey close up hatch and leab me +alone.</p> + +<p>"When I come on deck de land was gone and de vessel sailing +along. I speak to no one, for I only understand little Spanish, +and dese people not speak dat. We sail along for some time, and +at last we come in sight of land again. Den dey hoist flag and I +see dat it a flag wid lots of red stars and stripes upon him. I +know now dat it was a 'Merican ship. Den I know noting. We get to +port and I want to land, but dey shake deir heads.</p> + +<p>"De next day de captain he make sign to me to come wid him. I +go along to shore and he take me to a open space in town, where a +man was standing on a raised platform. He had a black woman by de +side ob him. Seberal men come up and look at her. De man he shout +bery loud. Oder men say something short. At last he knock on de +table; a man tell de woman to come after him and she walk away. +Den a boy was put up, and den two more women, and ebery time just +de same ting was done. Den de man call out, and de captain push +his way through the crowd wid me, and tell me to climb up on +platform. I get up and look round quite surprised. Eberybody +laugh. Den de man began to holloa again. Den seberal men come up +and feel my arms and my legs. Dey point to de marks which de whip +had left on my back, and dey laugh again. Presently de man who +was shouting bang his hand on the table again, and a white man in +the crowd, who had seberal times called out loud, come up to me, +take me by the arm, and sign to me to go wid him.</p> + +<p>"I begin to understand now; dat rascally captain had sold me +for a slabe, and dat flag I had seen was not de English flag. +However, it was no use to say anyting, and I went along wid my +new massa. He was a nice looking man, and I thought it might not +be so bery bad after all. He took me to a high carriage wid two +wheels and a fine horse. A negro, who was dressed up like a white +man, was holding de horse. He showed me to climb up behind, de +oders climb up in front, and we dribe away."</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII: A +FUGITIVE SLAVE</h1> + +<p>"Well, sar, work bery much de same on plantation in Virginia +and Cuba, but de slabe much merrier in 'Merica, when de master am +good. My new massa bery good man. Slabes all treat bery kind, +work not too hard. At night dance and sing bery much. Den I marry +again, dis time to one ob de girls in de house. She favorite ob +missy, and so when we marry, missy hab me taken off de fields and +put to garden. Bery fine garden dat was. Tree, four of us work +dar, Sam jus' as happy as man could be. Sometime, when der am +party, Sam come into the house to help at de table, dat how Sam +know how to do tings proper. De little massas dey bery fond ob +me, and when dey want to go out hunting de coon or fishing in de +riber, dey always cry for Sam.</p> + +<p>"So fifteen years passed by, bery happy years, sar, den do ole +massa die; missy, too, soon after. De young massa not like him +father. Me tink de ole gentleman make mistake wid him when him +chile, let him hab too much his own way. I bery fond ob him +because I had been wid him so much, but I often shake my head +when I tink de time come dat he be massa ob de plantation. It was +not dat his nature was bad; he get in rage sometime, but dat all +ober in no time, but he lub pleasure too much; go to de races and +'top at de town weeks together, and play too much wid de cards. +Dere were two boys and two girls; de second boy, he go to West +Point and become officer in de army.</p> + +<p>"After de death ob de ole people de house change bery much. +Before dat time we keep good company, gib sometimes grand balls, +and all de fust families ob Virginia in dat part visit dar. After +dat always people in de house. De young massa, when he go to +Richmond, bring back six or eight young men wid him, and dey +laugh and drink and play cards half de night. I tink de young +missys speak to him about his ways. Anyhow, one day dere great +row, and dey off to lib wid an aunt in de city. After dat tings +get worse. One day missy come back from town and she gib my wife +her papers of freedom. You see, my wife was giben by de ole man +to missy when her war a little girl, and fortunate it was dat he +had made out de papers all right and presented dem to her. When +missy gib her de papers ob freedom, she cry bery much. 'Me 'fraid +bad time coming, Sally,' she said. 'Me tink dat it better for a +time dat you clar out ob dis. Now you got de paper you free +woman, but you wife ob slabe; might be difficulty about it. Me +fear dat broder Dick ruined -- de plantation and slabes to be +sole;' and wid dat she bu'st out crying wus dan eber. Ob course +my wife she cry too.</p> + +<p>"'Better you go norf, Sally,' missy say presently. 'I gib you +letter to friends dar, and tell dem you bery good nurse. Den if +Sam get good master you can come back to him again. If not, as +you tell me dat when he slabe before he run away, it jus' +possible he do de same again.'</p> + +<p>"'Don't you tink, missy,' de wife said, 'dat de young massa +gib freedom to Sam too. Sam wait on him a great many years, sabe +him life when he tumbled into water.'</p> + +<p>"'I bery much afraid,' missy said, shaking her head, 'dat my +broder not able to do so if he wish. He borrow money on de +plantation and de slabes, and dat prevent him from making any ob +dem free. De sale soon come now. You go tell Sam; tell him not to +say word to nobody. Den you pack up and come right away wid me to +de city. It bery much better you clar out ob dis before dey come +down and seize eberybody.'</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, you guess when Sam heard dis he in fine taking. He +often grieve bery much dat he and Sally hab no children. Now he +tank de Lord wid all his heart dat dere no piccanniny, for dey +would hab been sold, one one way and one another, and we should +neber hab seen dem again. Hows'ever, I make great effort, and +tell Sally she do jus' what missy say. I tell her to go norf +while she can, and promise dat some day or oder Sam join her dar. +'Better for to be parted for ten year, Sally, dan to hab de risk +ob you being seize and sold to one master, me to anoder. You +trus' Sam to break out some day. He do bery well here for a time. +He bery good strong nigger, good gardner, good at de horses, good +carpenter. Sam sure to get good place, but, howeber good, when he +see a chance he run away. If no chance, he sabe up his money, and +you sabe up your money, Sally, and buy him freedom.'</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, we bofe cry bery much, and den Sally go away wid +de young missy. A week after dat de bust up come. De officers dey +come down and seize de place, and a little while after dey sell +all de slabes. Dat was a terrible affair, to see de husbands and +de wives and de children separated and sold to different masters. +De young massa he not dere at sale. Dey say he pretty nigh break +him heart, but he ought to hab thought ob dat before. Me sure dat +de ole gentleman and de ole missy pretty nigh turn in deir grabe +at de thought ob all de hands they was so kind to sold away.</p> + +<p>"Dat de curse of slabery, sar. Me trabel a good deal, and me +tink dat no working people in de world are so merry and happy as +de slabe in a plantation wid a good massa and missy. Dey not work +so hard as de white man. Dey have plenty to eat and drink, dey +hab deir gardens and deir fowls. When dey are sick dey are taken +care ob, when dey are ole they are looked after and hab nothing +to do. I have heard people talk a lot of nonsense about de hard +life of de plantation slabe. Dat not true, sar, wid a good massa. +De slabe hab no care and he bery happy. If all massas were good, +and dere were a law dat if a plantation were broken up de slabes +must be sold in families together, me tell you dat de life on a +plantation a thousand times happier dan de life ob a black man in +his own country. But all masters are not good. Some neber look +after de slabes, and leabe all to overseers, and dese bery often +bad, cruel men. But worst of all is when a sale comes. Dat +terrible, sar. De husban' sold to Alabama, de wife to Carolina, +de children scattered trough de States. Dis too bad, sar, dis +make ob slabery a curse to de black men.</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, we all sold. Me fetch high price and sold to a +planter in Missouri. Sam no like dat. Dat a long way from the +frontier. Tree years Sam work dar in plantation. Den he sold +again to a man who hab boats on de riber at New Orleans. Dar Sam +work discharging de ships and working de barges. Dar he come to +learn for sure which de British flag. De times were slack, and my +massa hire me out to be waiter in a saloon. Dat place dey hab +dinners, and after dinner dey gamble. Dat war a bad place, mos' +ebery night quarrels, and sometimes de pistols drawn, and de +bullets flying about. Sam 'top dar six months; de place near de +riber, and de captains ob de ships often come to dine.</p> + +<p>"One young fellow come bery often, and one day Sam saw tree or +four men he knew to be Texas horse dealers talking wid him. Now +dis young captain had been bery friendly wid Sam; always speak +cibil and gib him quarter for himself, and Sam sorry to see dose +chaps get hold ob him. Dis went on for two or tree days, till one +ebening de captain, instead of going away after dinner, stopped +talking to dese follows. De play begin at de table, and dey +persuade him to join. He hab de debil's luck. Dey thought they +going to cheat him, and if dey had got him by demselves dey would +have cleaned him out sure. But dere were oder people playing and +dey not able to cheat.</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, he won all de money. Drinks had been flying about, +and when at last de man dat kep' de table said, 'De bank will +close for tonight,' de young fellow could scarce walk steady on +his feet. His pockets were full ob notes. I went up to him and +said, 'Will you hab a bed here, sar, bery good bed?' but he laugh +and say, 'No, Sam, I may be a little fresh in de wind, but I tink +I can make de boat.' I saw dose fellows scowl when I speak to +him, and I make up my mind dey after no good. Well, sar, dey go +out fust. Den he go out wid some oder people and stand laughing +and talking at de door. Sam run up to him room, slip on his money +belt, for he had had a good deal giben him while he was dar, and +was sabing up to buy his freedom, and he didn't know what was +going to happen. Den Sam look into de kitchen and caught up a +heavy poker and a long knife, den he run down and turn out de +lights ob de saloon and lock de door after him.</p> + +<p>"He was jus' in time, for he saw at de corner, where de street +go down on to the wharves, de young captain separate from de men +who had gone out wid him and walk away by hisself. Sam kicked off +his shoes and ran as fast as he could to de end ob de street. De +wharf was bery badly lighted, jus' a lamp here and dere. Sam ran +along till he got widin about thirty yards ob de sailor, and den +stole quiet along in de shadow ob de houses. Sudden he see five +men run out. Den Sam he leap forward like tiger and gibs a shout +to warn de captain. He turn round jus' in time. Sam saw an arm +lifted and de captain fall, and den at de same moment almost him +poker come down wid a crunch upon de top ob one of deir head. Den +they turn on Sam, but, law bless you, sar! what was de good ob +dat? Bery strong negro wid heavy poker in one hand and long knife +in de oder more dan match for four men. He knock dem ober like +nine pin. Tree of dem, he tink he kill straight, the poker fall +on de top ob deir heads, de oder man give a dig in Sam's left +shoulder wid his knife, and de sudden pain shake Sam's aim a +little and de blow fall on him neck. He gib a shout and tumble +down. None ob do oder four had shouted or made any remark when +Sam hit dem. Den Sam caught up de captain and ran along de wharf. +Presently he heard a hail. 'All right,' Sam said.</p> + +<p>"'Am dat you, captain?' some one say.</p> + +<p>"'Me got a captain here,' Sam say; 'you come and see wheder he +yours.'</p> + +<p>"De men came up and look in de captain's face.</p> + +<p>"'Hullo,' dey say; 'de captain am dead.'</p> + +<p>"'Me no tink him dead,' I say. 'He had a fight, and Sam come +to him aid and beat de rascals off. You had better take him +straight on board de ship.'</p> + +<p>"Dey put him in boat and Sam go wid him to ship. Dey examine +de wound and find it not bery serious. De captain was turning +round when dey struck, and de blow had glanced off, but it had +made a ugly gash; and what wid de surprise, and de loss ob blood, +and knocking him head on de wharf, and de liquor, de captain had +lost his consciousness. He soon come round, and Sam tell all +about it. De captain shake Sam's hand bery much and call him his +preserver, and ask what he do for him.</p> + +<p>"'You take me out ob dis country,' me said, 'and Sam be +grateful.'</p> + +<p>"'Sartain, I will,' he said; 'and now what am de best ting to +do?'</p> + +<p>"'Me not stop on board now. Dey come and search de vessel for +sure in de morning. When de four white men found, me hope five, +den dere great rumpus. If five dead no suspicion fall on Sam, but +you're sure to be asked questions. It would be known dat dey were +gambling in de saloon, and it would be known dat you had broken +de bank and had gone away wid your pockets stuffed full ob notes. +People would suspec' dat likely enuff dey had made an attack on +you. Dis you couldn't deny, for you will be bandaged up in de +morning, and if you had killed dem no one would blame you. But it +a different ting wid Sam. All dose rascals friends together, and +you be bery sure dat some ob dem pay him off for it. If five men +dead, all well and good. Den you say you knocked down and know +nufing furder. You s'pose some people came up and take your side, +and kill dose men, and carry you to de boat, and gib you ober to +de sailors, and den go away; but dat you know nufing at all about +it. If only four men killed den do oder, who will be sure to go +away and say nufing ob his share in de business, will tell all +his mates dat dis nigger intrude himself into de affair, and dat +bad for Sam. So, sar, propose dat I go ashore, and dat I go down +de bank five or six mile, and dere hide in de bush. When your +ship come down you hoist little white flag, so Sam sure ob de +right ship. If Sam tink de coast am clear he swim off. If you no +see Sam when you get fifteen mile down de riber, den you anchor, +and at night send a boat ashore. Sam come down to it for +sure.'</p> + +<p>"So de matter was arranged. De captain say he tree more days +fill up his ship, but dat no do for me come on board by daylight +because dere would be a pilot on board. Also he says little white +flag no do, pilot tink him strange, but would tell one ob de men +to hang a red shirt, as if to dry, up in de rigging. At night +would show two lights ober de bow for me to know which was de +ship.</p> + +<p>"Fust dey bind up de wound on my shoulder, den dey gib me food +for four days and a bottle of rum, and den row me ashore. Den Sam +start, and before morning he hid in de swampy bush ten miles down +de riber. He wait dere two days, den make him way down anoder +four miles and dere stop. Late dat afternoon he see a ship come +down de riber wid a red shirt in de rigging. He go on and on, and +jus' as it got dark he anchor two miles furder down. Sam make his +way along through de bush and at last get facing de ship. At +twelve o'clock boat come along bery quiet. Sam go down and get +in. De men say, 'Hush, make no noise. De pilot am as watchful as +a cat. Dey had tied tings round de oars dat dey should make no +noise, and when dey get to de side ob de ship dey lay dem in very +quiet, hook on de tackle and hoist her up. De hatchway were off, +and de men beckon to Sam, and two ob dem go down wid him, and de +hatchways closed down again.</p> + +<p>"'I tink we hab tricked him,' one ob de sailors said. 'Dere +great row at New Orleans about de four men found dead dar. Dey +come off and inquire ob de captain ober and ober again. Dey know +you missing, and dey find de kitchen poker lying by de men, and +tink you must have had a hand in it. A thousand dollars reward +have been offered, and dey searched de ship high and low, and +turn ober all de cargo. A guard stop on board till de last ting +to see no one come off. When de captain say he anchor de pilot +say no, but de captain say he in no hurry and not going to risk +his ship by sailing at night. Me tink pilot smell a rat, for +ebery time he hear a noise on deck he come out of his cabin and +look round. We greased de falls to make dem run quiet, and took +off our shoes so as to make no noise while we were lowering it. +De men on deck was told to get de hatchway open when dey saw us +coming, and so we hoped dat de pilot heard nufing. Now we must +head you up in a cask. We hab bored some holes in it for de air. +Den we shall pile oder casks on de top and leabe you. Dey are as +likely as not to search de ship again when she goes past de +forts, for de pilot will suspect dat it am possible dat you have +come on board tonight.'</p> + +<p>"Me take my place in a big sugar cask. Dey give me some water +and some food, and den shut in de head ober me. Dere I remain two +days. I heard some men come below and make a great noise, moving +de cargo about near de hatchway, and dey hammered in all de casks +ob de top tier to see if any ob dem was empty. I felt bery glad +when it was all ober, and de hold was quiet again. I slept a +great deal and did not know anything about time; but at last I +heard a noise again, and de moving of casks, and den de head of +de hogshead was taken out, and dere were de sailors and de +captain. Dey shook Sam very hearty by de hand, and told him dat +de ship was safe out at sea, and dat he was a free man.</p> + +<p>"All through dat voyage dey bery kind to Sam. He libed de life +ob a gentleman; ate, and drank, and smoke plenty, and nufing at +all to do. At last we got to Liberpool, and dar de captain take +Sam to a vessel bound to New York, pay him passage across, and +gib Sam a present ob fifty pound. Dis chile had saved fifty +beside, so he felt dat he was a rich man. Nufing happen on +passage, except great storm, and Sam thought dat de steamer go to +de bottom, but she got through all right, and Sam land at New +York. Den he journey to Philadelphia, dat the place where missy +give Sam a card wid a name and address written on it, for him to +go to ask where Sally was living. Well, sar, you could have +knocked me down when I find a great bill in de window, saying dat +de house were to let. Sam almost go out ob his mind. He ask a +great many people, de servants at de doors, and de people in de +shops and at last find dat de family am gone to trabel in Europe, +and dat dey might be away for years.</p> + +<p>"For two months Sam searched about Philadelphia, and looked at +ebery black woman he saw in de streets. He could see no signs +whatsomeber ob Sally. Den he took a place as waiter at an hotel, +and he wrote to missy at Richmond, to ask if she know Sally's +address, but he neber got no answer to dat letter, and s'posed +that missy was either dead or gone away. After he work dere for +some months de idea came to Sam dat first class hotel wasn't de +best place in de world to look for black woman. Den Sam went to +warehouse and bought a lot of books and started to peddle them +trough de country. He walked thousands ob miles, and altogether +saw thousands ob black men, but nothing like Sally. Ebery black +woman he could he spoke to, and asked dem if dey knew her. It was +a curious ting dat no one did. Me did not find Sally, but me made +a good deal of money, and tree more years pass away at dis work. +By dis time me was nigh forty-five years old, as well as me could +tell. Ebery few months me go back to Philadelphia and search dere +again.</p> + +<p>"One day a woman, dressed bery plain, came up to me and said, +'I hab been tole by my nurse dat you have been asking her if she +had seen your wife.' I s'pose I looked hopeful like for she said +at once, 'Me know nothing ob her, but I was interested about you. +You are an escaped slabe, are you not?'</p> + +<p>"'Yes, ma'am,' me said. 'Dere is no law against me here.'</p> + +<p>"'None at all,' she said. 'But I thought that you might, like +me, be interested in freeing slabes.'</p> + +<p>"'Dat I am,' I said, 'dough I had neber thought much about +it.'</p> + +<p>"'You hab heard, p'raps,' she said, 'ob de underground +railway.'</p> + +<p>"'Yes, ma'am,' said I. 'Dat is de blessed 'stitution which +smuggles slaves across the frontier.'</p> + +<p>"'Dat is it,' she said, 'and I belongs to it.'</p> + +<p>"'Does you, missy?' me says. 'De Lord bless you.'</p> + +<p>"'Now,' she said, 'we want two or three more earnest men, men +not afraid to risk deir libes, or what is worse deir freedom, to +help deir follow creatures. I thought that you, habing suffered +so much yourself, might be inclined to devote yourself to freeing +oders from de horrors of slabery.'</p> + +<p>"'Sam is ready, ma'am,' me says, 'It may be dat de Lord neber +intends me see my Sally again, but if I can be de means ob +helping to get oder men to join deir wives I shall be +content.'</p> + +<p>"'Very well,' she said. 'Come into my house now and we will +talk about it.'</p> + +<p>"Den she 'splained the whole business to me. Dere were, +principally in lonely places, in swamps and woods, but sometimes +libing in villages and towns in de south, people who had devoted +deir libes to de carrying out of de purposes ob de underground +railway. For de most part dese led libes differing no way from +deir neighbors; dey tilled de land, or kept stores like oders, +and none of dose around dem suspected in de slightest degree deir +mission in de south. To deir houses at night fugitive slabes +would come, guided by dose from de next post. De fugitives would +be concealed for twenty-four hours or more, and den passed on at +night again to de next station. Dose formed the larger portion ob +de body.</p> + +<p>"Dere were oders who lived a life in de swamps, scattered +trough the country. Deir place of residence would be known to de +slabes ob de neighborhood, but de masters had no suspicion dat de +emissaries ob de association were so near. To dese any negro, +driben to desperation by harsh treatment, would resort, and from +dem instructions would be received as to de route to be taken, +and de places where aid could be obtained. Dose people held deir +life in deir hands. Had any suspicion fallen upon dem ob +belonging to de 'stitution dey would be lynched for sartin. De +lady set before me all de dangers ob de venture. She said it war +a case whar dere were no money to be earned, and only de chances +of martyrdom. My mind quite made up. Me ready to undertake any +work dey like to give me. My life ob no value to no one. De next +day me saw some ob de oder people connected wid de affair, and +tree days afterwards I started for de south."</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV: A +CHRISTIAN TOWN</h1> + +<p>"My share ob de business was to make my way down south and +settle in de swamps ob Carolina. I war to be taken down by +trading schooner, to be landed on de coast, and to make my way to +a place in de center ob a big swamp whar an ole nigger, named +Joe, had been carrying on de work for four years. He had sent to +say dat he war bery ill wid de swamp fever and like to die, dat +he should not leabe de work as long as he libed, but hoped dat +dey would send anoder man out to take on his work after his +death.</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, I was landed, and I made my way to de place. It +war no easy matter. De niggers all say dey know no such person, +but I found de next post, and dere de man guided me to de path +which led into de swamp. Dey told me dey thought de ole man dead, +for dat no one had come along to dem from him for nigh two month. +Well, sar, as I 'spected I found him dead, and I buried him, and +took up my place in de hut. Soon it became known through de +plantations round dat de hut was occupied again, and dey began to +come to me to ask for assistance. My <i>'</i>structions war dat +only to enable a husband to join his wife, or a wife her husband, +or in cases where de masters were uncommon cruel, dat I was to +send 'em along by de underground railway. De risks was too great +to be run often. If we had tried to help ebery one to 'scape we +should mighty soon hab been hunted down.</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, I libed dere for three year. It was a lonesome +life. I planted a few yams round de hut, and de plantation hands +would bring me tings dat dey got hold of. It was my duty when I +found dat a case was ob de proper description to arrange for de +flight, de man or de woman would come to my hut, and I would +guide dem through de swamps, twenty-five mile away, to de house +ob a clergyman, which was de next station. I would jus' knock in +a 'ticular way at de door, and when dis was open leab de party +dere and go straight away back to de swamp. More dan once de +planters got up hunts and searched de swamp through and through +for me wid dogs, and my hut was twice burnt to de ground, but de +slabes always brought me notice in time, and I went away into de +tickest part ob de swamp and lay dar till dey had gone away.</p> + +<p>"Well, sar, one time come, I bery busy, passed tree men away +in two week. One night me hear barking of dogs, and jump up jus' +in time to see party ob men coming out from de little path +towards de hut. I ran for de swamp. Dey fire at me and one ball +hit me. Den I ran in to de swamp, de dogs dey follow, but I get +farder and farder away, and de swamp get deeper, and me tink dey +lose me altogether. I sit quiet on <i>'</i>tump when I hear +someting splashing in swamp, and all of a sudden a big hound +sprang on me, and fix him teeth in my shoulder. I had no arms, +for in de hurry I had not time to catch dem up. De beast he growl +and bite, and hold on like death. I saw dere only one ting to do. +I tumble forward into de swamp wid de dog underneath me, and dere +I lay, wid my mouf sometimes above de water sometimes below, till +de dog was drowned.</p> + +<p>"Den I start for de next station. I was hit in de hip, and it +took me tree days to crawl dat twenty-five miles. On de tird +ebening I knock at de door ob de house, and when it was open I +tumble down in faint inside. It war a long time before I come to +myself, two weeks dey tell me, and den I tink I dream, for +sitting by de side of de bed war dat woman Sally. Till she spoke, +me couldn't believe dat it war true, but she told me dat it war +her, sure enuf, and dat I war to ask no questions but to go off +to sleep.</p> + +<p>"Next day she told me all about it. She had stopped a year at +Philadelphy. Den she heard ob de underground railway, and was +tole dat a clergyman, who war just going down south to work a +station, wanted a black nurse for his children, who would help in +de work. Sally she volunteer, and dar she had been libing eber +since, hoping all de time eider dat I should pass through dere or +dat she should hear from Philadelphy dat I had got dere. She used +to act as de guide ob de runaways to de next station, and ebery +man who came along she asked if they knew me; but, law bless you, +sar, de poor woman knew nufing ob places, or she would hab known +dat she war hundreds ob miles south of Virginia, and though she +allowed she had heard I had gone to Missouri, she s'posed dat de +way from der might be by de sea coast. I hab observed, sar, dat +de gography ob women am bery defective.</p> + +<p>"I stopped thar till I was cured. The clergyman knew someting +of surgery, and he managed to substract the ball from my hip. +When I war quite well Sally and me started for the norf, whar we +had helped so many oders to go, and, bress de Lord, we arribed +dere safe. Den I told Sally dat I should like to libe under de +British flag, so we went up to Canada and dere we libed bery +comfortable for ten years together. Sally washed and I kep' a +barber's shop, and we made plenty ob money. Den she die, sar, de +tought come into my mind dat I would come back to Africa and +teach dose poor niggers here de ways ob de white men, and sar," +and he pointed to a Bible standing on the chest, "de ways ob de +Lord. So I came across the Atlantic, and stopped a little while +on de coast, for I had pretty nigh forgotten de language ob de +country. When I got it back again I started up for dis place, wid +plenty ob goods and presents.</p> + +<p>"I had hard work at fust to get de people to know me. It war +nigh forty year since I had gone away, but at last some ob de ole +people remember me, dat I was de son ob de chief. As I had plenty +goods, and dey did not like de man dat was here, dey made me +chief in my fader's place. I told dem dat I no accept de place +unless dey promise to behave bery well, to mind what I said to +dem, and to listen to my words; but dat if they do dat I gibe dem +plenty goods, I make dem comfortable and happy, and I teach dem +de way ob de Lord. Dey agree to all dis.</p> + +<p>"I find de slave trade now all at an end, and dat de people +not fight often now. Still, de twenty muskets dat I bring make de +people of oder villages respec' us very much. Dey come ober to +see de village. Dey see dat de houses are comfortable, dat de +gardens are bery well cultivated, dat de people are well dressed, +not like common nigger, dat dey are happy and contented. Dey see +dat dey no believe in fetish any more, but dat ebery ebening when +de work is ober, dey gadder under de big tree and listen for half +an hour while I read to dem and den sing a hymn. Once a year I +send down to de coast and get up plenty cloth, and hoes for de +gardens, and eberyting dey want. When I land here ten year ago I +hab eight hundred pound. I got five hundred ob him left here +still. Dat more dan enuf to last Sam if he libe to be bery, bery +ole man. Dar are some good men in de village who, when I am gone, +will carry on de work ob de Lord and dat's all, sar, dat I hab to +tell you about Sam, and I am sure dat you must be very tired and +want to go to bed."</p> + +<p>The hour was, indeed, for Africa, extremely late, but the time +had passed unheeded, so interested were the listeners in the +narrative of the fine old negro. They remained at the village for +a week, and were greatly pleased with the industrious habits and +happy appearance of the people, and with the earnestness and +fervor in which every evening, and twice on Sunday, they joined +in devotions under the great tree. At the end of that time they +said goodbye to their kind host, giving him a large amount of +cloth for distribution among his people. He was unable to furnish +them with bearers, as a considerable tract of uninhabited country +extended beyond his village, and the people on the other side +were on bad terms with his villagers, on account of an +outstanding feud which had existed long before his return from +America, and which he had in vain attempted to settle since he +assumed the headship of the village.</p> + +<p>On approaching the Niger they again came upon an inhabited +country, but the tribes here being accustomed to trade with the +coast were friendly, and at the first large village they came to +no difficulty was experienced in obtaining a fresh relay of +bearers. This was a matter of great satisfaction, for the Fans +were regarded with extreme antipathy by the natives. As soon as +arrangements had been made to supply their place the Fans were +paid the four months' wages which they had earned. A large "dash" +of beads and other presents were bestowed upon them, three of the +remaining sacks of rice were given to them, and, greatly +rejoicing, they started for their own country, which, by making +long marches, they would regain in a fortnight's time. Although +it was not probable that they would meet with any enemies, six +trade muskets, with a supply of powder and ball, were given to +them, as, although they would not be able to do much execution +with these weapons, their possession would exercise a powerful +influence over any natives they might meet.</p> + +<p>In crossing the country to the Niger the white men were the +objects of lively curiosity, and the exhibition of the magic +lantern, the chemical experiments, and conjuring tricks created +an effect equal to that which they had produced among the Fans. +On reaching the Niger a canoe was hired with a crew of rowers. In +this all the cases, filled with the objects they had collected, +were placed, the whole being put in charge of the Houssas, Moses +and King John, who had been seized with a fit of homesickness. +These were to deliver the cases to the charge of an English agent +at Lagos or Bonny, to both of whom Mr. Goodenough wrote +requesting him to pay the sum agreed to the boatmen on the safe +arrival of the cases, and also to pay the Houssas, who preferred +taking their wages there, as it was not considered advisable to +tempt the cupidity of any of the native princes along the river. +Should they be overhauled the Houssas were told to open the cases +and show that these contained nothing but birds' skins and +insects, which would be absolutely valueless in the eyes of a +native.</p> + +<p>When the precious freight had fairly started, the party +crossed the Niger in a canoe, arrangements having already been +made with the potentate of a village on the opposite side for a +fresh relay of carriers, twenty men being now sufficient, owing +to the gaps which had been made in the provisions in the goods, +by the payment of the carriers and presents, and, in the cases, +by the despatch of eight of the largest of these to the coast. +They had still, however, ample space for the collections they +might still make. The cases of goods and provisions were utilized +for this purpose as they were emptied.</p> + +<p>For another two months they journeyed on, halting frequently +and adding continually to their stores. The country was fairly +populated, and there was no difficulty in buying plantains and +fruit and in obtaining fresh sets of carriers through the +territories of each petty chief. They were now approaching the +Volta, when one day a native, covered with dust and bathed in +perspiration, came up to their camp, and throwing himself on the +ground before Mr. Goodenough poured out a stream of words.</p> + +<p>"What does he say, Ostik?"</p> + +<p>"Me not know, sar. P'r'aps Ugly Tom know. He been down near +Volta country."</p> + +<p>Ugly Tom was called, and after a conversation with the native, +told Mr. Goodenough that he was a messenger from Abeokuta, that +the people there were threatened by an attack by the King of +Dahomey, and that they implored the white men, who they heard +were in the neighborhood, to come to their aid.</p> + +<p>"What do you say, Frank?" Mr. Goodenough asked.</p> + +<p>"I don't know anything about it, sir," Frank said. "I have +heard of Dahomey, of course, and its horrible customs, but I +don't know anything about Abeokuta."</p> + +<p>"Abeokuta is a very singular town," Mr. Goodenough said. "Its +people were christianized many years ago, and have faithfully +retained the religion. The town lies not very far from Dahomey, +and this power, which has conquered and enslaved all its other +neighbors, has been unable to conquer Abeokuta, although it has +several times besieged it. The Dahomey people have every +advantage, being supplied with firearms, and even cannon, by the +rascally white traders at Whydah, the port of Dahomey. +Nevertheless, the Abeokuta people have opposed an heroic +resistance, and so far successfully. Of course they know that +every soul would be put to death did they fall into the hands of +the King of Dahomey; but negroes do not always fight well, even +under such circumstances, and every credit must be given to the +people of Abeokuta. What do you say? It will be a perilous +business, mind, for if Abeokuta is taken we shall assuredly be +put to death with the rest of the defenders."</p> + +<p>"I think we ought to help them, sir," Frank said. "They must +be a noble people, and with our guns and the four Houssas we +might really be of material assistance. Of course there is a risk +in it, but we have risked our lives from fever, and in other +ways, every day since we've been in the country."</p> + +<p>"Very well, my lad. I am glad that is your decision. Tell him, +Ugly Tom, that we will at once move towards Abeokuta with all +speed, and that they had better send out a party of carriers to +meet us, as you may be sure that these men will not go far when +they hear that the Dahomey people are on the warpath. Learn from +him exactly the road we must move by, as if our carriers desert +us we shall be detained till his people come up. How far is it to +Abeokuta?"</p> + +<p>Ugly Tom learned from the native that it was about forty-five +miles.</p> + +<p>"Very well," Mr. Goodenough said, "we shall march twenty this +afternoon. Where we halt they will most likely have heard the +rumors of the war, and I expect the carriers will go no farther, +so they must send out to that point."</p> + +<p>The Houssa translated the message, and the native, saying, "I +shall be at Abeokuta tonight," kissed the hands of the white men +and started at a trot.</p> + +<p>"Wonderful stamina some of these men have," Mr. Goodenough +said. "That man has come forty-five miles at full speed, and is +now going off again as fresh as when he started."</p> + +<p>"What speed will he go at?" Frank asked.</p> + +<p>"About six miles an hour. Of course he goes faster when he is +running, but he will sometimes break into a walk. Five miles an +hour may be taken as the ordinary pace of a native runner, but in +cases which they consider of importance, like the present, you +may calculate on six."</p> + +<p>The camp was at once broken up, the carriers loaded, and they +started on their way. It was late in the evening when they +reached a village about twenty miles from their starting place. +They found the inhabitants in a great state of alarm. The news +had come that a great army was marching to attack Abeokuta, and +that the King of Dahomey had sworn on his father's skull that +this time the place should be captured, and not a house or a wall +left remaining. As Abeokuta was certain to make a strong +resistance, and to hold out for some time, the villagers feared +that the Dahomey people would be sending out parties to plunder +and carry away captives all over the surrounding country. The +panic at once extended to the bearers, who declared that they +would not go a foot farther. As their fears were natural, and Mr. +Goodenough was expecting a fresh relay from Abeokuta on the +following evening, he consented to their demand to be allowed to +leave immediately, and paying them their wages due, he allowed +them to depart at once on the return journey. The tent was soon +pitched and supper prepared, of fried plantains, rice, a tin of +sardines, and tea. Later on they had a cup of chocolate, and +turned in for the night.</p> + +<p>In the morning they were awakened just at daybreak by great +talking.</p> + +<p>"Men come for baggage, sar," Ugly Tom said, putting his head +in the tent door.</p> + +<p>"They have lost no time about it, Frank," Mr. Goodenough +exclaimed. "It was midday yesterday when the messenger left us. +He had forty-five miles to run, and could not have been in till +pretty nearly eight o'clock, and these men must have started at +once."</p> + +<p>There was no time lost. While the Houssas were pulling down +and packing up the tent Ostik prepared two bowls of chocolate +with biscuit soaked in it. By the time that this was eaten the +carriers had taken up their loads, and two minutes later the +whole party started almost at a trot. Ugly Tom soon explained the +cause of the haste. The army of Dahomey was, the evening before, +but eight miles from Abeokuta, and was expected to appear before +the town by midday, although, of course, it might be later, for +the movements of savage troops are uncertain in the extreme, +depending entirely upon the whims of their leader. So anxious +were the bearers to get back to the town in time, that they +frequently went at a trot. They were the better able to keep up +the speed as a larger number than were required had been sent. +Many of the cases, too, were light, consequently the men were +able to shift the heavy burdens from time to time. So great was +the speed, that after an hour both Mr. Goodenough and Frank, +weakened by the effect of fever and climate, could no longer keep +up. The various effects carried in the hammocks were hastily +taken out and lifted by men unprovided with loads. The white men +entered and were soon carried along at a brisk trot by the side +of the baggage. When they recovered from their exhaustion +sufficiently to observe what was going on, they could not help +admiring the manner in which the negroes, with perspiration +streaming from every pore, hurried along with their burdens. So +fast did they go, that in less than six hours they emerged from +the forest into the clearing, and a shout proclaimed that +Abeokuta was close at hand.</p> + +<p>Ten minutes later the white men were carried through the gate, +their arrival being hailed with shouts of joy by the inhabitants. +They were carried in triumph to the principal building of the +town, a large hut where the general councils of the people were +held. Here they were received by the king and the leading +inhabitants, who thanked them warmly for coming to their +assistance in the time of their peril. The travelers were both +struck with the appearance of the people. They were clad with far +more decency and decorum than was usual among the negro tribes. +Their bearing was quiet and dignified. An air of neatness and +order pervaded everything, and it was clear that they were +greatly superior to the people around.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough expressed to the king the willingness with +which his friend and himself took part in the struggle of a brave +people against a cruel and bloodthirsty foe, and he said, that as +the four Houssas were also armed with fast firing guns he hoped +that their assistance would be of avail. He said that he would at +once examine the defences of the town and see if anything could +be done to strengthen them.</p> + +<p>Accompanied by the king, Mr. Goodenough and Frank made a +detour of the walls. These were about a mile in circumference, +were built of clay, and were of considerable height and +thickness, but they were not calculated to resist an attack by +artillery. As, however, it was not probable that the Dahomey +people possessed much skill in the management of their cannon, +Mr. Goodenough had hopes that they should succeed in repelling +the assault. They learnt that a large store of provisions had +been brought into the town, and that many of the women and +children had been sent far away.</p> + +<p>The spies presently came in and reported that there was no +movement on the part of the enemy, and that it was improbable +that they would advance before the next day. Mr. Goodenough was +unable to offer any suggestions for fresh defenses until they +knew upon which side the enemy would attack. He advised, however, +that the whole population should be set to work throwing up an +earthwork just outside each gate, in order to shelter these as +far as possible from the effect of the enemy's cannonballs. +Orders were at once given to this effect, and in an hour the +whole population were at work carrying earth in baskets and +piling it in front of the gates. In order to economize labor, and +to make the sides of the mounds as steep as possible, Mr. +Goodenough directed with brushwood, forming a sort of rough +wattle work. Not even when night set in did the people desist +from their labor, and by the following morning the gates were +protected from the effect of cannon shot, by mounds of earth +twenty feet high, which rose before them. The king had, when Mr. +Goodenough first suggested these defenses, pointed out that much +less earth would be required were it piled directly against the +gates. Mr. Goodenough replied, that certainly this was so, but +that it was essential to be able to open the gates to make a +sortie if necessary against the enemy, and although the king +shook his head, as if doubting the ability of his people to take +such a desperate step as that of attacking the enemy outside +their walls, he yielded to Mr. Goodenough's opinion.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV: THE +AMAZONS OF DAHOMET</h1> + +<p>A spacious and comfortable hut was placed at the disposal of +the white men, with a small one adjoining for the Houssas. That +evening Frank asked Mr. Goodenough to tell him what he knew +concerning the people of Dahomey.</p> + +<p>"The word Dahomey, or more properly Da-omi, means Da's belly. +Da was, two hundred and fifty years ago, the king of the city of +Abomey. It was attacked by Tacudona the chief of the Fois. It +resisted bravely, and Tacudona made a vow that if he took it he +would sacrifice the king to the gods. When he captured the town +he carried out his vow by ripping open the king, and then called +the place Daomi. Gradually the conquerors extended their power +until the kingdom reached to the very foot of the Atlas range, +obtaining a port by the conquest of Whydah. The King of Dahomey +is a despot, and even his nobility crawl on the ground in his +presence. The taxes are heavy, every article sold in the market +paying about one eighteenth to the royal exchequer. There are +besides many other taxes. Every slave is taxed, every article +that enters the kingdom. If a cock crow it is forfeited, and, as +it is the nature of cocks to crow, every bird in the kingdom is +muzzled. The property of every one who dies goes to the king; and +at the Annual Custom, a grand religious festival, every man has +to bring a present in proportion to his rank and wealth. The +royal pomp is kept up by receiving strangers who visit the +country with much state, and by regaling the populace with +spectacles of human sacrifices. The women stand high in Dahomey. +Among other negro nations they till the soil. In Dahomey they +fight as soldiers, and perform all the offices of men. Dahomey is +principally celebrated for its army of women, and its human +sacrifices. These last take place annually, or even more often. +Sometimes as many as a thousand captives are slain on these +occasions. In almost all the pagan nations of Africa human +sacrifices are perpetrated, just as they were by the Druids and +Egyptians of old. Nowhere, however, are they carried to such a +terrible extent as in Dahomey. Even Ashanti, where matters are +bad enough, is inferior in this respect. The victims are mostly +captives taken in war, and it is to keep up the supply necessary +for these wholesale sacrifices that Dahomey is constantly at war +with her neighbors."</p> + +<p>"But are we going to fight against women, then?" Frank asked +horrified.</p> + +<p>"Assuredly we are," Mr. Goodenough answered. "The Amazons, as +white men have christened the force, are the flower of the +Dahomey army, and fight with extraordinary bravery and +ferocity."</p> + +<p>"But it will seem dreadful to fire at women!" Frank said.</p> + +<p>"That is merely an idea of civilization, Frank. In countries +where women are dependent upon men, leaving to them the work of +providing for the family and home, while they employ themselves +in domestic duties and in brightening the lives of the men, they +are treated with respect. But as their work becomes rougher, so +does the position which they occupy in men's esteem fall. Among +the middle and upper classes throughout Europe a man is +considered a brute and a coward who lifts his hand against a +woman. Among the lower classes wife and woman beating is by no +means uncommon, nor is such an assault regarded with much more +reprobation than an attack upon a man. When women leave their +proper sphere and put themselves forward to do man's work they +must expect man's treatment; and the foolish women at home who +clamor for women's rights, that is to say, for an equality of +work, would, if they had their way, inflict enormous damage upon +their sex."</p> + +<p>"Still," Frank said, "I shan't like having to fire at +women."</p> + +<p>"You won't see much difference between women and men when the +fight begins, Frank. These female furies will slay all who fall +into their hands, and therefore in self defense you will have to +assist in slaying them."</p> + +<p>The following day the sound of beating of drums and firing of +guns was heard, and soon afterwards the head of the army of +Dahomey was seen approaching. It moved with considerable order +and regularity.</p> + +<p>"Those must be the Amazons," Mr. Goodenough said. "They are +proud of their drill and discipline. I do not think that any +other African troops could march so regularly and solidly."</p> + +<p>The main body of the army now came in view, marching as a +loose and scattered mob. Then twelve objects were seen dragged by +oxen. These were the cannon of the besiegers.</p> + +<p>"How many do you think there are?" Frank asked.</p> + +<p>"It is very difficult to judge accurately," Mr. Goodenough +said. "But Dahomey is said to be able to put fifty thousand +fighting men and women in the field, that is to say her whole +adult population, except those too old to bear arms. I should +think that there are twenty or twenty-five thousand now in +sight."</p> + +<p>The enemy approached within musket shot of the walls, and +numbers of them running up, discharged their muskets. The +Abeokuta people fired back; but Mr. Goodenough ordered the +Houssas on no account to fire, as he did not wish the enemy to +know the power of their rifles.</p> + +<p>The first step of the besiegers was to cut down all the +plantations round the town and to erect great numbers of little +huts. A large central hut with several smaller ones surrounding +it was erected for the king and his principal nobles. The +Dahomans spread round the town and by the gesticulation and +pointing at the gates it was clear that the defenses raised to +cover these excited great surprise.</p> + +<p>The wall was thick enough for men to walk along on the top, +but being built of clay it would withstand but little battering. +Mr. Goodenough set a large number of people to work, making sacks +from the rough cloth, of which there was an abundance in the +place. These were filled with earth and piled in the center of +the town ready for conveyance to any point threatened. He +likewise had a number of beams, used in construction of houses, +sharpened at one end; stakes of five or six feet long were also +prepared and sharpened at both ends. That day the enemy attempted +nothing against the town. The next morning the twelve cannon were +planted at a distance of about five hundred yards and opened fire +on the walls. The shooting was wild in the extreme; many of the +balls went over the place altogether; others topped the wall and +fell in the town; some hit the wall and buried themselves in the +clay.</p> + +<p>"We will give them a lesson," Mr. Goodenough said, "in the +modern rifle. Frank, you take my double barrel rifle and I will +take the heavy, large bored one. Your Winchester will scarcely +make accurate firing at five hundred yards."</p> + +<p>The Houssas were already on the wall, anxious to open fire. +Mr. Goodenough saw that their rifles were sighted to five hundred +yards. The cannon offered an easy mark. They were ranged along +side by side, surrounded by a crowd of negroes, who yelled and +danced each time a shot struck the wall.</p> + +<p>"Now," Mr. Goodenough said to the Houssas, "fire steadily, +and, above all, fire straight. I want every shot to tell."</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough gave the signal, and at once Frank and the +Houssas opened fire. The triumphant yells of the Dahomans at once +changed their character, and a cry of wrath and astonishment +broke from them. Steadily Mr. Goodenough and his party kept up +their fire. They could see that great execution was being done, a +large proportion of the shots telling. Many wounded were carried +to the rear, and black forms could be seen stretched everywhere +on the ground. Still the enemy's fire continued with unabated +vigor.</p> + +<p>"They fight very pluckily," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"They are plucky," Mr. Goodenough answered; "and as cowardice +is punished with death, and human life has scarcely any value +among them, they will be killed where they stand rather than +retreat."</p> + +<p>For three or four hours the fight continued. Several officers, +evidently of authority, surrounded by groups of attendants, came +down to the guns; but as Frank and Mr. Goodenough always selected +these for their mark, and -- firing with their guns resting on +the parapet -- were able to make very accurate shooting, most of +them were killed within a few minutes of their arriving on the +spot.</p> + +<p>At the end of four hours the firing ceased, and the Dahomans +retired from their guns. The Abeokuta people raised a cry of +triumph.</p> + +<p>"I imagine they have only fallen back," Mr. Goodenough said, +"to give the guns time to cool."</p> + +<p>While the cannonade had been going on a brisk attack had been +kept up on several other points of the wall, the enemy advancing +within fifty yards of this and firing their muskets, loaded with +heavy charges of slugs, at the defenders, who replied vigorously +to them. Their cannonade was not resumed that afternoon, the +Dahomans contenting themselves with skirmishing round the +walls.</p> + +<p>"They are disappointed with the result of their fire," Mr. +Goodenough said. "No doubt they anticipated they should knock the +wall down without difficulty. You will see some change in their +tactics tomorrow."</p> + +<p>That night Mr. Goodenough had a number of barrels of palm oil +carried on to the wall, with some of the great iron pots used for +boiling down the oil, and a supply of fuel.</p> + +<p>"If they try to storm," he said, "it will most likely be at +the point which they have been firing at. The parapet is knocked +down in several places, and the defenders there would be more +exposed to their fire."</p> + +<p>It was at this point, therefore, that the provision of oil was +placed. Mr. Goodenough ordered fires to be lighted under the +boilers an hour before daybreak, in order that all should be in +readiness in case an attack should be made the first thing in the +morning. The Abeokutans were in high spirits at the effect of the +fire of their white allies, and at the comparative failure of the +cannon, at whose power they had before been greatly alarmed. Soon +after daylight the Dahomans were seen gathering near the guns. +Their drums beat furiously, and presently they advanced in a +solid mass against the wall.</p> + +<p>"They have got ladders," Mr. Goodenough said. "I can see +numbers of them carrying something."</p> + +<p>The Houssas at once opened fire, and as the enemy approached +closer, first the Abeokutans who had muskets, then the great mass +with bows and arrows, began to fire upon the enemy, while these +answered with their musketry. The central body, however, advanced +without firing a shot, moving like the rest at a quick run.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough and. Frank were not firing now, as they were +devoting themselves to superintending the defence. Ostik kept +close to them, carrying Frank's Winchester carbine and a double +barreled shotgun.</p> + +<p>"This is hot," Mr. Goodenough said, as the enemy's slugs and +bullets whizzed in a storm over the edge of the parapet, killing +many of the defenders, and rendering it difficult for the others +to take accurate aim. This, however, the Abeokutans did not try +to do. Stooping below the parapet, they fitted their arrows to +the string, or loaded their muskets, and then, standing up, fired +hastily at the approaching throng.</p> + +<p>The walls were about twenty-five feet high inside, but the +parapet gave an additional height of some four feet outside. They +were about three feet thick at the top, and but a limited number +of men could take post there to oppose the storming party. Strong +bodies were placed farther along on the wall to make a rush to +sweep the enemy off should they gain a footing. Others were +posted below to attack them should they leap down into the town, +while men with muskets were on the roofs of the houses near the +walls, in readiness to open fire should the enemy get a footing +on the wall. The din was prodigious.</p> + +<p>The Dahomans, having access to the sea coast, were armed +entirely with muskets, these being either cheap Birmingham trade +guns or old converted muskets, bought by traders for a song at +the sale of disused government stores. It is much to be regretted +that the various governments of Europe do not insist that their +old guns shall be used only as old iron. The price obtained for +them is so trifling as to be immaterial, and the great proportion +of them find their way to Africa to be used in the constant wars +that are waged there, and to enable rich and powerful tribes to +enslave and destroy their weaker neighbors. The Africans use very +much heavier charges of powder than those in used in civilized +nations, ramming down a handful of slugs, of half a dozen small +bullets, upon the powder. This does not conduce to good shooting, +but the noise made is prodigious. The Abeokutans, on the other +hand, were principally armed with bows and arrows, as, having no +direct access to the sea coast, it was difficult for them to +procure guns.</p> + +<p>The Dahomans poured up in a mass to the foot of the wall, and +then a score of rough ladders, constructed of bamboo, and each +four feet wide, were placed against the walls. Directly the point +to be attacked was indicated, Mr. Goodenough had distributed his +cauldrons of boiling oil along the walls, and had set men to work +to pierce holes through the parapet at distances of a couple of +feet apart, and at a height of six inches from the ground. A line +of men with long spears wore told to lie down upon the ground, +and to thrust through the holes at those climbing the ladders. +Another line of holes was pierced two feet higher, through which +those armed with muskets and bows were to fire, for when the +enemy reached the foot of the walls their fire was so heavy that +it was impossible to return it over the top of the parapet.</p> + +<p>Immediately the ladders were placed, men with ladles began to +throw the boiling oil over the parapet. Shrieks and yells from +below at once testified to its effect, but it was only just where +the cauldrons were placed that the besiegers were prevented by +this means from mounting the ladders, and even here many, in +spite of the agony of their burns, climbed desperately +upward.</p> + +<p>When they neared the top the fight began in earnest. Those +without were now obliged to cease firing, and the besieged were +able to stand up and with sword and spear defend their position. +The breech loaders of Mr. Goodenough and the Houssas and Frank's +repeating carbine now came into play. The Dahomans fought with +extraordinary bravery, hundreds fell shot or cut down from above +or pierced by the spears and arrows through the holes in the +parapet. Fresh swarms of assailants took their places on the +ladders. The drums kept up a ceaseless rattle, and the yells of +the mass of negroes standing inactive were deafening. Their +efforts, however, were in vain. Never did the Amazons fight with +more reckless bravery; but the position was too strong for them, +and at last, after upwards of a thousand of the assailants had +fallen, the attack was given up, and the Dahomans retired from +the wall followed by the exulting shouts of the men of +Abeokuta.</p> + +<p>The loss of the defenders was small. Some ten or twelve had +been killed with slugs. Three or four times that number were more +or less severely wounded about the head or shoulders with the +same missiles. Frank had a nasty cut on the cheek, and Firewater +and Bacon were both streaming with blood.</p> + +<p>There was no chance of a renewal of the attack that day. +Sentries were placed on the walls, and a grand thanksgiving +service was held in the open space in the center of the town +which the whole populace attended.</p> + +<p>"What will be their next move, do you think?" Frank asked Mr. +Goodenough.</p> + +<p>"I cannot say," Mr. Goodenough said; "but these people know +something of warfare, and finding that they cannot carry the +place by assault, I think you will find that they will try some +more cautious move next time."</p> + +<p>For two days there was no renewal of the attack. At Mr. +Goodenough's suggestion the Abeokutans on the wall shouted out +that the Dahomans might come and carry off their dead, as he +feared that a pestilence might arise from so great a number of +decomposing bodies at the foot of the wall. The Dahomans paid no +attention to the request, and, at Mr. Goodenough's suggestion, on +the second day the whole populace set to work carrying earth in +baskets to the top of the wall, and throwing this over so as to +cover the mass of bodies at its foot. As to those lying farther +off nothing could be done. On the third morning it was seen that +during the night a large number of sacks had been piled in a line +upon the ground, two hundred yards away from the wall. The pile +was eight feet in height and some fifty yards long.</p> + +<p>"I thought they were up to something," Mr. Goodenough said. +"They have been sending back to Dahomey for sacks."</p> + +<p>In a short time the enemy brought up their cannon, behind the +shelter of the sacks, regardless of the execution done by the +rifles of Mr. Goodenough's party during the movement. The place +chosen was two or three hundred yards to the left of that on +which the former attack had been made. Then a swarm of men set to +work removing some of the sacks, and in a short time twelve rough +embrasures were made just wide enough for the muzzles of the +guns, the sacks removed being piled on the others, raising them +to the height of ten feet and sheltering the men behind +completely from the fire from the walls.</p> + +<p>"They will make a breach now," Mr. Goodenough said. "We must +prepare to receive them inside."</p> + +<p>The populace were at once set to work digging holes and +securely planting the beams already prepared in a semicircle a +hundred feet across, behind the wall facing the battery. The +beams when fixed projected eight feet above the ground, the +spaces between being filled with bamboos twisted in and out +between them. Earth was thrown up behind to the height of four +foot for the defenders to stand upon. The space between the +stockade and the wall was filled with sharp pointed bamboos and +stakes stuck firmly in the ground with their points projecting +outwards. All day the townspeople labored at these defenses, +while the wall crumbled fast under the fire of the Dahomey +artillery, every shot of which, at so short a distance, struck it +heavily. By five in the afternoon a great gap, fifty feet wide, +was made in the walls, and the army of Dahomey again gathered for +the assault. Mr. Goodenough with two of the Houssas took his +place on the wall on one side of the gap, Frank with the other +two faced him across the chasm. A large number of the Abeokuta +warriors also lined the walls, while the rest gathered on the +stockade.</p> + +<p>With the usual tumult of drumming and yells the Dahomans +rushed to the assault. The fire from the walls did not check the +onset in the slightest, and with yells of anticipated victory +they swarmed over the breach. A cry of astonishment broke from +them as they saw the formidable defense within, the fire of whose +defenders was concentrated upon them. Then, with scarce a pause, +they leaped down and strove to remove the obstructions. +Regardless of the fire poured upon them they hewed away at the +sharp stakes, or strove to pull them up with their hands. The +riflemen on the walls directed their fire now exclusively upon +the leaders of the column, the breech loaders doing immense +execution, and soon the Dahomans in their efforts to advance had +to climb over lines of dead in their front. For half an hour the +struggle continued, and then the Dahomans lost heart and retired, +leaving fifteen hundred of their number piled deep in the space +between the breach and the stockade.</p> + +<p>"This is horrible work," Frank said when he rejoined Mr. +Goodenough.</p> + +<p>"Horrible, Frank; but there is at least the consolation that +by this fearful slaughter of their bravest warriors we are +crippling the power of Dahomey as a curse and a scourge to its +neighbors. After this crushing repulse the Abeokutans may hope +that many years will elapse before they are again attacked by +their savage neighbors, and the lessons which they have now +learned in defense will enable them to make as good a stand on +another occasion as they have done now."</p> + +<p>"Do you think the attack will be renewed?"</p> + +<p>"I should hardly think so. The flower of their army must have +fallen, and the Amazon guard must have almost ceased to exist. I +told you, Frank, you would soon get over your repugnance to +firing at women."</p> + +<p>"I did not think anything about women," Frank said. "We seemed +to be fighting a body of demons with their wild screams and +yells. Indeed, I could scarce distinguish the men from the +women."</p> + +<p>A strong guard was placed at night at the stockade, and Mr. +Goodenough and Frank lay down close at hand in case the assault +should be renewed. At daybreak the sound of a cannon caused them +to start to their feet.</p> + +<p>"They are not satisfied yet," Mr. Goodenough exclaimed, +hurrying to the wall. In the night the Dahomans had either with +sacks or earth raised their cannon some six feet, so that they +were able to fire over the mound caused by the fallen wall at the +stockade behind it, at which they were now directing their +fire.</p> + +<p>"Now for the sacks," Mr. Goodenough said. Running down, he +directed the sacks laden with earth, to whose necks ropes had +been attached, to be brought up. Five hundred willing hands +seized them, and they were lowered in front of the center of the +stockade, which was alone exposed to the enemy's fire, until they +hung two deep over the whole face. As fast as one bag was injured +by a shot it was drawn up and another lowered to its place. In +the meantime the rifles from the walls had again opened fire, and +as the gunners were now more exposed their shots did considerable +execution. Seeing the uselessness of their efforts the Dahomans +gradually slackened their fire.</p> + +<p>When night came Mr. Goodenough gathered two hundred of the +best troops of Abeokuta. He caused plugs to be made corresponding +to the size of the various cannonballs which were picked up +within the stockade, which varied from six to eighteen +pounders.</p> + +<p>About midnight the gate nearest to the breach was thrown open, +and the party sallied out and made their way towards the enemy's +battery. The Dahomans had placed sentries in front facing the +breach, but anticipating no attack in any other direction had +left the flanks unguarded. Mr. Goodenough had enjoined the +strictest silence on his followers, and their approach was +unobserved until they swept round into the battery. Large numbers +of the enemy were lying asleep here, but these, taken by +surprise, could offer no resistance, and were cut down or driven +away instantly by the assailants.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough and Frank, with a party who had been told off +specially for the purpose, at once set to work at the cannon. +These were filled nearly to the muzzle with powder, and the plugs +were driven with mallets tight into the muzzles. Slow matches, +composed of strips of calico dipped in saltpetre, were placed in +the touch holes. Then the word was given, and the whole party +fell back to the gate just as the Dahomans in great numbers came +running up. In less than a minute after leaving the battery +twelve tremendous reports, following closely one upon another +were heard. The cannon were blown into fragments, killing numbers +of the Dahomey men who had just crowded into the battery.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI: +CAPTIVES IN COOMASSIE</h1> + +<p>Upon the morning following the successful sortie not an enemy +could be seen from the walls. Swift runners were sent out, and +these returned in two hours with news that the enemy were in full +retreat towards their capital. The people of Abeokuta were half +wild with exultation and joy, and their gratitude to their white +allies was unbounded. Mr. Goodenough begged them not to lose an +hour in burying their slain enemies, and the entire population +were engaged for the two following days upon this necessary but +revolting duty. The dead were counted as they were placed in the +great pits dug for their reception, and it was found that no +fewer than three thousand of the enemy had fallen.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough also advised the Abeokutans to erect flanking +towers at short intervals round their walls, to dig a moat twenty +feet wide and eight deep at a few yards from their foot, and to +turn into it the water from the river in order that any future +attack might be more easily repelled.</p> + +<p>The inhabitants were poor, but they would willingly have +presented all their treasures to their white allies. Mr. +Goodenough, however, would accept nothing save a few specimens of +native cloth exquisitely woven from the inner barks of the trees, +and some other specimens of choice native workmanship. He also +begged them to send down to the coast by the first opportunity +the cases of specimens which had been collected since the +departure of the Fans.</p> + +<p>A violent attack of fever, brought on by their exertions in +the sun, prostrated both the white travelers a few days after the +termination of the siege, and it was some weeks before they were +able to renew their journey. Their intention was to ascend the +river for some distance, to move westward into upper Ashanti, and +then to make their way to Coomassie, whence they would journey +down to Cape Coast and there take ship for England. As soon as +they were able to travel they took leave of their friends at +Abeokuta, who furnished them with carriers for their cases and +hammock bearers for their journey as far as the Volta. This +lasted for a fortnight through an open and fertile country. Then +they crossed the river and entered Ashanti, the great rival +empire of Dahomey. As Ashanti was at peace with England they had +now no fear of molestation on their journey.</p> + +<p>Ashanti consisted of five or six kingdoms, all of which had +been conquered, and were tributary to it. The empire of Ashanti +was separated by the river Prah from the country of the Fantis, +who lived under British protection. The people drew their +supplies from various points on the coast, principally, however, +through Elmina, a Dutch settlement, five miles to the west of +Cape Coast. The Ashantis could not be called peaceable neighbors. +They, like the Dahomans, delighted in human sacrifices upon a +grand scale, and to carry these out captives must be taken. +Consequently every four or five years, on some pretext or other, +they cross the Prah, destroyed the villages, dragged away the +people to slavery or death, and carried fire and sword up to the +very walls of the English fort at Cape Coast. Sometimes the +English confined themselves to remonstrance, sometimes fought, +not always successfully, as upon one occasion Sir Charles +Macarthy, the governor, with a West Indian regiment was utterly +defeated, the governor himself and all his white officers, except +three, being killed.</p> + +<p>In 1828 we aided the Fantis to defeat the Ashantis in a +decisive battle, the consequence of which was the signature of a +treaty, by which the King of Ashanti recognized the independence +of all the Fanti tribes. In 1844, and again in 1852, a regular +protectorate was arranged between the British and the Fantis, the +former undertaking to protect them from enemies beyond the +borders, and in turn exercising an authority over the Fantis, +forbidding them to make war with each other, and imposing a +nominal tribute upon them.</p> + +<p>In 1853 the Ashantis again crossed the Prah, but, being met +with firmness, retired again. After ten years' quiet, in 1863 +they again invaded the country, burnt thirty villages, and +slaughtered their inhabitants. Governor Price then urged upon the +home authorities the necessity for the sending out from England +of two thousand troops to aid the native army in striking a heavy +blow at the Ashantis, and so putting a stop to this constant +aggression. The English government, however, refused to entertain +the proposal. In order to encourage the natives some companies of +West Indian troops were marched up to the Prah. The wet season +set in, and, after suffering terribly from sickness, the +survivors returned five months later to Cape Coast.</p> + +<p>Up to this period the Dutch trading ports and forts upon the +coast were interspersed with ours, and as the tribes in their +neighborhood were under Dutch protection constant troubles were +arising between the Dutch tribes and our own, and in 1867 an +exchange was effected, the Dutch ceding all their forts and +territory east of the Sweet river, a small stream which falls +into the sea midway between Cape Coast and Elmina, while we gave +up all our forts to the west of this stream. Similarly the +protectorate of the tribes inland up to the boundary of the +Ashanti kingdom changed hands. The natives were not consulted as +to this treaty, and some of those formerly under British +protection, especially the natives of Commendah, refused to +accept the transfer, and beat off with loss the Dutch troops who +attempted to land. The Dutch men of war bombarded and destroyed +Commendah.</p> + +<p>This step was the commencement of fresh troubles between the +Ashantis and the English. The Commendah people were Fantis, and +as such the implacable enemies of the Elmina people, who had +under Dutch protection been always allies of the Ashantis, and +had been mainly instrumental in supplying them with arms and +ammunition. The Fantis, regarding the Elmina natives and the +Dutch as one power, retaliated for the destruction of Commendah +by invading the territory of the Elmina tribe, destroying their +villages and blockading the Dutch in their port. Another reason +for this attack upon the Elminas was that an Ashanti general, +named Atjempon, had marched with several hundred men through the +Fanti country, burning, destroying, and slaying as usual, and had +taken refuge with his men in Elmina. From this time the desultory +war between the Elminas and their Ashanti allies, and the Fantis +of the neighborhood had never ceased. Our influence over our +allies was but small, for we in vain endeavored to persuade them +to give up the invasion of Elmina. We even cut off the supplies +of powder and arms to the Fantis, whose loyalty to our rule was +thereby much shaken.</p> + +<p>All these troubles induced the Dutch to come to the decision +to withdraw altogether, and they accordingly offered to transfer +all their possessions to us. The English government determined +not to accept the transfer if it should lead to troubles with the +natives, and as a first step required that the Ashanti force +should leave Elmina. In 1870 the King of Ashanti wrote to us +claiming Elmina as his, and protesting against its being handed +over to us. According to native ideas the king of Ashanti's claim +was a just one. The land upon which all the forts, English, +Dutch, Danish, and French, were built had been originally +acquired from the native chiefs at a fixed annual tribute, or as +we regarded it as rent, or as an annual present in return for +friendly relations. By the native customs he who conquers a chief +entitled to such a payment becomes the heir of that payment, and +one time the King of Ashanti upon the strength of his conquest of +the Fantis set up a claim of proprietorship over Cape Coast and +the other British forts.</p> + +<p>Of a similar nature was the claim of the Ashantis upon Elmina. +The Dutch had paid eighty pounds a year, as they asserted, as a +present, and they proved conclusively that they had never +regarded the King of Ashanti as having sovereignty over their +forts, and that he had never advanced such a claim. They now +arrested Atjempon, and refused to pay a further sum to the King +of Ashanti until he withdrew his claim. In order to settle +matters amicably they sent an envoy to Coomassie with presents +for the king, and obtained from him a repudiation of his former +letter, and a solemn acknowledgment that the money was not paid +as a tribute. The king sent down two ambassadors to Elmina, who +solemnly ratified this declaration.</p> + +<p>The transfer was then effected. We purchased from the Dutch +their forts and stores, but the people of Elmina were told that +we should not take possession of the place except with their +consent; but it was pointed out to them that if they refused to +accept our protection they would be exposed as before to the +hostility of the Fantis. They agreed to accept our offer, and on +the 4th of April, 1872, a grand council was hold, the king and +chiefs of Elmina announced the agreement of their people to the +transfer, and we took possession of Elmina, Atjempon and the +Ashantis returning to their own country.</p> + +<p>Upon the transfer taking place, Mr. Pope Hennessey, the +governor of the colony, sent to the King of Ashanti saying that +the English desired peace and friendship with the natives, and +would give an annual present, double that which he had received +from the Dutch. At the same time negotiations were going on with +the king for the free passage of Ashanti traders to the coast, +and for the release of four Germans who had been carried off ten +years before by Aboo Boffoo, one of the king's generals, from +their mission station on British territory near the Volta. The +king wrote saying that Aboo Boffoo would not give them up without +a ransom of eighteen hundred ounces of gold, and protracted +negotiations went on concerning the payments of these sums.</p> + +<p>At the time when Mr. Goodenough and Frank had landed on the +Gaboon, early in 1872, nothing was known of any anticipated +troubles with Ashanti. The negotiations between the English and +the Dutch were in progress, but they had heard that the English +would not take over Elmina without the consent of the +inhabitants, and that they would be willing to increase the +payment made by the Dutch to the king of Ashanti. It was known +too that efforts would be made to settle all points of difference +with the king; and as at Abeokuta they received news that the +negotiations were going on satisfactorily, and that there was no +prospect whatever of trouble, they did not hesitate to carry out +the plans they had formed.</p> + +<p>Before crossing the Volta, they sent across to inquire of the +chief of the town there whether two English travelers would be +allowed to pass through Ashanti, and were delayed for a fortnight +until a messenger was sent to Coomassie and returned with a +letter, saying that the king would be glad to see white men at +his capital. With this assurance they crossed the stream. They +were received in state by the chief, who at once provided them +with the necessary carriers, and with them a guard, which he said +would prevent any trouble on their way. On the following day they +started, and after arriving, at the end of a day's journey, at a +village, prepared to stop as usual for a day or two to add to +their collection. The officer of the guard, however, explained to +them through Bacon, who spoke the Ashanti language, that his +instructions were, that they were to go straight through to +Coomassie. In vain Mr. Goodenough protested that this would +entirely defeat the object of his journey. The officer was firm. +His orders were that they were to travel straight to Coomassie, +and if he failed in carrying these out, his head would assuredly +be forfeited.</p> + +<p>"This is serious, Frank," Mr. Goodenough said. "If this fellow +has not blundered about his orders, it is clear that we are +prisoners. However, it may be that the king merely gave a +direction that we should be escorted to the capital, having no +idea that we should want to loiter upon the way."</p> + +<p>They now proceeded steadily forward, making long day's +marches. The officer in command of the guard was most civil, +obtaining for them an abundance of provisions at the villages at +which they stopped, and as Frank and his companion were both +weakened by fever he enlisted sufficient hammock bearers for +them, taking fresh relays from each village. He would not hear of +their paying either for provisions or bearers, saying that they +were the king's guests, and it would be an insult to him were +they to pay for anything.</p> + +<p>Ten days after starting from the Volta they entered Coomassie. +This town lay on rising ground, surrounded by a deep marsh of +from forty to a hundred yards wide. A messenger had been sent on +in front to announce their coming, and after crossing the marsh +they passed under a great fetish, or spell, consisting of a dead +sheep wrapped up in red silk and suspended from two poles.</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough and Frank took their places at the head of the +little procession. On entering the town they were met by a crowd +of at least five thousand people, for the most part warriors, who +fired their guns, shouted, and yelled. Horns, drums, rattles, and +gongs added to the appalling noise. Men with flags performed wild +dances, in which the warriors joined. The dress of the captains +consisted of war caps with gilded rams' horns projecting in +front, and immense plumes of eagles' feathers on each side. Their +vest was of red cloth, covered with fetishes and charms in cases +of gold, silver, and embroidery. These were interspersed with the +horns and tails of animals, small brass bells, and shells. They +wore loose cotton trousers, with great boots of dull red leather +coming halfway up to the thigh, and fastened by small chains to +their waist belts, also ornamented with bells, horse tails, +strings of amulets, and strips of colored leather. Long leopards' +tails hung down their backs.</p> + +<p>Through this crowd the party moved forward slowly, the throng +thickening at every step. They were escorted to a house which +they were told was set aside for their use, and that they would +be allowed to see the king on the following day. The houses +differed entirely from anything which they had before seen in +Africa. They were built of red clay, plastered perfectly smooth. +There were no windows or openings on the exterior, but the door +led into an open courtyard of some twelve feet in diameter. On +each side of this was a sort of alcove, built up of clay, about +three feet from the ground. This formed a couch or seat, some +eight feet long by three feet high, with a thatched roof +projecting so as to prevent the rain beating into the alcove. +Beyond were one or more similar courts in proportion to the size +of the house. A sheep and a quantity of vegetables and fruits +were sent in in the course of the day, but they were told not to +show themselves in the streets until they had seen the king.</p> + +<p>"We shall be expected to make his majesty a handsome present," +Mr. Goodenough said, "and, unfortunately, our stores were not +intended for so great a potentate. I will give him my double +barreled rifle and your Winchester, Frank. I do not suppose he +has seen such an arm. We had better get them cleaned up and +polished so as to look as handsome as possible."</p> + +<p>In the morning one of the captains came and said that the king +was in readiness to receive them, and they made their way through +a vast crowd to the marketplace, an open area, nearly half a mile +in extent. The sun was shining brightly, and the scene was a +brilliant one. The king, his Caboceers or great tributaries, his +captains, and officers were seated under a vast number of huge +umbrellas, some of them fifteen feet across. These were of +scarlet, yellow, and other showy colors in silks and cloths, with +fantastically scalloped and fringed valences. They were +surmounted with crescents, birds, elephants, barrels, and swords +of gold, and on some were couched stuffed animals. Innumerable +smaller umbrellas of striped stuff were borne by the crowd, and +all these were waved up and down, while a vast number of flutes, +horns and other musical instruments sounded in the air. All the +principal people wore robes woven of foreign silk, which had been +unraveled for working into native patterns. All had golden +necklaces and bracelets, in many cases so heavy that the arms of +the bearers were supported on boys' heads. The whole crowd, many +thousands in number, shone with gold, silver, and bright +colors.</p> + +<p>The king received them with dignity, and expressed his +satisfaction at seeing them, his speech being interpreted by one +of his attendants, who spoke English. Mr. Goodenough replied that +they had very great pleasure in visiting the court of his +majesty, that they had already been traveling for many months in +Africa, having started from the Gaboon and traveled through many +tribes, but had they had any idea of visiting so great a king +they would have provided themselves with presents fit for his +acceptance. But they were simple travelers, catching the birds, +beasts, and insects of the country, to take home with them to +show to the people in England. The only things which they could +offer him were a double barreled breech loading rifle of the best +English construction, and a little gun, which would fire sixteen +times without loading.</p> + +<p>The king examined the pieces with great attention, and, at his +request, Mr. Goodenough fired off the whole contents of the +magazine of the repeating rifle, whose action caused the greatest +astonishment to the assembled chiefs. The king then intimated his +acceptance of the presents, and said that he would speak farther +with them on a future occasion. He informed them that they were +free to move about in the town where they wished, and that the +greatest respect would be shown to them by the people. There was +a fresh outburst of wild music, and they were then conducted back +to their house.</p> + +<p>After the assembly had dispersed the two Englishmen walked +about through the town. It was not of great extent, but the +streets were broad and well kept. Many of the houses were much +larger than that allotted to them, but all were built on the same +plan. It was evident that the great mass of the population they +saw about must live in villages scattered around, the town being +wholly insufficient to contain them.</p> + +<p>Three days afterwards they were told that the king wished to +see them in his palace. This was a large building situated at the +extremity of the town. It was constructed of stone, and was +evidently built from European designs. It was square, with a flat +roof and embattled parapet. They were conducted through the +gateway into a large courtyard, and then into a hall where the +king sat upon a raised throne. Attendants stood round fanning +him.</p> + +<p>"Why," he asked abruptly as they took their places before him, +"do the English take my town of Elmina?"</p> + +<p>Mr. Goodenough explained that he had been nine months absent +from the coast, and that having come straight out from England he +was altogether unaware of what had happened at Elmina.</p> + +<p>"Elmina is mine," the king said. "The Dutch, who were my +tributaries, had no right to hand it over to the English."</p> + +<p>"But I understood, your majesty, that the English were ready +to pay an annual sum, even larger than that which the Dutch have +contributed."</p> + +<p>"I do not want money," the king said. "I have gold in plenty. +There are places in my dominions where ten men in a day can wash +a thousand ounces. I want Elmina, I want to trade with the +coast."</p> + +<p>"But the English will give your majesty every facility for +trade."</p> + +<p>"But suppose we quarrel," the king said, "they can stop powder +and guns from coming up. If Elmina were mine I could bring up +guns and powder at all times."</p> + +<p>"Your majesty would be no better off," Mr. Goodenough said; +"for the English in case of war could stop supplies from +entering."</p> + +<p>"My people will drive them into the sea," the king said. "We +have been troubled with them too long. They can make guns, but +they cannot fight. My people will eat them up. We fought them +before; and see," he said pointing to a great drum, from the edge +of which hung a dozen human skulls, "the heads of the White men +serve to make a fetish for me."</p> + +<p>He then waved his hand to signify that the audience was +terminated.</p> + +<p>"Things look bad, Frank," Mr. Goodenough said as they walked +towards their home. "I fear that the king is determined upon war, +and if so our lives are not worth a month's purchase."</p> + +<p>"It can't be helped," Frank said as cheerfully as he could. +"We must make the best of it. Perhaps something may occur to +improve our position."</p> + +<p>The next day the four German missionaries, who had so long +been kept captive, called upon them, and they obtained a full +insight into the position. This seemed more hopeful than the +king's words had given them to expect. The missionaries said that +negotiations were going on for their release, and that they +expected very shortly to be sent down to Cape Coast. So far as +they knew everything was being done by the English to satisfy the +king, and they looked upon the establishment of peace as certain. +They described the horrible rites and sacrifices which they had +been compelled to witness, and said that at least three thousand +persons were slaughtered annually in Coomassie.</p> + +<p>"You noticed," one of them said, "the great tree in the +marketplace under which the king sat. That is the great fetish +tree. A great many victims are sacrificed in the palace itself, +but the wholesale slaughters take place there. The high brushwood +comes up to within twenty yards of it, and if you turn in there +you will see thousands of dead bodies or their remains putrefying +together."</p> + +<p>"I thought I felt a horribly offensive smell as I was talking +to the king," Frank said shuddering. "What monsters these people +must be! Who would have thought that all that show of gold and +silver and silks and bright colors covered such horrible +barbarism!"</p> + +<p>After chatting for some time longer, and offering to do +anything in their power to assist the captives, the Germans took +their leave.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII: THE +INVASION OF FANTI LAND</h1> + +<p>The following morning Mr. Goodenough and Frank were called to +the door by the noise of a passing crowd, and to their horror saw +a man being taken to sacrifice. He was preceded by men beating +drums, his hands were pinioned behind him. A sharp thin knife was +passed through his cheeks, to which his lips were noozed like the +figure 8. One ear was cut off and carried before him, the other +hung to his head by a small piece of skin. There were several +gashes in his back, and a knife was thrust under each shoulder +blade. He was led by a cord passed through a hole bored in his +nose. Frank ran horror stricken back into the house, and sat for +a while with his hand over his eyes as if to shut out the ghastly +spectacle.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Goodenough," he said presently, "if we are to be killed, +at least let us die fighting to the last, and blow out our own +brains with the last shots we have left. I don't think I'm afraid +of being killed, but to be tortured like that would be +horrible."</p> + +<p>The next day a message was brought them that their retaining +private guards was an insult to the king, and that the Houssas +must remove to another part of the town. Resistance was evidently +useless. Mr. Goodenough called his four men together and told +them what had happened.</p> + +<p>"I am sorry I have brought you into this plight, my poor +fellows," he said. "There are now but two things open to you. You +can either volunteer to join the king's army and then try to make +your escape as an opportunity may offer, or slip away at once. +You are accustomed to the woods, and in native costume might pass +without notice. You can all swim, and it matters not where you +strike the Prah. If you travel at night and lie in the woods by +day you should be able to get through. At any rate you know that +if you try to escape and are caught you will be killed. If you +stop here it is possible that no harm may happen to you, but on +the other hand you may at any moment be led out to sacrifice. Do +not tell me your decision; I shall be questioned, and would +rather be able to say that I was ignorant that you intended to +escape. There is one other thing to settle. There is a long +arrear of pay due to you for your good and faithful service. It +would be useless for me to pay you now, as the money might be +found on you and taken away, and if you should be killed it would +be lost to your friends. I have written here four orders on my +banker in England, which the agents down at Cape Coast will +readily cash for you. Each order is for twice the sum due to you. +As you have come into such great danger in my service, and have +behaved so faithfully, it is right that you should be well +rewarded. Give me the names of your wives or relatives whom you +wish to have the money. Should any of you fall and escape, I +will, on my arrival at Cape Coast, send money, double the amount +I have written here, to them."</p> + +<p>The men expressed themselves warmly grateful for Mr. +Goodenough's kindness, gave him the names and addresses of their +wives, and then, with tears in their eyes, took their leave.</p> + +<p>"Now, Ostik, what do you say?" Mr. Goodenough asked, turning +to him.</p> + +<p>"I stay here, sar," Ostik said. "Houssas fighting men, creep +through wood, crawl on stomach. Dey get through sure enough. +Ostik stay with massa. If dey kill massa dey kill Ostik. Ostik +take chance."</p> + +<p>"Very well, Ostik, if we get through safe together you shall +not have reason to regret your fidelity. Now, Frank, I think it +would be a good thing if you were to spend some hours every day +in trying to pick up as much of the language here as you can. You +are quick at it, and were able to make yourself understood by our +bearers far better than I could do. You already know a great many +words in four or five of these dialects. They are all related to +each other, and with what you know you would in a couple of +months be able to get along very well in Ashanti. It will help to +pass your time and to occupy your mind. There will be no +difficulty in finding men here who have worked down on the coast +and know a little English. If we get away safely you will not +regret that your time has been employed. If we have trouble your +knowledge of the language may in some way or other be of real use +to you. We can go round to the Germans, who will, no doubt, be +able to put you in the way of getting a man."</p> + +<p>The next day they were again sent for to the king, who was in +a high state of anger at having heard that the Houssas had +escaped.</p> + +<p>"I know nothing about it," Mr. Goodenough said. "They were +contented when they were with me, and had no wish to go. Your +soldiers took them away yesterday afternoon, and I suppose they +were frightened. It was foolish of them. They should have known +that a great king does not injure travelers who come peacefully +into his country. They should have known better. They were poor, +ignorant men, who did not know that the hospitality of a king is +sacred, and that when a king invites travelers to enter his +country they are his guests, and under his protection."</p> + +<p>When the interpreter translated this speech the king was +silent for two or three minutes. Then he said, "My white friend +is right, They were foolish men. They could not know these +things. If my warriors overtake them no harm shall come to +them."</p> + +<p>Pleased with the impression that his words had evidently made +Mr. Goodenough returned to Frank, who had not been ordered to +accompany him to the palace. In the afternoon the king sent a +sheep and a present of five ounces of gold, and a message that he +did not wish his white friends to remain always in the town, but +that they might walk to any of the villages within a circle of +three or four miles, and that four of his guards would always +accompany them to see that no one interfered with or insulted +them. They were much pleased with this permission, as they were +now enabled to renew their work of collecting. It took them, too, +away from the sight of the horrible human sacrifices which went +on daily. Through the German missionaries they obtained a man who +had worked for three years down at Cape Coast. He accompanied +them on their walks, and in the evening sat and talked with +Frank, who, from the knowledge of native words which he had +picked up in his nine months' residence in Africa, was able to +make rapid progress in Ashanti. He had one or two slight attacks +of fever, but the constant use of quinine enabled him to resist +their effect, and he was now to some degree acclimatized, and +thought no more of the attacks of fever than he would have done +at home of a violent bilious attack.</p> + +<p>This was not the case with Mr. Goodenough. Frank observed with +concern that he lost strength rapidly, and was soon unable to +accompany him in his walks. One morning he appeared very ill.</p> + +<p>"Have you a touch of fever, sir?"</p> + +<p>"No, Frank, it is worse than fever, it is dysentery. I had an +attack last time I was on the coast, and know what to do with it. +Get the medicine chest and bring me the bottle of ipecacuanha. +Now, you must give me doses of this just strong enough not to act +as an emetic, every three hours."</p> + +<p>Frank nursed his friend assiduously, and for the next three +days hoped that he was obtaining a mastery over the illness. On +the fourth day an attack of fever set in.</p> + +<p>"You must stop the ipecacuanha, now," Mr. Goodenough said, +"and Frank, send Ostik round to the Germans, and say I wish them +to come here at once."</p> + +<p>When these arrived Mr. Goodenough asked Frank to leave him +alone with them. A quarter of an hour later they went out, and +Frank, returning, found two sealed envelopes on the table beside +him.</p> + +<p>"My boy," he said, "I have been making my will. I fear that it +is all over with me. Fever and dysentery together are in nine +cases out of ten fatal. Don't cry, Frank," he said, as the lad +burst into tears. "I would gladly have lived, but if it is God's +will that it should be otherwise, so be it. I have no wife or +near relatives to regret my loss -- none, my poor boy, who will +mourn for me as sincerely as I know that you will do. In the year +that we have been together I have come to look upon you as my +son, and you will find that I have not forgotten you in my will. +I have written it in duplicate. If you have an opportunity send +one of these letters down to the coast. Keep the other yourself, +and I trust that you will live to carry it to its destination. +Should it not be so, should the worst come to the worst, it will +be a consolation to you to know that I have not forgotten the +little sister of whom you have spoken to me so often, and that in +case of your death she will be provided for."</p> + +<p>An hour later Mr. Goodenough was in a state of delirium, in +which he remained all night, falling towards morning into a dull +coma, gradually breathing his last, without any return of +sensibility, at eight in the morning.</p> + +<p>Frank was utterly prostrated with grief, from which he roused +himself to send to the king to ask permission to bury his +friend.</p> + +<p>The king sent down to say how grieved he was to hear of the +white man's death. He had ordered many of his warriors to attend +his funeral. Frank had a grave dug on a rising spot of ground +beyond the marsh. In the evening a great number of the warriors +gathered round the house, and upon the shoulders of four of them +Mr. Goodenough was conveyed to his last resting place, Frank and +the German missionaries following with a great crowd of warriors. +The missionaries read the service over the grave, and Frank +returned heart broken to his house, with Ostik, who also felt +terribly the loss of his master.</p> + +<p>Two days later a wooden cross was erected over the grave. Upon +this Frank carved the name of his friend. Hearing a week +afterwards that the king was sending down a messenger to Cape +Coast, Frank asked permission to send Mr. Goodenough's letter by +him. The king sent for him.</p> + +<p>"I do not wish any more troubles," he said, "or that letters +should be sent to the governor. You are my guest. When the +troubles are settled I will send you down to the coast; but we +have many things to write about, and I do not want more subjects +for talk."</p> + +<p>Frank showed the letter and read the address, and told the +king that it was only a letter to the man of business of Mr. +Goodenough in England, giving directions for the disposal of his +property there.</p> + +<p>The king then consented that his messenger should take the +letter.</p> + +<p>At the end of December, when Frank had been nearly three +months at Coomassie, one of the Germans said to him:</p> + +<p>"The king speaks fairly, and seems intent upon his +negotiations; but he is preparing secretly for war. An army is +collecting on the Prah. I hear that twelve thousand men are +ordered to assemble there."</p> + +<p>"I have noticed," Frank said, "that there have been fewer men +about than usual during the last few days. What will happen to +us, do you think?"</p> + +<p>The missionary shook his head.</p> + +<p>"No one can say," he said. "It all depends upon the king's +humor. I think, however, that he is more likely to keep us as +hostages, and to obtain money for us at the end of the war, than +to kill us. If all goes well with his army we are probably safe; +but if the news comes of any defeat, he may in his rage order us +to be executed."</p> + +<p>"What do you think are the chances of defeat?" Frank +asked.</p> + +<p>"We know not," the missionary said; "but it seems probable +that the Ashantis will turn the English out of the coast. The +Fantis are of no use. They were a brave people once, and united +might have made a successful resistance to the Ashantis; but you +English have made women of them. You have forbidden them to fight +among themselves, you have discouraged them in any attempts to +raise armies, you have reduced the power of the chiefs, you have +tried to turn them into a race of cultivators and traders instead +of warriors, and you can expect no material aid from them now. +They will melt away like snow before the Ashantis. The king's +spies tell him that there are only a hundred and fifty black +troops at Cape Coast. These are trained and led by Englishmen, +but, after all, they are only negroes, no braver than the +Ashantis. What chance have they of resisting an army nearly a +hundred to one stronger than themselves?"</p> + +<p>"Is the fort at Cape Coast strong?" Frank asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes, against savages without cannon. Besides, the guns of the +ships of war would cover it."</p> + +<p>"Well," Frank said, "if we can hold that, they will send out +troops from England."</p> + +<p>"They may do so," the missionary asserted; "but what could +white troops do in the fever haunted forests, which extend from +Coomassie to the coast?"</p> + +<p>"They will manage somehow," Frank replied confidently. +"Besides, after all, as I hear that the great portion of Ashanti +lying beyond this is plain and open country, the Ashantis +themselves cannot be all accustomed to bush fighting, and will +suffer from fever in the low, swamp land."</p> + +<p>Three days later the king sent for Frank.</p> + +<p>"The English are not true," he said angrily. "They promised +the people of Elmina that they should be allowed to retain all +their customs as under the Dutch. They have broken their word. +They have forbidden the customs. The people of Elmina have +written to me to ask me to deliver them. I am going to do +so."</p> + +<p>Frank afterwards learned that the king's words were true. +Colonel Harley, the military commandant, having, with almost +incredible fatuity, and in spite of the agreement which had been +made with the Elminas, summoned their king and chiefs to a +council, and abruptly told them that they would not be allowed +henceforth to celebrate their customs, which consisted of firing +of guns, waving of flags, dancing, and other harmless rites. The +chiefs, greatly indignant at this breach of the agreement, +solemnly entered into with them, at once, on leaving the council, +wrote to the King of Ashanti, begging him to cross the Prah and +attack the English. Frank could only say that he knew nothing of +what was going on at the coast, and could only think that his +majesty must have been misinformed, as the English wished to be +friendly with the Ashantis.</p> + +<p>"They do not wish it," the king said furiously; "they are +liars."</p> + +<p>A buzz of approval sounded among the cabooceers and captains +standing round. Frank thought that he was about to be ordered to +instant execution, and grasped a revolver, which he held in his +pocket, resolving to shoot the king first, and then to blow out +his own brains, rather than to be put to the horrible tortures +which in Ashanti always precede death.</p> + +<p>Presently the king said suddenly to him:</p> + +<p>"My people tell me that you can talk to them in their own +tongue."</p> + +<p>"I have learnt a little Ashanti," Frank said in that language. +"I cannot talk well, but I can make myself understood."</p> + +<p>"Very well," the king said. "Then I shall send you down with +my general. You know the ways of English fighting, and will tell +him what is best to do against them. When the war is over and I +have driven the English away, I will send you away also. You are +my guest, and I do not wish to harm you. Tomorrow you will start. +Your goods will be of no more use to you. I have ordered my +treasurer to count the cloth, and the powder, and the other +things which you have, and to pay you for them in gold. You may +go."</p> + +<p>Frank retired, vowing in his heart that no information as to +the best way of attacking the English should be obtained from +him. Upon the whole he was much pleased at the order, for he +thought that some way of making his escape might present itself. +Such was also the opinion of Ostik when Frank told him what had +taken place at the palace.</p> + +<p>An hour later the king's treasurer arrived. The whole of the +trade goods were appraised at fair prices, and even the cases +were paid for, as the treasurer said that these would be good for +keeping the king's state robes. Frank only retained his own +portmanteau with clothes, his bed and rugs, and the journals of +the expedition, a supply of ammunition for his revolver, his +medicine chest, tent, and a case with chocolate, preserved milk, +tea, biscuits, rice, and a couple of bottles of brandy.</p> + +<p>In the morning there was a great beating of drums.</p> + +<p>Four carriers had been told off for Frank's service, and these +came in, took up his baggage, and joined the line. Frank waited +till the general, Ammon Quatia, whom he had several times met at +the palace, came along, carried in a hammock, with a +paraphernalia of attendants bearing chairs, umbrellas, and flags. +Frank fell in behind these accompanied by Ostik. The whole +population of Coomassie turned out and shouted their +farewells.</p> + +<p>There was a pause in the marketplace while a hundred victims +were sacrificed to the success of the expedition. Frank kept in +the thick of the warriors so as to avoid witnessing the horrible +spectacle.</p> + +<p>As they passed the king he said to the general, "Bring me back +the head of the governor. I will place it on my drum by the side +of that of Macarthy."</p> + +<p>Then the army passed the swamp knee deep in water, and started +on their way down to the Prah. Three miles further they crossed +the river Dah at Agogo, where the water was up to their necks. +The road was little more than a track through the forest, and +many small streams had to be crossed.</p> + +<p>It was well that Frank had not had an attack of fever for some +time, for they marched without a stop to Fomanse, a distance of +nearly thirty miles. Fomanse was a large town. Many of the houses +were built in the same style as those at Coomassie, and the +king's palace was a stone building. That night Frank slept in a +native house which the general allotted to him close to the +palace. The army slept on the ground.</p> + +<p>The next morning they crossed a lofty hill, and then +descending again kept along through the forest until, late in the +afternoon, they arrived on the Prah. This river was about sixty +yards wide, and here, in roughly made huts of boughs, were +encamped the main army, who had preceded them. Here there was a +pause for a week while large numbers of carriers came down with +provisions. Then on the 22d of January the army crossed the Prah +in great canoes of cottonwood tree, which the troops who first +arrived had prepared.</p> + +<p>Had the Ashanti army now pushed forward at full speed, Cape +Coast and Elmina must have fallen into their hands, for there +were no preparations whatever for their defence. The Assims, +whose territory was first invaded, sent down for assistance, but +Mr. Hennessey refused to believe that there was any invasion at +all, and when the King of Akim, the most powerful of the Fanti +potentates, sent down to ask for arms and ammunition, Mr. +Hennessey refused so curtly that the King of Akim was grievously +offended, and sent at once to the Ashantis to say that he should +remain neutral in the war.</p> + +<p>About this time Mr. Hennessey, whose repeated blunders had in +no slight degree contributed to the invasion, was relieved by Mr. +Keate, who at once wholly alienated the Fantis by telling them +that they must defend themselves, as the English had nothing more +to do with the affair than to defend their forts. Considering +that the English had taken the natives under their protection, +and that the war was caused entirely by the taking over of Elmina +by the English and by their breach of faith to the natives there, +this treatment of the Fantis was as unjust as it was +impolitic.</p> + +<p>Ammon Quatia, however, seemed to be impressed with a spirit of +prudence as soon as he crossed the river. Parties were sent out, +indeed, who attacked and plundered the Assim villages near the +Prah, but the main body moved forward with the greatest caution, +sometimes halting for weeks.</p> + +<p>The Ashanti general directed Frank always to pitch his tent +next to the hut occupied by himself. Four guards were appointed, +nominally to do him honor, but really, as Frank saw, to prevent +him from making his escape. These men kept guard, two at a time, +night and day over the tent, and if he moved out all followed +him. He never attempted to leave the camp. The forest was +extremely dense with thick underwood and innumerable creepers, +through which it would be almost impossible to make a way. The +majority of the trees were of only moderate height, but above +them towered the cotton trees and other giants, rising with +straight stems to from two hundred and fifty to three hundred +feet high. Many of the trees had shed their foliage, and some of +these were completely covered with brilliant flowers of different +colors. The woods resounded with the cries of various birds, but +butterflies, except in the clearings, were scarce.</p> + +<p>The army depended for food partly upon the cultivated patches +around the Assim villages, partly on supplies brought up from the +rear. In the forest, too, they found many edible roots and +fruits. In spite of the efforts to supply them with food, Frank +saw ere many weeks had passed that the Ashantis were suffering +much from hunger. They fell away in flesh. Many were shaking with +fever, and the enthusiasm, which was manifest at the passage of +the Prah, had entirely evaporated.</p> + +<p>The first morning after crossing the river Frank sent Ostik +into the hut of the general with a cup of hot chocolate, with +which Ammon Quatia expressed himself so much gratified that +henceforth Frank sent in a cup every morning, having still a +large supply of tins of preserved chocolate and milk, the very +best food which a traveler can take with him. In return the +Ashanti general showed Frank many little kindnesses, sending him +in birds or animals when any were shot by his men, and keeping +him as well provided with food as was possible under the +circumstances.</p> + +<p>It was not until the 8th of April that any absolute +hostilities took place. Then the Fantis, supported by fifty +Houssas under Lieutenant Hopkins, barred the road outside the +village of Dunquah. The Ashantis attacked, but the Fantis fought +bravely, having great confidence in the Houssa contingent. The +battle was one of the native fashion, neither side attempting any +vigorous action, but contenting themselves with a heavy fire at a +distance of a hundred yards. All the combatants took shelter +behind trees, and the consequence was that at the end of the day +a great quantity of powder and slugs had been fired away, and a +very few men hit on either side. At nightfall both parties drew +off.</p> + +<p>"Is that the way your English soldiers fight?" the general +asked Frank that night.</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank said vaguely; "they fire away at each other."</p> + +<p>"And then I suppose," the general said, "when one party has +exhausted its ammunition it retires."</p> + +<p>"Certainly it would retire," Frank said. "It could not resist +without ammunition you know."</p> + +<p>Frank carefully abstained from mentioning that one side or the +other would advance even before the ammunition of its opponents +was expended, for he did not wish the Ashantis to adopt tactics +which, from their greatly superior numbers, must at once give +them a victory. The Ashantis were not dissatisfied with the day's +work, as they considered that they had proved themselves equal to +the English troops.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII: THE +ATTACK ON ELMINA</h1> + +<p>On the 14th the Fantis took the initiative, and attacked the +Ashantis. The fight was a mere repetition of that of a week +before, and about midday the Fantis, having used up all their +ammunition, fell back again to Cape Coast.</p> + +<p>"Now," the general said to Frank, "that we have beaten the +Fantis we shall march down to Elmina."</p> + +<p>Leaving the main road at Dunquah the army moved slowly through +the bush towards Elmina, thirty miles distant, halting in the +woods some eight miles from the town, and twelve from Cape +Coast.</p> + +<p>"I am going," the general said, "to look at the English forts. +My white friend will go with me."</p> + +<p>With fifty of his warriors Ammon Quatia left the camp, and +crossing a stream came down upon the sea coast, a short distance +west of Elmina. With them were several of the Elmina tribe, who +had come up to the camp to welcome the Ashantis. They approached +to within three or four hundred yards of the fort, which was +separated from them by a river.</p> + +<p>The forts on the west coast of Africa, not being built to +resist artillery, are merely barracks surrounded by high walls +sufficiently thick to allow men to walk in single file along the +top, to fire over the parapet. The tops of the walls being +castellated, the buildings have an appearance of much strength. +The fort of Elmina is of considerable size, with a barrack and +officers' quarters within it. One side faces the river, and +another the sea.</p> + +<p>"It is a wonderful fort," the Ashanti general said, much +impressed by its appearance.</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank replied. "And there are cannon on the top, those +great black things you see sticking out. Those are guns, and each +carries balls enough to kill a hundred men with each shot."</p> + +<p>The general looked for some time attentively. "But you have +castles in the white men's country, how do you take them?"</p> + +<p>"We bring a great many cannon throwing balls of iron as big as +my head," Frank answered, "and so knock a great hole in the wall +and then rush in."</p> + +<p>"But if there are no cannon?" the general urged.</p> + +<p>"We never attack a castle without cannon," Frank said. "But if +we had no cannon we might try to starve the people out; but you +cannot do that here, because they would land food from the +sea."</p> + +<p>The general looked puzzled. "Why do the white men come +here?</p> + +<p>"They come to trade," he said presently.</p> + +<p>"Yes, they come to trade," Frank replied.</p> + +<p>"And they have no other reason?"</p> + +<p>"No," Frank said. "They do not want to take land, because the +white man cannot work in so hot a climate."</p> + +<p>"Then if he could not trade he would go away?" the general +asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank agreed, "if he could do no trade it would be no +use remaining here."</p> + +<p>"We will let him do no trade," the general said, brightening +up. "If we cannot take the forts we will surround them closely, +and no trade can come in and out. Then the white man will have to +go away. As to the Fantis we will destroy them, and the white men +will have no one to fight for them."</p> + +<p>"But there are white troops," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"White soldiers?" the Ashanti asked surprised. "I thought it +was only black soldiers that fought for the whites. The whites +are few, they are traders."</p> + +<p>"The English are many," Frank said earnestly. "For every man +that the King of Ashanti could send to fight, England could send +ten. There are white soldiers, numbers of them, but they are not +sent here. They are kept at home to fight other white nations, +the French and the Dutch and the Danes, and many others, just as +the kings of Africa fight against each other. They are not sent +here because the climate kills the whites, so to guard the white +traders here we hire black soldiers; but, when it is known in +England that the King of Ashanti is fighting against our forts, +they will send white troops."</p> + +<p>Ammon Quatia was thoughtful for some time. "If they come," he +said at length, "the fevers will kill them, The white man cannot +live in the swamps. Your friend, the white guest of the king, +died at Coomassie."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank asserted, "but he had been nearly a year in the +country before he died. Three weeks will be enough for an English +army to march from Cape Coast to Coomassie. A few might die, but +most of them would get there."</p> + +<p>"Coomassie!" the general exclaimed in surprise. "The white men +would be mad to think of marching against the city of the great +king. We should make great fetish, and they would all die when +they had crossed the river."</p> + +<p>"I don't think, General," Frank said dryly, "that the fetishes +of the black man have any effect upon the white men. A fetish has +power when it is believed in. A man who knows that his enemy has +made a fetish against him is afraid. His blood becomes like water +and he dies. But the whites do not believe in fetishes. They +laugh at them, and then the fetishes cannot hurt them."</p> + +<p>The general said no more, but turned thoughtfully and retired +to his camp. It was tantalizing to Frank to see the Union Jack +waving within sight, and to know that friends were so near and +yet to be unable to stretch out his hand to them.</p> + +<p>He was now dressed in all respects like a native, the king +having, soon after his arrival at Coomassie, sent a present of +clothes such as were worn by his nobles, saying that the people +would not notice them so much if they were dressed like +themselves. Consequently, had the party been seen from the castle +walls the appearance of an Englishman among them would have been +unobserved.</p> + +<p>Three days later the general with a similar party crossed the +Sweet river at night, and proceeded along the sea coast to within +a few hundred yards of Cape Coast Castle, whose appearance +pleased him no more than that of Elmina had done.</p> + +<p>The Ashantis were now better supplied with food, as they were +able to depend upon the Elmina tribes who cultivated a +considerable extent of ground, and to add to the stock, the +Ashanti soldiers were set to work to aid in planting a larger +extent of ground than usual, a proof in Frank's mind that the +general contemplated making a long stay, and blockading Elmina +and Cape Coast into surrender if he could not carry them by +assault.</p> + +<p>The natives of Africa are capable of great exertion for a +time, but their habitual attitude is that of extreme laziness. +One week's work in the year suffices to plant a sufficient amount +of ground to supply the wants of a family. The seed only requires +casting into the earth, and soon the ground will be covered with +melons and pumpkins. Sweet potatoes and yams demand no greater +cultivation, and the bananas and plantains require simply to be +cut. For fifty-one weeks in the year the negro simply sits down +and watches his crops grow. To people like these time is of +absolutely no value. Their wants are few. Their garden furnishes +them with tobacco. They make drink from the palm or by fermenting +the juice of the cocoanut. The fowls that wander about in the +clearings suffice when carried down occasionally to the port, to +pay for the few yards of calico and strings of beads which are +all that is necessary for the clothing and decoration of a +family.</p> + +<p>Such people are never in a hurry. To wait means to do nothing. +To do nothing is their highest joy. Their tomorrow means a month +hence, directly, a week. If, then, the Ashanti army had been +detained for one year or five before the English settlements, it +would have been a matter of indifference to them, so long as they +could obtain food. Their women were with them, for the wife and +daughters of each warrior had carried on head, with the army, his +household goods, a tiny stool, a few calabashes for cooking, a +mat to sleep on, and baskets high piled with provisions. They +were there to collect sticks, to cook food, draw water, bring +fire for his pipe, minister to his pleasures. He could have no +more if he were at home, and was contented to wait as long as the +king ordered, were that time years distant.</p> + +<p>Frank was often filled with disgust at seeing these noble +savages lying indolently from morn till night while their wives +went miles in the forest searching for pineapples and fruits, +bent down and prematurely aged by toil and hardship. Many of the +young girls among the negroes are pretty, with their soft eyes +and skin like velvet, their merry laugh and graceful figures. But +in a very few years all this disappears, and by middle age they +are bent, and wrinkled, and old. All loads are carried by women, +with the exception only of hammocks, which are exclusively +carried by men.</p> + +<p>Thus, then, the Ashantis settled down to what appeared to +Frank to be an interminable business, and what rendered it more +tantalizing was, that the morning and evening guns at the English +forts could be plainly heard.</p> + +<p>It was on the 7th of June that Ammon Quatia reconnoitered +Elmina, and the news came next day that a hundred and ten white +men in red coats had landed from a ship which had arrived that +morning off the coast. Frank judged from the description that +these must be marines from a ship of war. In this he was correct, +as they consisted of marines and marine artillerymen under +Lieutenant Colonel Festing, who had just arrived from England. +Three days later the Ashanti general, with a portion of his +force, moved down close to Elmina; Frank was told to accompany +them. Shortly afterwards the news came that the Elminas were all +ordered to lay down their arms. They replied by going over in a +body to the Ashantis. Ammon Quatia determined at once to attack +the town, but as he was advancing, the guns of the ships of war +opened fire upon the native town of Elmina, which lay to the west +of the European quarter.</p> + +<p>The sound of such heavy cannon, differing widely from anything +they had ever heard before, caused the Ashantis to pause in +astonishment. Then came the howl of the shells, which exploded in +rapid succession in the village, from which flames began +immediately to rise. After a few minutes' hesitation the Ashantis +and Elminas again advanced. The general, who was carried in a +chair upon the shoulders of four men, took his post on rising +ground near the burning village.</p> + +<p>"There," he said, "the English soldiers are coming out of the +fort. Now you will see."</p> + +<p>The little body of marines and the blue jackets of the +<i>Barraconta</i> deployed in line as they sallied from the fort. +The Ashantis opened fire upon them, but they were out of range of +the slugs. As soon as the line was formed the English opened +fire, and the Ashantis were perfectly astonished at the incessant +rattle of musketry from so small a body of men. But it was not +all noise, for the Snider bullets swept among the crowded body of +blacks, mowing them down in considerable numbers. In two minutes +the Ashantis turned and ran. The general's bearers, in spite of +his shouts, hurried away with him with the others, and Frank +would have taken this opportunity to escape had not two of his +guards seized him by the arms and hauled him along, while the +other two kept close behind.</p> + +<p>As soon as they had passed over the crest of the rise, and the +British fire had ceased, Ammon Quatia leaped from his chair and +threw himself among his flying troops, striking them right and +left with his staff, and hurling imprecations upon them.</p> + +<p>"If you do not stop and return against the whites," he said, +"I will send every one of you back to Coomassie, and there you +will be put to death as cowards."</p> + +<p>The threat sufficed. The fugitives rallied, and in a few +minutes were ready to march back again. It was the surprise +created by the wonderful sustained fire of the breech loaders, +rather than the actual loss they inflicted, which caused the +panic.</p> + +<p>In the meantime, believing that the Ashantis had retired, the +naval contingent went back to their boats, when the Dutch vice +consul, having ascended a hill to look round, saw that Ammon +Quatia had made a detour with his troops, and was marching +against the town from the east, where he would not be exposed to +the fire of the fort. He instantly ran back with the news.</p> + +<p>The marines and the thirty West Indian soldiers in the fort at +once marched out, and met the Ashantis just as they were entering +the town. The fight was a severe one, and for a time neither side +appeared to have the advantage, and Frank, who, under the care of +his guards, was a few hundred yards in the rear, was filled with +dismay at observing that the Ashantis, in spite of the heavy loss +they were suffering, were gaining ground and pressing forward +bravely. Suddenly he gave a shout of joy, for on a rise on the +flank of the Ashantis appeared the sailors of the +<i>Barraconta</i>, who had been led round from the boats by +Lieutenant Wells, R. N., who was in command. The instant these +took up their position they opened a heavy fire upon the flank of +the Ashantis, who, dismayed by this attack by fresh foes, lost +heart and at once fled hastily. In the two engagements they had +lost nearly four hundred men. Frank, of course, retired with the +beaten Ashantis, and that evening Ammon Quatia told him that the +arms of the white men were too good, and that he should not +attack them again in the open.</p> + +<p>"Their guns shoot farther, as well as quicker, than ours," he +said. "Our slugs are no use against the heavy bullets, at a +distance; but in the woods, where you cannot see twenty feet +among the trees, it will be different. If I do not attack them +they must attack me, or their trade will be starved out. When +they come into the woods you will see that we shall eat them +up."</p> + +<p>Several weeks now passed quietly. There was news that there +was great sickness among the white soldiers, and, indeed, with +scarce an exception, the marines first sent out were invalided +home; but a hundred and fifty more arrived to take their place. +Some detachments of the 2d West Indian regiment came down to join +their comrades from Sierra Leone, and the situation remained +unchanged.</p> + +<p>One night towards the end of August a messenger arrived and +there was an immediate stir.</p> + +<p>"Now," the general said to Frank, "you are going to see us +fight the white men. Some of the big ships have gone to the mouth +of the Prah, and we believe that they are going to land in boats. +You will see. The Elmina tribes are going to attack, but I shall +take some of my men to help."</p> + +<p>Taking fifty picked warriors Ammon Quatia started at once. +They marched all night towards the west, and at daybreak joined +the Elminas. These took post in the brushwood lining the river. +The general with a dozen men, taking Frank, went down near the +mouth of the river to reconnoiter. The ships lay more than a mile +off the shore. Presently a half dozen boats were lowered, filled +with men, and taken in tow by a steam launch. It was seen that +they were making for the mouth of the river.</p> + +<p>"Now let us go back," Ammon Quatia said. "You will see what we +shall do."</p> + +<p>Frank felt full of excitement. He saw the English running into +an ambuscade, and he determined, even if it should cost him his +life, to warn them. Presently they heard the sharp puffs of the +steam launch. The boats were within three hundred yards.</p> + +<p>Frank stepped forward and was about to give a warning shout +when Ammon Quatia's eye fell upon him. The expression of his face +revealed his intention to the Ashanti, who in an instant sprang +upon him and hurled him to the ground. Instantly a dozen hands +seized him, and, in obedience to the general's order, fastened a +bandage tightly across his mouth, and then bound him, standing +against a tree, where he could observe what was going on. The +incident had occupied but a minute, and Frank heard the pant of +the steam launch coming nearer and nearer. Presently through the +bushes he caught a glimpse of it, and then, as it came along, of +the boats towing behind. The Elminas and Ashantis were lying upon +the ground with their guns in front of them.</p> + +<p>The boats were but fifteen yards from the bank. When they were +abreast Ammon Quatia shouted the word of command, and a stream of +fire shot out from the bushes. In the boats all was confusion. +Several were killed and many wounded by the deadly volley, among +the latter Commodore Commerell himself, and two or three of his +officers. The launch now attempted to turn round, and the marines +in the boats opened fire upon their invisible foes, who replied +steadily. In five minutes from the first shot being fired all was +over, the launch was steaming down with the boats in tow towards +the mouth of the river, the exulting shouts of the natives +ringing in the ears of those on board.</p> + +<p>The position of Frank had not been a pleasant one while the +fight had lasted, for the English rifle bullets sang close to him +in quick succession, one striking the tree only a few inches +above his head. He was doubtful, too, as to what his fate would +be at the termination of the fight.</p> + +<p>Fortunately Ammon Quatia was in the highest spirits at his +victory. He ordered Frank to be at once unbound.</p> + +<p>"There, you see," he said, "the whites are of no use. They +cannot fight. They run with their eyes shut into danger. So it +will be if they attack us on the land. You were foolish. Why did +you wish to call out? Are you not well treated? Are you not the +king's guest? Am I not your friend?"</p> + +<p>"I am well treated, and you are my friend," Frank said, "but +the English are my countrymen. I am sure that were you in the +hands of the English, and you saw a party of your countrymen +marching into danger, you would call out and warn them, even if +you knew that you would be killed for doing so."</p> + +<p>"I do not know," the Ashanti said candidly. "I cannot say what +I should do, but you were brave to run the risk, and I'm not +angry with you. Only, in future when we go to attack the English, +I must gag you to prevent your giving the alarm."</p> + +<p>"That is fair enough," Frank said, pleased that the matter had +passed off so well, "only another time do not stick me upright +against a tree where I may be killed by English bullets. I had a +narrow escape of it this time, you see," and he pointed to the +hole in the trunk of the tree.</p> + +<p>"I am sorry," the Ashanti general said, with an air of real +concern. "I did not think of your being in danger, I only wished +you to have a good sight of the battle; next time I will put you +in a safer place."</p> + +<p>They then returned to the camp.</p> + +<p>The next day a distant cannonade was heard, and at nightfall +the news came that the English fleet had bombarded and burnt +several Elmina villages at the mouth of the Prah.</p> + +<p>"Ah," the general said, "the English have great ships and +great guns. They can fight on the seaside and round their forts, +but they cannot drag their guns through the forests and +swamps."</p> + +<p>"No," Frank agreed. "It would not be possible to drag heavy +artillery."</p> + +<p>"No," Ammon Quatia repeated exultingly. "When they are beyond +the shelter of their ships they are no good whatever. We will +kill them all."</p> + +<p>The wet season had now set in, in earnest, and the suffering +of the Ashantis were very great. Accustomed as many of them were +to high lying lands free of trees, the miasma from the swamps was +well nigh as fatal to them as it would be to Europeans. Thousands +died, and many of the rest were worn by fever to mere +shadows.</p> + +<p>"Do you think," Ammon Quatia said to Frank one day, "that it +is possible to blow up a whole town with powder?"</p> + +<p>"It would be possible if there were powder enough," Frank +said, wondering what could be the motive of the question.</p> + +<p>"They say that the English have put powder in holes all over +Cape Coast, and my people are afraid to go. The guns of the fort +could not shoot over the whole town, and there are few white +soldiers there; but my men fear to be blown up in the air."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank said gravely. "The danger might be great. It is +better that the Ashantis should keep away from the town. But if +the fever goes on as at present the army will melt away."</p> + +<p>"Ten thousand more men are coming down when the rains are +over. The king says that something must be done. There is talk in +the English forts that more white troops are coming out from +England. If this is so I shall not attack the towns, but shall +wait for them to come into the woods for me. Then you will +see."</p> + +<p>"Do they say there are many troops?" Frank asked +anxiously.</p> + +<p>"No; they say only some white officers, but this is +foolishness. What could white officers do without soldiers? As +for the Fantis they are cowards, they are only good to carry +burdens and to hoe the ground. They are women and not men."</p> + +<p>During this time, when the damp rose so thick and steaming +that everything was saturated with it, Frank had a very sharp +attack of fever, and was for a fortnight, just after the repulse +of the attack on Elmina, completely prostrated. Such an attack +would at his first landing have carried him off, but he was now +getting acclimatized, and his supply of quinine was abundant. +With its aid he saved a great many lives among the Ashantis, and +many little presents in the way of fruit and birds did he receive +from his patients.</p> + +<p>"I wish I could let you go," the general said to him one day. +"You are a good white man, and my soldiers love you for the pains +you take going amongst them when they are sick, and giving them +the medicine of the whites. But I dare not do it. As you know +when the king is wroth the greatest tremble, and I dare not tell +the king that I have let you go. Were it otherwise I would gladly +do so. I have written to the king telling him that you have saved +the lives of many here. It may be that he will order you to be +released."</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX: THE +TIDE TURNED</h1> + +<p>From many of the points in the forest held by the Ashantis the +sea could be seen, and on the morning of the 2d of October a +steamer which had not been there on the previous evening was +perceived lying off the town. The Ashantis were soon informed by +spies in Elmina and Cape Coast that the ship had brought an +English general with about thirty officers. The news that thirty +men had come out to help to drive back twenty thousand was +received with derision by the Ashantis.</p> + +<p>"They will do more than you think," Frank said when Ammon +Quatia was scoffing over the new arrival. "You will see a change +in the tactics of the whites. Hitherto they have done nothing. +They have simply waited. Now you will see they will begin to +move. The officers will drill the natives, and even a Fanti, +drilled and commanded by white officers, will learn how to fight. +You acknowledge that the black troops in red coats can fight. +What are these? Some of them are Fantis, some of them are black +men from the West Indian Islands, where they are even more +peaceful than the Fantis, for they have no enemies. Perhaps alone +the Fantis would not fight, but they will have the soldiers and +sailors from on board ship with them, and you saw at Elmina how +they can fight."</p> + +<p>The ship was the <i>Ambriz</i>, one of the African company's +steamers, bringing with it thirty-five officers, of whom ten +belonged to the Commissariat and Medical staff. Among the +fighting men were Sir Garnet Wolseley, Colonel M'Neil, chief of +his staff, Major T. D. Baker, 18th Regiment, Captain Huyshe, +Rifle Brigade, Captain Buller, 60th Rifles, all of the staff; +Captain Brackenbury, military secretary, and Lieutenant Maurice, +R. A., private secretary, Major Home, R. E., Lieutenant Saunders, +R. A., and Lieutenant Wilmot, R. A.. Lieutenant Colonel Evelyn +Wood, 90th Regiment, and Major B. C. Russell, 13th Hussars, were +each to form and command a native regiment, having the remainder +of the officers as their assistants.</p> + +<p>The <i>Ambriz</i> had left England on the 12th of September, +and had touched at Madeira and at the various towns on the coast +on her way down, and at the former place had received the news of +the disaster to the naval expedition up the Prah.</p> + +<p>The English government had been loath to embark upon such an +expedition, but a petition which had been sent home by the +English and native traders at Sierra Leone and Elmina had shown +how great was the peril which threatened the colony, and it had +been felt that unless an effort was made the British would be +driven altogether from their hold of the coast. When the +expedition was at last determined upon, the military authorities +were flooded with recommendations and warnings of all kinds from +persons who knew the coast. Unfortunately these gentlemen +differed so widely from each other, that but little good was +gained from their counsels. Some pronounced the climate to be +deadly. Others said that it was really not bad. Some warmly +advocated a moderate use of spirits. Others declared that +stimulants were poison. One advised that all exercise should be +taken between five and seven in the morning. Another insisted +that on no account should anyone stir out until the sun had been +up for an hour, which meant that no one should go out till half +past seven. One said take exercise and excite perspiration. +Another urged that any bodily exercise should be avoided. One +consistent gentleman, after having written some letters to the +papers strongly advocating the use of white troops upon the coast +instead of West Indian regiments, when written to by Sir Garnet +Wolseley for his advice as to articles of outfit, replied that +the only article which he could strongly commend would be that +each officer should take out his coffin.</p> + +<p>Ten days passed after the landing. It was known in the Ashanti +camp that the Fanti kings had been ordered to raise contingents, +and that a white officer had been alloted to each to assist him +in this work. The Ashantis, however, had no fear whatever on this +score. The twenty thousand natives who occupied the country south +of the Prah had all been driven from their homes by the invaders, +and had scattered among the towns and villages on the seacoast, +where vast numbers had died from the ravages of smallpox. The +kings had little or no authority over them, and it was certain +that no native force, capable in any way of competing with the +army of the assailants, could be raised.</p> + +<p>The small number of men of the 2d West Indian regiment at +Elmina had been reinforced by a hundred and twenty Houssas +brought down the coast. The Ashanti advanced parties remained +close up to Elmina.</p> + +<p>On the 13th of October Frank accompanied the Ashanti general +to the neighborhood of this town. The Ashanti force here was not +a large one, the main body being nearly twenty miles away in the +neighborhood of Dunquah, which was held by a small body of +Houssas and natives under Captain Gordon. At six in the morning a +messenger ran in with the news that two of the English war +steamers from Cape Coast were lying off Elmina, and that a number +of troops had been landed in boats. The Ashanti general was +furious, and poured out threats against his spies in Cape Coast +for not having warned him of the movement, but in fact these were +not to blame. So quietly had the arrangements been made that, +until late in the previous afternoon, no one, with the exception +of three or four of the principal officers, knew that an +expedition was intended. Even then it was given out that the +expedition was going down the coast, and it was not until the +ships anchored off Elmina at three in the morning that the +officers and troops were aware of their destination. All the West +Indian troops at Cape Coast had been taken, Captain Peel of the +<i>Simoon</i> landing fifty sailors to hold the fort in case the +Ashantis should attack it in their absence. The expedition +consisted of the Houssas, two hundred men of the 2d West India +regiment, fifty sailors, and two companies of marines and marine +artillery, each fifty strong, and a large number of natives +carrying a small Armstrong gun, two rocket tubes, rockets, spare +ammunition, and hammocks for wounded.</p> + +<p>The few Ashantis in the village next to Elmina retired at once +when the column was seen marching from the castle. Ammon Quatia +had taken up his quarters at the village of Essarman, and now +advanced with his troops and took post in the bush behind a small +village about three miles from the town. The Houssas were +skirmishing in front of the column. These entered the village +which had been deserted by the Ashantis, and set it on fire, +blowing up several kegs of powder which had been left there in +the hurry of the flight. Then as they advanced farther the +Ashantis opened fire. To their surprise the British, instead of +falling back, opened fire in return, the Houssas, West Indians, +and natives discharging their rifles at random in all directions. +Captain Freemantle with the sailors, the gun, and rockets made +for the upper corner of the wood facing them to their left. +Captain Crease with a company of marine artillery took the wood +on the right. The Houssas and a company of West Indians moved +along the path in the center. The remainder of the force remained +with the baggage in reserve. The Ashantis kept up a tremendous +fire, but the marines and sailors pushed their way steadily +through the wood on either side. Captain Freemantle at length +gained a point where his gun and rockets could play on Essarman, +which lay in the heart of the wood, and opened fire, but not +until he had been struck by a slug which passed through his arm. +Colonel M'Neil, who was with the Houssas, also received a severe +wound in the arm, and thirty-two marines and Houssas were +wounded. The Ashantis were gradually driven out of the village +and wood, a great many being killed by the English fire.</p> + +<p>Having accomplished this, the British force rested for an hour +and then moved on, first setting fire to Essarman, which was a +very large village. A great quantity of the Ashanti powder was +stored there, and each explosion excited yells of rage among the +Ashantis. Their general was especially angry that two large war +drums had been lost. So great was the effect produced upon the +Ashantis by the tremendous fire which the British had poured into +every bush and thicket as they advanced, that their general +thought it expedient to draw them off in the direction of his +main body instead of further disputing the way.</p> + +<p>The English now turned off towards the coast, marching part of +the way through open country, part through a bush so dense that +it was impossible to make a flank attack upon them here. In such +cases as this, when the Ashantis know that an enemy is going to +approach through a dense and impassable forest, they cut paths +through it parallel to that by which he must advance and at a few +yards' distance. Then, lying in ambush there, they suddenly open +fire upon him as he comes along. As no idea of the coming of the +English had been entertained they passed through the dense +thickets in single file unmolested. These native paths are very +difficult and unpleasant walking. The natives always walk in +single file, and the action of their feet, aided by that of the +rain, often wears the paths into a deep V-shaped rut, two feet in +depth. Burning two or three villages by the way the column +reached the coast at a spot five miles from Elmina, having +marched nine miles.</p> + +<p>As the Ashantis were known to be in force at the villages of +Akimfoo and Ampene, four miles farther, a party was taken on to +this point. Akimfoo was occupied without resistance, but the +Ashantis fought hard in Ampene, but were driven out of the town +into the bush, from which the British force was too small to +drive them, and therefore returned to Elmina, having marched +twenty-two miles, a prodigious journey in such a climate for +heavily armed Europeans. The effect produced among the Ashantis +by the day's fighting was immense. All their theories that the +white men could not fight in the bush were roughly upset, and +they found that his superiority was as great there as it had been +in the open. His heavy bullets, even at the distance of some +hundred yards, crashed through the brush wood with deadly effect, +while the slugs of the Ashantis would not penetrate at a distance +much exceeding fifty yards.</p> + +<p>Ammon Quatia was profoundly depressed in spirits that +evening.</p> + +<p>"The white men who come to fight us," he said, "are not like +those who come to trade. Who ever heard of their making long +marches? Why, if they go the shortest distances they are carried +in hammocks. These men march as well as my warriors. They have +guns which shoot ten times as far as ours, and never stop firing. +They carry cannon with them, and have things which fly through +the air and scream, and set villages on fire and kill men. I have +never heard of such things before. What do you call them?"</p> + +<p>"They are called rockets," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"What are they made of?"</p> + +<p>"They are made of coarse powder mixed with other things, and +rammed into an iron case."</p> + +<p>"Could we not make some too?" the Ashanti general asked.</p> + +<p>"No," Frank replied. "At least, not without a knowledge of the +things you should mix with the powder, and of that I am ignorant. +Besides, the rockets require great skill in firing, otherwise +they will sometimes come back and kill the men who fire +them."</p> + +<p>"Why did you not tell me that the white men could fight in the +bush?"</p> + +<p>"I told you that there would be a change when the new general +came, and that they would not any longer remain in their forts, +but would come out and attack you."</p> + +<p>A few days after this fight the Ashantis broke up their camp +at Mampon, twelve miles from Elmina, and moved eastward to join +the body who were encamped in the forest near Dunquah.</p> + +<p>"I am going," Ammon Quatia said to Frank, "to eat up Dunquah +and Abra Crampa. We shall do better this time. We know what the +English guns can do and shall not be surprised."</p> + +<p>With ten thousand men Ammon Quatia halted at the little +village of Asianchi, where there was a large clearing, which was +speedily covered with the little leafy bowers which the Ashantis +run up at each halting place.</p> + +<p>Two days later Sir Garnet Wolseley with a strong force marched +out from Cape Coast to Abra Crampa, halting on the way for a +night at Assaiboo, ten miles from the town. On the same day the +general sent orders to Colonel Festing of the Marine Artillery, +who commanded at Dunquah, to make a reconnaissance into the +forest from that place. In accordance with this order Colonel +Festing marched out with a gun and rocket apparatus under Captain +Rait, the Annamaboe contingent of a hundred and twenty men under +their king, directed by Captain Godwin, four hundred other Fantis +under Captain Broomhead, and a hundred men of the 2d West India +regiment. After a three mile march in perfect silence they came +upon an Ashanti cutting wood, and compelled him to act as guide. +The path divided into three, and the Annamaboes, who led the +advance, when within a few yards of the camp, gave a sudden cheer +and rushed in.</p> + +<p>The Ashantis, panic stricken at the sudden attack, fled +instantly from the camp into the bush. Sudden as was the scare +Frank's guards did not forget their duty, but seizing him dragged +him off with them in their flight, by the side of Ammon Quatia. +The latter ordered the war drums to begin to beat, and Frank was +surprised at the quickness with which the Ashantis recovered from +their panic. In five minutes a tremendous fire was opened from +the whole circle of bush upon the camp. This stood on rising +ground, and the British force returned the fire with great +rapidity and effect. The Annamaboe men stood their ground +gallantly, and the West Indians fought with great coolness, +keeping up a constant and heavy fire with their Sniders. The +Houssas, who had been trained as artillerymen, worked their gun +and rocket tube with great energy, yelling and whooping as each +round of grape or canister was fired into the bush, or each +rocket whizzed out.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the heavy loss which they were suffering, the +Ashantis stood their ground most bravely. Their wild yells and +the beating of their drums never ceased, and only rose the louder +as each volley of grape was poured into them. They did not, +however, advance beyond the shelter of their bush, and, as the +British were not strong enough to attack them there, the duel of +artillery and musketry was continued without cessation for an +hour and a half, and then Colonel Festing fell back unmolested to +Dunquah.</p> + +<p>The Ashantis were delighted at the result of the fighting, +heavy as their loss had been. They had held their ground, and the +British had not ventured to attack them in the bush.</p> + +<p>"You see," Ammon Quatia said exultingly to Frank, "what I told +you was true. The white men cannot fight us in the bush. At +Essarman the wood was thin and gave but a poor cover. Here, you +see, they dared not follow us."</p> + +<p>On the British side five officers and the King of Annamaboe +were wounded, and fifty-two of the men. None were killed, the +distance from the bush to the ground held by the English being +too far for the Ashanti slugs to inflict mortal wounds.</p> + +<p>Ammon Quatia now began to meditate falling back upon the Prah +-- the sick and wounded were already sent back -- but he +determined before retiring to attack Abra Crampa, whose king had +sided with us, and where an English garrison had been posted.</p> + +<p>On the 2d of November, however, Colonel Festing again marched +out from Dunquah with a hundred men of the 2d West India +regiment, nine hundred native allies, and some Houssas with +rockets, under Lieutenant Wilmot, towards the Ashanti camp. This +time Ammon Quatia was not taken by surprise. His scouts informed +him of the approach of the column, and moving out to meet them, +he attacked them in the bush before they reached the camp. +Crouching among the trees the Ashantis opened a tremendous fire. +All the native allies, with the exception of a hundred, bolted at +once, but the remainder, with the Houssas and West Indians, +behaved with great steadiness and gallantry, and for two hours +kept up a heavy Snider fire upon their invisible foes.</p> + +<p>Early in the fight Lieutenant Wilmot, while directing the +rocket tube, received a severe wound in the shoulder. He, +however, continued at his work till, just as the fight was ended, +he was shot through the heart with a bullet. Four officers were +wounded as were thirteen men of the 2d West India regiment. One +of the natives was killed, fifty severely wounded, and a great +many slightly. After two hours' fighting Colonel Festing found +the Ashantis were working round to cut off his retreat, and +therefore fell back again on Dunquah. The conduct of the native +levies here and in two or three smaller reconnaisances was so bad +that it was found that no further dependence could be placed upon +them, and, with the exception of the two partly disciplined +regiments under Colonel Wood and Major Russell, they were in +future treated as merely fit to act as carriers for the +provisions.</p> + +<p>Although the second reconnaissance from Dunquah had, like the +first, been unsuccessful, its effect upon the Ashantis was very +great. They had themselves suffered great loss, while they could +not see that any of their enemies had been killed, for Lieutenant +Wilmot's body had been carried off. The rockets especially +appalled them, one rocket having killed six, four of whom were +chiefs who were talking together. It was true that the English +had not succeeded in forcing their way through the bush, but if +every time they came out they were to kill large numbers without +suffering any loss themselves, they must clearly in the long run +be victorious.</p> + +<p>What the Ashantis did not see, and what Frank carefully +abstained from hinting to Ammon Quatia, was that if, instead of +stopping and firing at a distance beyond that which at their +slugs were effective, they were to charge down upon the English +and fire their pieces when they reached within a few yards of +them, they would overpower them at once by their enormous +superiority of numbers. At ten paces distant a volley of slugs is +as effective as a Snider bullet, and the whole of the native +troops would have bolted the instant such a charge was made. In +the open such tactics might not be possible, as the Sniders could +be discharged twenty times before the English line was reached, +but in the woods, where the two lines were not more than forty or +fifty yards apart, the Sniders could be fired but once or at the +utmost twice, while the assailants rushed across the short +intervening space.</p> + +<p>Had the Ashantis adopted these tactics they could have crushed +with ease the little bands with which the English attacked them. +But it is characteristic of all savages that they can never be +got to rush down upon a foe who is prepared and well armed. A +half dozen white men have been known to keep a whole tribe of Red +Indians at a distance on the prairie. This, however, can be +accounted for by the fact that the power of the chiefs is +limited, and that each Indian values his own life highly and does +not care to throw it away on a desperate enterprise. Among the +Ashantis, however, where the power of the chiefs is very great +and where human life is held of little account, it is singular +that such tactics should not have been adopted.</p> + +<p>The Ashantis were now becoming thoroughly dispirited. Their +sufferings had been immense. Fever and hunger had made great +ravages among them, and, although now the wet season was over a +large quantity of food could be obtained in the forest, the +losses which the white men's bullets, rockets, and guns had +inflicted upon them had broken their courage. The longing for +home became greater than ever, and had it not been that they knew +that troops stationed at the Prah would prevent any fugitives +from crossing, they would have deserted in large numbers. Already +one of the divisions had fallen back.</p> + +<p>Ammon Quatia spent hours sitting at the door of his hut +smoking and talking to the other chiefs. Frank was often called +into council, as Ammon Quatia had conceived a high opinion of his +judgment, which had proved invariably correct so far.</p> + +<p>"We are going," he said one day, "to take Abra Crampa and to +kill its king, and then to fall back across the Prah."</p> + +<p>"I think you had better fall back at once," Frank answered. +"When you took me with you to the edge of the clearing yesterday +I saw that preparations had been made for the defense, and that +there were white troops there. You will never carry the village. +The English have thrown up breastworks of earth, and they will +lie behind these and shoot down your men as they come out of the +forest."</p> + +<p>"I must have one victory to report to the king if I can," +Ammon Quatia said. "Then he can make peace if he chooses. The +white men will not wish to go on fighting. The Fantis are eager +for peace and to return to their villages. What do you +think?"</p> + +<p>"If it be true that white troops are coming out from England, +as the Fanti prisoners say," Frank answered, "you will see that +the English will not make peace till they have crossed the Prah +and marched to Coomassie. Your king is always making trouble. You +will see that this time the English will not be content with your +retiring, but will in turn invade Ashanti."</p> + +<p>Ammon Quatia and the chiefs laughed incredulously.</p> + +<p>"They will not dare to cross the Prah," Ammon Quatia said. "If +they enter Ashanti they will be eaten up."</p> + +<p>"They are not so easy to eat up," Frank answered. "You have +seen how a hundred or two can fight against your whole army. What +will it be when they are in thousands? Your king has not been +wise. It would be better for him to send down at once and to make +peace at any price."</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX: THE WHITE +TROOPS</h1> + +<p>Two days later Frank was awoke by a sudden yell. He leaped +from his bed of boughs, seized his revolver, and rushing to the +door, saw that a party of some twenty men were attacking Ammon +Quatia's hut. The two guards stationed there had already been cut +down. Frank shouted to his four guards and Ostik to follow him. +The guards had been standing irresolute, not knowing what side to +take, but the example of the young Englishman decided them. They +fired their muskets into the knot of natives, and then charged +sword in hand. Ostik drew the sword which he always carried and +followed close to his master's heels. Frank did not fire until +within two yards of the Ashantis. Then his revolver spoke out and +six shots were discharged, each with deadly effect. Then, +catching up a musket which had fallen from the hands of one of +the men he had shot, he clubbed it and fell upon the surprised +and already hesitating conspirators.</p> + +<p>These, fortunately for Frank, had not loaded their muskets. +They had intended to kill Ammon Quatia and then to disperse +instantly before aid could arrive, believing that with his death +the order for retreat across the Prah would at once be given. +Several of them had been killed by the slugs from the muskets of +Frank's guard, and his pistol had completed their confusion. The +reports of the guns called up other troops, and these came +rushing in on all sides. Scarcely did Frank and his followers +fall upon the conspirators than they took to their heels and fled +into the wood.</p> + +<p>Ammon Quatia himself, sword in hand, had just sprung to the +door of the hut prepared to sell his life dearly, when Frank's +guard fired. The affair was so momentary that he had hardly time +to realize what had happened before his assailants were in full +flight.</p> + +<p>"You have saved my life," he said to Frank. "Had it not been +for you I must have been killed. You shall not find me +ungrateful. When I have taken Abra Crampa I will manage that you +shall return to your friends. I dare not let you go openly, for +the king would not forgive me, and I shall have enough to do +already to pacify him when he hears how great have been our +losses. But rest content. I will manage it somehow."</p> + +<p>An hour afterwards Ammon Quatia gave orders that the army +should move to the attack of Abra Crampa. The place was held by a +body of marines and sailors, a hundred West Indians, and the +native troops of the king. Major Russell was in command. The +village stood on rising ground, and was surrounded for a distance +of a hundred and fifty yards by a clearing. Part of this +consisted of patches of cultivated ground, the rest had been +hastily cleared by the defenders. At the upper end stood a +church, and this was converted into a stronghold. The windows +were high up in the walls, and a platform had been erected inside +for the sailors to fire from the windows, which were partially +blocked with sandbags. The houses on the outside of the village +had all been loopholed, and had been connected by breastworks of +earth. Other defenses had been thrown up further back in case the +outworks should be carried. The mission house in the main street +and the huts which surrounded it formed, with the church, the +last strongholds. For two or three days the bush round the town +had swarmed with Ashantis, whose tomtoms could be heard by the +garrison night and day.</p> + +<p>Frank accompanied Ammon Quatia, and was therefore in the +front, and had an opportunity of seeing how the Ashantis commence +an attack. The war drums gave the signal, and when they ceased, +ten thousand voices raised the war song in measured cadence. The +effect was very fine, rising as it did from all parts of the +forest. By this time the Ashantis had lined the whole circle of +wood round the clearing. Then three regular volleys were fired, +making, from the heavy charges used, a tremendous roar.</p> + +<p>Scarcely had these ceased when the King of Abra, a splendid +looking negro standing nearly six feet four in height, stepped +out from behind the breastwork and shouted a taunting challenge +to the Ashantis to come on. They replied with a loud yell, and +with the opening of a continuous fire round the edge of the wood. +On wall and roof of the village the slugs pattered thickly; but +the defenders were all in shelter, and in reply, from breastwork +and loophole, from the windows and roof of the church, the +answering Snider bullets flew out straight and deadly. Several +times Ammon Quatia tried to get his men to make a rush. The war +drums beat, the great horns sounded, and the men shouted, but +each time the English bullets flew so thick and deadly into the +wood wherever the sound rose loudest that the Ashantis' heart +failed them, and they could not be got to make the rush across +the hundred yards of cleared ground.</p> + +<p>At five o'clock the fire slackened, but shortly after dark the +attack recommenced. The moon was up and full. Frank feared that +the Ashantis would try and crawl a part of the distance across +the clearing and then make a sudden rush; but they appeared to +have no idea of a silent attack. Several times, indeed, they +gathered and rushed forward in large bodies, but each time their +shouting and drums gave warning to the besieged, and so +tremendous a fire was opened upon them when they emerged from the +shadow of the trees into the moonlight, that each time they fell +back leaving the ground strewn with dead. Till midnight the +attack was continued, then the Ashantis fell back to their +camp.</p> + +<p>At Accroful, a village on the main road some four miles +distant, the attack had been heard, and a messenger sent off to +Cape Coast to inform Sir Garnet Wolseley.</p> + +<p>In the morning fifty men of the 2d West India regiment marched +from Accroful into Abra Crampa without molestation. Later on some +Abra scouts approached the Ashanti camp and shouted tauntingly to +know when the Ashantis were coming into Abra Crampa.</p> + +<p>They shouted in return, "After breakfast," and soon +afterwards, a rocket fired from the roof of the church falling +into the camp, they again sallied out and attacked. It was a +repetition of the fight of the day before. Several times Major +Russell withheld his fire altogether, but the Ashantis could not +be tempted to show in force beyond the edge of the wood. So +inspirited were the defenders that they now made several sorties +and penetrated some distance into the wood.</p> + +<p>At eight in the morning Sir Garnet Wolseley had marched from +Cape Coast with three hundred marines and blue jackets to the +relief of the position, but so tremendous was the heat that +nearly half the men fell exhausted by the way, and were ordered +when they recovered to march back to Cape Coast. The remainder, +when they arrived at Assaibo, five miles from Abra Crampa, were +so utterly exhausted that a long halt was necessary, although a +faint but continuous fire could be heard from the besieged +place.</p> + +<p>Chocolate and cold preserved meat were served out to the men, +and in the course of another three hours a large number of the +stragglers came in. At three o'clock, a hundred of the most +exhausted men being left to hold the village, the rest of the +force with the fifty West Indians stationed there marched forward +to Buteana, where they were jointed by fifty more men from +Accroful. Just as they started from this place they met the King +of Abra, who had come out with a small body of warriors; from him +Sir Garnet learned that this road, which wound round and came in +at the back of Abra Crampa, was still open.</p> + +<p>The Ashantis were too busy with their own operations to watch +the path, and the relieving force entered the place without +firing a shot. The firing round the town continued, but Ammon +Quatia, when he saw the reinforcements enter, at once began to +fall back with the main body of his troops, and although the +firing was kept up all night, when the besieged in the morning +advanced to attack the Ashanti camp they found it altogether +deserted.</p> + +<p>"It is of no use," the Ashanti general said to Frank. "My men +cannot fight in the open against the English guns. Besides, they +do not know what they are fighting for here; but if your general +should ever cross the Prah you will find it different. There are +forests all the way to Coomassie, as you know, and the men will +be fighting in defense of their own country, you will see what we +shall do then. And now I will keep my promise to you. Tonight +your guards will go to sleep. I shall have medicine given them +which will make them sleep hard. One of the Fanti prisoners will +come to your hut and will guide you through the woods to +Assaiboo. Goodbye, my friend. Ammon Quatia has learnt that some +of the white men are good and honest, and he will never forget +that he owes his life to you. Take this in remembrance of Ammon +Quatia."</p> + +<p>And he presented Frank with a necklace composed of nuggets of +gold as big as walnuts and weighing nearly twenty pounds.</p> + +<p>Frank in return gave the general the only article of value +which he now possessed, his revolver and tin box of cartridges, +telling him that he hoped he would never use it against the +English, but that it might be of value to him should he ever +again have trouble with his own men. Frank made a parcel of the +necklace and of the gold he had received from the king for his +goods, and warned Ostik to hold himself in readiness for flight. +The camp was silent although the roar of musketry a few hundred +yards off round Abra Crampa continued unbroken. For some time +Frank heard his guards pacing outside, and occasionally speaking +to each other. Then these sounds ceased and all was quiet. +Presently the front of the tent was opened and a voice said, +"Come, all is ready."</p> + +<p>Frank came out and looked round. The Ashanti camp was +deserted. Ammon Quatia had moved away with the main body of his +troops, although the musketry fire round the village was kept up. +A Fanti stood at the door of the hut with Ostik. The four guards +were sleeping quietly. Noiselessly the little party stole away. A +quarter of an hour later they struck the path, and an hour's +walking brought them to Assaiboo. Not an Ashanti was met with +along the path, but Frank hardly felt that he was safe until he +heard the challenge of "Who goes there?" from an English sentry. +A few minutes later he was taken before Captain Bradshaw, R. N., +who commanded the sailors and marines who had been left there. +Very hearty was the greeting which the young Englishman received +from the genial sailor, and a bowl of soup and a glass of grog +were soon set before him.</p> + +<p>His arrival created quite a sensation, and for some hours he +sat talking with the officers, while Ostik was an equal subject +of curiosity among the sailors. The news that the Ashanti army +was in full retreat relieved the garrison of the place from all +further fear of attack, and Frank went to sleep before morning, +and was only roused at noon when a messenger arrived with the +news that the Ashanti camp had been found deserted, and that the +road in its rear was found to be strewn with chairs, clothes, +pillows, muskets, and odds and ends of every description. Few +Ashanti prisoners had been taken, but a considerable number of +Fantis, who had been prisoners among them, had come in, having +escaped in the confusion of the retreat. Among these were many +women, several of whom had been captured when the Ashantis had +first crossed the Prah ten months before. In the afternoon Sir +Garnet Wolseley, with the greater portion of the force from Abra +Crampa, marched in, and Frank was introduced by Captain Bradshaw +to the general. As the latter was anxious to press on at once to +Cape Coast, in order that the sailors and marines might sleep on +board ship that night, he asked Frank to accompany him, and on +the road heard the story of his adventures. He invited him to +sleep for the night at Government House, an invitation which +Frank accepted; but he slept worse than he had done for a long +time. It was now nearly two years since he had landed in Africa, +and during all that time he had slept, covered with a rug, on the +canvas of his little camp bed. The complete change, the stillness +and security, and, above all, the novelty of a bed with sheets, +completely banished sleep, and it was not until morning was +dawning that, wrapping himself in a rug, and lying on the ground, +he was able to get a sleep. In the morning at breakfast Sir +Garnet asked him what he intended to do, and said that if he were +in no extreme hurry to return to England he could render great +services as guide to the expedition, which would start for +Coomassie as soon as the white troops arrived. Frank had already +thought the matter over. He had had more than enough of Africa, +but two or three months longer would make no difference, and he +felt that his knowledge of the Ashanti methods of war, of the +country to be traversed, the streams to be crossed, and the +points at which the Ashantis would probably make a stand, would +enable him to tender really valuable assistance to the army. He +therefore told Sir Garnet Wolseley that he had no particular +business which called him urgently back, and that he was willing +to guide the army to Coomassie. He at once had quarters as an +officer assigned to him in the town, with rations for himself and +servant.</p> + +<p>His first step was to procure English garments, for although +he had before starting laid aside his Ashanti costume, and put on +that he had before worn, his clothes were now so travel worn as +to be scarce wearable. He had no difficulty in doing this. Many +of the officers were already invalided home, and one who was just +sailing was glad to dispose of his uniform, which consisted of a +light brown Norfolk shooting jacket, knickerbockers, and helmet, +as these would be of no use to him in England.</p> + +<p>Frank's next step was to go to the agent of Messrs. Swanzy, +the principal African merchants of the coast. This gentleman +readily cashed one of the orders on the African bank which Mr. +Goodenough had, before his death, handed over to Frank, and the +latter proceeded to discharge the long arrears of wages owing to +Ostik, adding, besides, a handsome present. He offered to allow +his faithful servant to depart to join his family on the Gaboon +at once, should he wish to do so, but Ostik declared that he +would remain with him as long as he stopped in Africa. On Frank's +advice, however, he deposited his money, for safe keeping, with +Messrs. Swanzy's agent, with orders to transmit it to his family +should anything happen to him during the expedition.</p> + +<p>Three days later Frank was attacked by fever, the result of +the reaction after so many dangers. He was at once sent on board +the <i>Simoon</i>, which had been established as a hospital ship; +but the attack was a mild one, and in a few days, thanks to the +sea air, and the attention and nursing which he received, he was +convalescent. As soon as the fever passed away, and he was able +to sit on deck and enjoy the sea breezes, he had many visits from +the officers of the ships of war. Among these was the captain of +the <i>Decoy</i> gunboat.</p> + +<p>After chatting with Frank for some time the officer said: "I +am going down the coast as far as the mouth of the Volta, where +Captain Glover is organizing another expedition. You will not be +wanted on shore just at present, and a week's rest will do you +good; what do you say to coming down with me -- it will give you +a little change and variety?"</p> + +<p>Frank accepted the invitation with pleasure. An hour later the +<i>Decoy</i>'s boat came alongside, and Frank took his place on +board it, Ostik following with his clothes. An hour later the +<i>Decoy</i> got up her anchor and steamed down the coast. It was +delightful to Frank, sitting in a large wicker work chair in the +shade of the awning, watching the distant shore and chatting with +the officers. He had much to hear of what had taken place in +England since he left, and they on their part were equally eager +to learn about the road along which they would have to march -- +at least those of them who were fortunate enough to be appointed +to the naval brigade -- and the wonders of the barbarian capital. +The <i>Decoy</i> was not fast, about six knots being her average +pace of steaming; however, no one was in a hurry; there would be +nothing to do until the troops arrived from England; and to all, +a trip down the coast was a pleasant change after the long +monotony of rolling at anchor. For some distance from Cape Coast +the shore was flat, but further on the country became hilly. Some +of the undulations reached a considerable height, the highest, +Mamquady, being over two thousand feet.</p> + +<p>"That ought to be a very healthy place," Frank said. "I should +think that a sanatorium established there would be an immense +boon to the whites all along the coasts."</p> + +<p>"One would think so," an officer replied "but I'm told that +those hills are particularly unhealthy. That fellow you see +jutting out is said to be extremely rich in gold. Over and over +again parties have been formed to dig there, but they have always +suffered so terribly from fever that they have had to relinquish +the attempt. The natives suffer as well as the whites. I believe +that the formation is granite, the surface of which is much +decomposed; and it is always found here that the turning up of +ground that has not been disturbed for many years is extremely +unhealthy, and decomposing granite possesses some element +particularly obnoxious to health. The natives, of course, look +upon the mountain as a fetish, and believe that an evil spirit +guards it. The superstition of the negroes is wonderful, and at +Accra they are, if possible, more superstitious than anywhere +else. Every one believes that every malady under the sun is +produced by fetish, and that some enemy is casting spells upon +them."</p> + +<p>"There is more in it than you think," the doctor joined in; +"although it is not spells, but poison, which they use against +each other. The use of poison is carried to an incredible extent +here. I have not been much on shore; but the medical men, both +civilian and military, who have been here any time are convinced +that a vast number of the deaths that take place are due to +poison. The fetish men and women who are the vendors of these +drugs keep as a profound secret their origin and nature, but it +is certain that many of them are in point of secrecy and celerity +equal to those of the middle ages."</p> + +<p>"I wonder that the doctors have never discovered what plants +they get them from," Frank said.</p> + +<p>"Some of them have tried to do so," the doctor replied; "but +have invariably died shortly after commencing their experiments; +it is believed they have been poisoned by the fetish men in order +to prevent their secrets being discovered."</p> + +<p>The hours passed pleasurably. The beautiful neatness and order +prevailing on board a man of war were specially delightful to +Frank after the rough life he had so long led, and the silence +and discipline of the men presented an equally strong contrast to +the incessant chattering and noise kept up by the niggers.</p> + +<p>The next morning the ship was off Accra. Here the scenery had +entirely changed. The hills had receded, and a wide and slightly +undulating plain extended to their feet, some twelve miles back. +The captain was going to land, as he had some despatches for the +colony, and he invited Frank to accompany him. They did not, as +Frank expected, land in a man of war's boat, but in a surf boat, +which, upon their hoisting a signal, came out to them. These surf +boats are large and very wide and flat. They are paddled by ten +or twelve negroes, who sit upon the gunwale. These men work +vigorously, and the boats travel at a considerable pace. Each +boat has a stroke peculiar to itself. Some paddle hard for six +strokes and then easy for an equal number. Some will take two or +three hard and then one easy. The steersman stands in the stern +and steers with an oar. He or one of the crew keeps up a +monotonous song, to which the crew reply in chorus, always in +time with their paddling.</p> + +<p>The surf is heavy at Accra and Frank held his breath, as, +after waiting for a favorable moment, the steersman gave the sign +and the boat darted in at lightning speed on the top of a great +wave, and ran up on the beach in the midst of a whirl of white +foam.</p> + +<p>While the captain went up to Government House, Frank, +accompanied by one of the young officers who had also come +ashore, took a stroll through the town. The first thing that +struck him was the extraordinary number of pigs. These animals +pervaded the whole place. They fed in threes and fours in the +middle of the streets. They lay everywhere in the road, across +the doors, and against the walls. They quarreled energetically +inside lanes and courtyards, and when worsted in their disputes +galloped away grunting, careless whom they might upset. The +principal street of Accra was an amusing sight. Some effort had +been made to keep it free of the filth and rubbish which +everywhere else abounded. Both sides were lined by salesmen and +women sitting on little mats upon the low wooden stools used as +seats in Africa. The goods were contained in wooden trays. Here +were dozens of women offering beads for sale of an unlimited +variety of form and hue. They varied from the tiny opaque beads +of all colors used by English children for their dolls, to great +cylindrical beads of variegated hues as long and as thick as the +joint of a finger. The love of the Africans for beads is +surprising. The women wear them round the wrists, the neck, and +the ankles. The occupation of threading the little beads is one +of their greatest pleasures. The threads used are narrow fibers +of palm leaves, which are very strong. The beads, however, are of +unequal sizes, and no African girl who has any respect for her +personal appearance will put on a string of beads until she has, +with great pains and a good deal of skill, rubbed them with sand +and water until all the projecting beads are ground down, and the +whole are perfectly smooth and even.</p> + +<p>Next in number to the dealers in beads were those who sold +calico, or, as it is called in Africa, cloth, and gaudily colored +kerchiefs for the head. These three articles -- beads, cotton +cloth, and colored handkerchiefs -- complete the list of articles +required for the attire and adornment of males and females in +Africa. Besides these goods, tobacco, in dried leaves, short clay +pipes, knives, small looking glasses, and matches were offered +for sale. The majority of the saleswomen, however, were dealers +in eatables, dried fish, smoked fish, canki -- which is a +preparation of ground corn wrapped up in palm leaves in the shape +of paste -- eggs, fowls, kids, cooked meats in various forms, +stews, boiled pork, fried knobs of meat, and other native +delicacies, besides an abundance of seeds, nuts, and other +vegetable productions.</p> + +<p>After walking for some time through the streets Frank and his +companions returned to the boat, where, half an hour later, the +captain joined them, and, putting off to the <i>Decoy</i>, they +continued the voyage down the coast.</p> + +<p>The next morning they weighed anchor off Addah, a village at +the mouth of the Volta. They whistled for a surf boat, but it was +some time before one put out. When she was launched it was +doubtful whether she would be able to make her way through the +breaking water. The surf was much heavier here than it had been +at Accra, and each wave threw the boat almost perpendicularly +into the air, so that only a few feet of the end of the keel +touched the water. Still she struggled on, although so long was +she in getting through the surf that those on board the ship +thought several times that she must give it up as impracticable. +At last, however, she got through; the paddlers waited for a +minute to recover from their exertions, and then made out to the +<i>Decoy</i>. None of the officers had ever landed here, and +several of them obtained leave to accompany the captain on shore. +Frank was one of the party. After what they had seen of the +difficulty which the boat had in getting out, all looked somewhat +anxiously at the surf as they approached the line where the great +smooth waves rolled over and broke into boiling foam. The +steersman stood upon the seat in the stern, in one hand holding +his oar, in the other his cap. For some time he stood half turned +round, looking attentively seaward, while the boat lay at rest +just outside the line of breakers. Suddenly he waved his cap and +gave a shout. It was answered by the crew. Every man dashed his +paddle into the water. Desperately they rowed, the steersman +encouraging them by wild yells. A gigantic wave rolled in behind +the boat, and looked for a moment as if she would break into it, +but she rose on it just as it turned over, and for an instant was +swept along amidst a cataract of white foam, with the speed of an +arrow. The next wave was a small one, and ere a third reached it +the boat grounded on the sand. A dozen men rushed out into the +water. The passengers threw themselves anyhow on to their backs, +and in a minute were standing perfectly dry upon the beach.</p> + +<p>They learned that Captain Glover's camp was half a mile +distant, and at once set out for it. Upon the way up to the camp +they passed hundreds of negroes, who had arrived in the last day +or two, and had just received their arms. Some were squatted on +the ground cooking and resting themselves. Others were examining +their new weapons, oiling and removing every spot of rust, and +occasionally loading and firing them off. The balls whizzed +through the air in all directions. The most stringent orders had +been given forbidding this dangerous nuisance; but nothing can +repress the love of negroes for firing off guns. There were large +numbers of women among them; these had acted as carriers on their +journey to the camp; for among the coast tribes, as among the +Ashantis, it is the proper thing when the warriors go out on the +warpath, that the women should not permit them to carry anything +except their guns until they approach the neighborhood of the +enemy.</p> + +<p>The party soon arrived at the camp, which consisted of some +bell tents and the little huts of a few hundred natives. This, +indeed, was only the place where the latter were first received +and armed, and they were then sent up the river in the steamboat +belonging to the expedition, to the great camp some thirty miles +higher.</p> + +<p>The expedition consisted only of some seven or eight English +officers. Captain Glover of the royal navy was in command, with +Mr. Goldsworthy and Captain Sartorius as his assistants. There +were four other officers, two doctors, and an officer of +commissariat. This little body had the whole work of drilling and +keeping in order some eight or ten thousand men. They were +generals, colonels, sergeants, quartermasters, storekeepers, and +diplomatists, all at once, and from daybreak until late at night +were incessantly at work. There were at least a dozen petty kings +in camp, all of whom had to be kept in a good temper, and this +was by no means the smallest of Captain Glover's difficulties, as +upon the slightest ground for discontent each of these was ready +at once to march away with his followers. The most reliable +portion of Captain Glover's force were some 250 Houssas, and as +many Yorabas. In addition to all their work with the native +allies, the officers of the expedition had succeeded in drilling +both these bodies until they had obtained a very fair amount of +discipline.</p> + +<p>After strolling through the camp the visitors went to look on +at the distribution of arms and accouterments to a hundred +freshly arrived natives. They were served out with blue smocks, +made of serge, and blue nightcaps, which had the result of +transforming a fine looking body of natives, upright in carriage, +and graceful in their toga-like attire, into a set of awkward +looking, clumsy negroes. A haversack, water bottle, belts, cap +pouch, and ammunition pouch, were also handed to each to their +utter bewilderment, and it was easy to foresee that at the end of +the first day's march the whole of these, to them utterly useless +articles, would be thrown aside. They brightened up, however, +when the guns were delivered to them. The first impulse of each +was to examine his piece carefully, to try its balance by taking +aim at distant objects, then to carefully rub off any little spot +of rust that could be detected, lastly to take out the ramrod and +let it fall into the barrel, to judge by the ring whether it was +clean inside.</p> + +<p>Thence the visitors strolled away to watch a number of Houssas +in hot pursuit of some bullocks, which were to be put on board +the steamers and taken up the river to the great camp. These had +broken loose in the night, and the chase was an exciting one. +Although some fifty or sixty men were engaged in the hunt it took +no less than four hours to capture the requisite number, and +seven Houssas were more or less injured by the charges of the +desperate little animals, which possessed wonderful strength and +endurance, although no larger than moderate sized donkeys. They +were only captured at last by hoops being thrown over their +horns, and even when thrown down required the efforts of five or +six men to tie them. They were finally got to the wharf by two +men each: one went ahead with the rope attached to the animal's +horn, the other kept behind, holding a rope fastened to one of +the hind legs. Every bull made the most determined efforts to get +at the man in front, who kept on at a run, the animal being +checked when it got too close by the man behind pulling at its +hind leg. When it turned to attack him the man in front again +pulled at his rope. So most of them were brought down to the +landing place, and there with great difficulty again thrown down, +tied, and carried bodily on board. Some of them were so +unmanageable that they had to be carried all the way down to the +landing place. If English cattle possessed the strength and +obstinate fury of these little animals, Copenhagen Fields would +have to be removed farther from London, or the entrance swept by +machine guns, for a charge of the cattle would clear the streets +of London.</p> + +<p>After spending an amusing day on shore, the party returned on +board ship. Captain Glover's expedition, although composed of +only seven or eight English officers and costing the country +comparatively nothing, accomplished great things, but its doings +were almost ignored by England. Crossing the river they +completely defeated the native tribes there, who were in alliance +with the Ashantis, after some hard fighting, and thus prevented +an invasion of our territory on that side. In addition to this +they pushed forward into the interior and absolutely arrived at +Coomassie two days after Sir Garnet Wolseley.</p> + +<p>It is true that the attention of the Ashantis was so much +occupied by the advance of the white force that they paid but +little attention to that advancing from the Volta; but none the +less is the credit due to the indomitable perseverance and the +immensity of the work accomplished by Captain Glover and his +officers. Alone and single handed, they overcame all the enormous +difficulties raised by the apathy, indolence, and self importance +of the numerous petty chiefs whose followers constituted the +army, infused something of their own spirit among their +followers, and persuaded them to march without white allies +against the hitherto invincible army of the Ashantis. Not a tithe +of the credit due to them has been given to the officers of this +little force.</p> + +<p>Captain Glover invited his visitors to pass the night on +shore, offering to place a tent at their disposal; but the +mosquitoes are so numerous and troublesome along the swampy shore +of the Volta that the invitations were declined, and the whole +party returned on board the <i>Decoy</i>. Next day the anchor was +hove and the ship's head turned to the west; and two days later, +after a pleasant and uneventful voyage, she was again off Cape +Coast, and Frank, taking leave of his kind entertainers, returned +on shore and reported himself as ready to perform any duty that +might be assigned to him.</p> + +<p>Until the force advanced, he had nothing to do, and spent a +good deal of his time watching the carriers starting with +provisions for the Prah, and the doings of the negroes.</p> + +<p>The order had now been passed by the chiefs at a meeting +called by Sir Garnet, that every able bodied man should work as a +carrier, and while parties of men were sent to the villages round +to fetch in people thence, hunts took place in Cape Coast itself. +Every negro found in the streets was seized by the police; +protestation, indignation, and resistance, were equally in vain. +An arm or the loin cloth was firmly griped, and the victim was +run into the castle yard, amid the laughter of the lookers on, +who consisted, after the first quarter of an hour, of women only. +Then the search began in the houses, the chiefs indicating the +localities in which men were likely to be found. Some police were +set to watch outside while others went in to search. The women +would at once deny that anyone was there, but a door was pretty +sure to be found locked, and upon this being broken open the +fugitive would be found hiding under a pile of clothes or mats. +Sometimes he would leap through the windows, sometimes take to +the flat roof, and as the houses join together in the most +confused way the roofs offered immense facilities for escape, and +most lively chases took place.</p> + +<p>No excuses or pretences availed. A man seen limping painfully +along the street would, after a brief examination of his leg to +see if there was any external mark which would account for the +lameness, be sent at a round trot down the road, amid peals of +laughter from the women and girls looking on.</p> + +<p>The indignation of some of the men thus seized, loaded and +sent up country under a strong escort, was very funny, and their +astonishment in some cases altogether unfeigned. Small +shopkeepers who had never supposed that they would be called upon +to labor for the defense of their freedom and country, found +themselves with a barrel of pork upon their heads and a policeman +with a loaded musket by their side proceeding up country for an +indefinite period. A school teacher was missing, and was found to +have gone up with a case of ammunition. Casual visitors from down +the coast had their stay prolonged.</p> + +<p>Lazy Sierra Leone men, discharged by their masters for +incurable idleness, and living doing nothing, earning nothing, +kept by the kindness of friends and the aid of an occasional +petty theft, found themselves, in spite of the European cut of +their clothes, groaning under the weight of cases of preserved +provisions.</p> + +<p>Everywhere the town was busy and animated, but it was in the +castle courtyard Frank found most amusement. Here of a morning a +thousand negroes would be gathered, most of them men sent down +from Dunquah, forming part of our native allied army. Their +costumes were various but scant, their colors all shades of brown +up to the deepest black. Their faces were all in a grin of +amusement. The noise of talking and laughing was immense. All +were squatted upon the ground, in front of each was a large keg +labelled "pork." Among them moved two or three commissariat +officers in gray uniforms. At the order, "Now then, off with +you," the negroes would rise, take off their cloths, wrap them +into pads, lift the barrels on to their heads, and go off at a +brisk pace; the officer perhaps smartening up the last to leave +with a cut with his stick, which would call forth a scream of +laughter from all the others.</p> + +<p>When all the men had gone, the turn of the women came, and of +these two or three hundred, who had been seated chattering and +laughing against the walls, would now come forward and stoop to +pick up the bags of biscuit laid out for them. Their appearance +was most comical when they stooped to their work, their +prodigious bustles forming an apex. At least two out of every +three had babies seated on these bustles, kept firm against their +backs by the cloth tightly wrapped round the mother's body. But +from the attitudes of the mothers the position was now reversed, +the little black heads hanging downwards upon the dark brown +backs of the women. These were always in the highest state of +good temper, often indulging when not at work in a general dance, +and continually singing, and clapping their hands.</p> + +<p>After the women had been got off three or four hundred boys +and girls, of from eleven to fourteen years old, would start with +small kegs of rice or meat weighing from twenty-five to +thirty-five pounds. These small kegs had upon their first arrival +been a cause of great bewilderment and annoyance to the +commissariat officers, for no man or woman, unless by profession +a juggler, could balance two long narrow barrels on the head. At +last the happy idea struck an officer of the department that the +children of the place might be utilized for the purpose. No +sooner was it known that boys and girls could get half men's +wages for carrying up light loads, than there was a perfect rush +of the juvenile population. Three hundred applied the first +morning, four hundred the next. The glee of the youngsters was +quite exuberant. All were accustomed to carry weights, such as +great jars of water and baskets of yams, far heavier than those +they were now called to take up the country; and the novel +pleasure of earning money and of enjoying an expedition up the +country delighted them immensely.</p> + +<p>Bullocks were now arriving from other parts of the coast, and +although these would not live for any time at Cape Coast, it was +thought they would do so long enough to afford the expedition a +certain quantity of fresh meat; Australian meat, and salt pork, +though valuable in their way, being poor food to men whose +appetites are enfeebled by heat and exhaustion.</p> + +<p>It was not till upwards of six weeks after the fight at Abra +Crampa that the last of the Ashanti army crossed the Prah. When +arriving within a short distance of that river they had been met +by seven thousand fresh troops, who had been sent by the king +with orders that they were not to return until they had driven +the English into the sea. Ammon Quatia's army, however, although +still, from the many reinforcements it had received, nearly +twenty thousand strong, positively refused to do any more +fighting until they had been home and rested, and their tales of +the prowess of the white troops so checked the enthusiasm of the +newcomers, that these decided to return with the rest.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI: THE +ADVANCE TO THE PRAH</h1> + +<p>A large body of natives were now kept at work on the road up +to the Prah. The swamps were made passable by bundles of +brushwood thrown into them, the streams were bridged and huts +erected for the reception of the white troops. These huts were +constructed of bamboo, the beds being made of lattice work of the +same material, and were light and cool.</p> + +<p>On the 9th of December the <i>Himalaya</i> and <i>Tamar</i> +arrived, having on board the 23d Regiment, a battalion of the +Rifle Brigade, a battery of artillery, and a company of +engineers. On the 18th, the <i>Surmatian</i> arrived with the +42d. All these ships were sent off for a cruise, with orders to +return on the 1st of January, when the troops were to be landed. +A large number of officers arrived a few days later to assist in +the organization of the transport corps.</p> + +<p>Colonel Wood and Major Russell were by this time on the Prah +with their native regiments. These were formed principally of +Houssas, Cossoos, and men of other fighting Mahomedan tribes who +had been brought down the coast, together with companies from +Bonny and some of the best of the Fantis. The rest of the Fanti +forces had been disbanded, as being utterly useless for fighting +purposes, and had been turned into carriers.</p> + +<p>On the 26th of December Frank started with the General's staff +for the front. The journey to the Prah was a pleasant one. The +stations had been arranged at easy marches from each other. At +each of these, six huts for the troops, each capable of holding +seventy men, had been built, together with some smaller huts for +officers. Great filters formed of iron tanks with sand and +charcoal at the bottom, the invention of Captain Crease, R.M.A., +stood before the huts, with tubs at which the native bearers +could quench their thirst. Along by the side of the road a single +telegraph wire was supported on bamboos fifteen feet long.</p> + +<p>Passing through Assaiboo they entered the thick bush. The +giant cotton trees had now shed their light feathery foliage, +resembling that of an acacia, and the straight, round, even +trunks looked like the skeletons of some giant or primeval +vegetation rising above the sea of foliage below. White lilies, +pink flowers of a bulbous plant, clusters of yellow acacia +blossoms, occasionally brightened the roadside, and some of the +old village clearings were covered with a low bush bearing a +yellow blossom, and convolvuli white, buff, and pink. The second +night the party slept at Accroful, and the next day marched +through Dunquah. This was a great store station, but the white +troops were not to halt there. It had been a large town, but the +Ashantis had entirely destroyed it, as well as every other +village between the Prah and the coast. Every fruit tree in the +clearing had also been destroyed, and at Dunquah they had even +cut down a great cotton tree which was looked upon as a fetish by +the Fantis. It had taken them seven days' incessant work to +overthrow this giant of the forest.</p> + +<p>The next halting place was Yancoomassie. When approaching +Mansue the character of the forest changed. The undergrowth +disappeared and the high trees grew thick and close. The +plantain, which furnishes an abundant supply of fruit to the +natives and had sustained the Ashanti army during its stay south +of the Prah, before abundant, extended no further. Mansue stood, +like other native villages, on rising ground, but the heavy rains +which still fell every day and the deep swamps around rendered it +a most unhealthy station.</p> + +<p>Beyond Mansue the forest was thick and gloomy. There was +little undergrowth, but a perfect wilderness of climbers +clustered round the trees, twisting in a thousand fantastic +windings, and finally running down to the ground, where they took +fresh root and formed props to the dead tree their embrace had +killed. Not a flower was to be seen, but ferns grew by the +roadside in luxuriance. Butterflies were scarce, but dragonflies +darted along like sparks of fire. The road had the advantage of +being shady and cool, but the heavy rain and traffic had made it +everywhere slippery, and in many places inches deep in mud, while +all the efforts of the engineers and working parties had failed +to overcome the swamps.</p> + +<p>It was a relief to the party when they emerged from the +forests into the little clearings where villages had once stood, +for the gloom and quiet of the great forest weighed upon the +spirits. The monotonous <i>too too</i> of the doves -- not a slow +dreamy cooing like that of the English variety, but a sharp quick +note repeated in endless succession -- alone broke the hush. The +silence, the apparently never ending forest, the monotony of rank +vegetation, the absence of a breath of wind to rustle a leaf, +were most oppressive, and the feeling was not lessened by the +dampness and heaviness of the air, and the malarious exhalation +and smell of decaying vegetation arising from the swamps.</p> + +<p>Sootah was the station beyond Mansue, beyond this Assin and +Barracoo. Beyond Sootah the odors of the forest became much more +unpleasant, for at Fazoo they passed the scene of the conflict +between Colonel Wood's regiment and the retiring Ashantis. In the +forest beyond this were the remains of a great camp of the +enemy's, which extended for miles, and hence to the Prah large +numbers of Ashantis had dropped by the way or had crawled into +the forest to die, smitten by disease or rifle balls.</p> + +<p>There was a general feeling of pleasure as the party emerged +from the forest into the large open camp at Prahsue. This +clearing was twenty acres in extent, and occupied an isthmus +formed by a loop of the river. The 2d West Indians were encamped +here, and huts had been erected under the shade of some lofty +trees for the naval brigade. In the center was a great square. On +one side were the range of huts for the general and his staff. +Two sides of the square were formed by the huts for the white +troops. On the fourth was the hospital, the huts for the +brigadier and his staff, and the post office. Upon the river bank +beyond the square were the tents of the engineers and Rait's +battery of artillery, and the camps of Wood's and Russell's +regiments. The river, some seventy yards wide, ran round three +sides of the camp thirty feet below its level.</p> + +<p>The work which the engineers had accomplished was little less +than marvelous. Eighty miles of road had been cut and cleared, +every stream, however insignificant, had been bridged, and +attempts made to corduroy every swamp. This would have been no +great feat through a soft wood forest with the aid of good +workmen. Here, however, the trees were for the most part of +extremely hard wood, teak and mahogany forming the majority. The +natives had no idea of using an axe. Their only notion of felling +a tree was to squat down beside it and give it little hacking +chops with a large knife or a sabre.</p> + +<p>With such means and such men as these the mere work of cutting +and making the roads and bridging the streams was enormous. But +not only was this done but the stations were all stockaded, and +huts erected for the reception of four hundred and fifty men and +officers, and immense quantities of stores, at each post. Major +Home, commanding the engineers, was the life and soul of the +work, and to him more than any other man was the expedition +indebted for its success. He was nobly seconded by Buckle, Bell, +Mann, Cotton, Skinner, Bates and Jeykyll, officers of his own +corps, and by Hearle of the marines, and Hare of the 22d, +attached to them. Long before daylight his men were off to their +work, long after nightfall they returned utterly exhausted to +camp.</p> + +<p>Upon the 1st of January, 1874, Sir Garnet Wolseley, with his +staff, among whom Frank was now reckoned, reached the Prah. +During the eight days which elapsed before the white troops came +up Frank found much to amuse him. The engineers were at work, +aided by the sailors of the naval brigade, which arrived two days +after the general, in erecting a bridge across the Prah. The +sailors worked, stripped to the waist, in the muddy water of the +river, which was about seven feet deep in the middle. When tired +of watching these he would wander into the camp of the native +regiments, and chat with the men, whose astonishment at finding a +young Englishman able to converse in their language, for the +Fanti and Ashanti dialects differ but little, was unbounded. +Sometimes he would be sent for to headquarters to translate to +Captain Buller, the head of the intelligence department, the +statements of prisoners brought in by the scouts, who, under Lord +Gifford, had penetrated many miles beyond the Prah.</p> + +<p>Everywhere these found dead bodies by the side of the road, +showing the state to which the Ashanti army was reduced in its +retreat. The prisoners brought in were unanimous in saying that +great uneasiness had been produced at Coomassie by the news of +the advance of the British to the Prah. The king had written to +Ammon Quatia, severely blaming him for his conduct of the +campaign, and for the great loss of life among his army.</p> + +<p>All sorts of portents were happening at Coomassie, to the +great disturbance of the mind of the people. Some of those +related singularly resembled those said to have occurred before +the capture of Rome by the Goths. An aerolite had fallen in the +marketplace of Coomassie, and, still more strange, a child was +born which was at once able to converse fluently. This youthful +prodigy was placed in a room by itself, with guards around it to +prevent anyone having converse with the supernatural visitant. In +the morning, however, it was gone, and in its place was found a +bundle of dead leaves. The fetish men having been consulted +declared that this signified that Coomassie itself would +disappear, and would become nothing but a bundle of dead leaves. +This had greatly exercised the credulous there.</p> + +<p>Two days after his arrival Frank went down at sunset to bathe +in the river. He had just reached the bank when he heard a cry +among some white soldiers bathing there, and was just in time to +see one of them pulled under water by an alligator, which had +seized him by the leg. Frank had so often heard what was the best +thing to do that he at once threw off his Norfolk jacket, plunged +into the stream, and swam to the spot where the eddy on the +surface showed that a struggle was going on beneath. The water +was too muddy to see far through it, but Frank speedily came upon +the alligator, and finding its eyes, shoved his thumbs into them. +In an instant the creature relaxed his hold of his prey and made +off, and Frank, seizing the wounded man, swam with him to shore +amid the loud cheers of the sailors. The soldier, who proved to +be a marine, was insensible, and his leg was nearly severed above +the ankle. He soon recovered consciousness, and, being carried to +the camp, his leg was amputated below the knee, and he was soon +afterwards taken down to the coast.</p> + +<p>It had been known that there were alligators in the river, a +young one about a yard long having been captured and tied up like +a dog in the camp, with a string round its neck. But it was +thought that the noise of building the bridge, and the movement +on the banks, would have driven them away. After this incident +bathing was for the most part abandoned.</p> + +<p>The affair made Frank a great favorite in the naval brigade, +and of a night he would, after dinner, generally repair there, +and sit by the great bonfires, which the tars kept up, and listen +to the jovial choruses which they raised around them.</p> + +<p>Two days after the arrival of Sir Garnet, an ambassador came +down from the king with a letter, inquiring indignantly why the +English had attacked the Ashanti troops, and why they had +advanced to the Prah. An opportunity was taken to impress him +with the nature of the English arms. A Gatling gun was placed on +the river bank, and its fire directed upon the surface, and the +fountain of water which rose as the steady stream of bullets +struck its surface astonished, and evidently filled with awe, the +Ashanti ambassador. On the following day this emissary took his +departure for Coomassie with a letter to the king.</p> + +<p>On the 12th the messengers returned with an unsatisfactory +answer to Sir Garnet's letter; they brought with them Mr. Kuhne, +one of the German missionaries. He said that it was reported in +Coomassie that twenty thousand out of the forty thousand Ashantis +who had crossed the Prah had died. It is probable that this was +exaggerated, but Mr. Kuhne had counted two hundred and +seventy-six men carrying boxes containing the bones of chiefs and +leading men. As these would have fared better than the common +herd they would have suffered less from famine and dysentery. The +army had for the most part broken up into small parties and gone +to their villages. The wrath of the king was great, and all the +chiefs who accompanied the army had been fined and otherwise +punished. Mr. Kuhne said that when Sir Garnet's letter arrived, +the question of peace or war had been hotly contested at a +council. The chiefs who had been in the late expedition were +unanimous in deprecating any further attempt to contend with the +white man. Those who had remained at home, and who knew nothing +of the white man's arms, or white man's valor, were for war +rather than surrender.</p> + +<p>Mr. Kuhne was unable to form any opinion what the final +determination would be. The German missionary had no doubt been +restored as a sort of peace offering. He was in a bad state of +health, and as his brother and his brother's wife were among the +captives, the Ashanti monarch calculated that anxiety for the +fate of his relatives would induce him to argue as strongly as +possible in favor of peace.</p> + +<p>Frank left the camp on the Prah some days before the arrival +of the white troops, having moved forward with the scouts under +Lord Gifford, to whom his knowledge of the country and language +proved very valuable. The scouts did their work well. The +Ashantis were in considerable numbers, but fell back gradually +without fighting. Russell's regiment were in support, and they +pressed forward until they neared the foot of the Adansee Hills. +On the 16th Rait's artillery and Wood's regiment were to advance +with two hundred men of the 2d West Indians. The Naval Brigade, +the Rifle Brigade, the 42d, and a hundred men of the 23d would be +up on the Prah on the 17th.</p> + +<p>News came down that fresh portents had happened at Coomassie. +The word signifies the town under the tree, the town being so +called because its founder sat under a broad tree, surrounded by +his warriors, while he laid out the plan of the future town. The +marketplace was situated round the tree, which became the great +fetish tree of the town, under which human sacrifices were +offered. On the 6th, the day upon which Sir Garnet sent his +ultimatum to the king, a bird of ill omen was seen to perch upon +it, and half an hour afterwards a tornado sprang up and the +fetish tree was levelled to the ground. This caused an immense +sensation in Coomassie, which was heightened when Sir Garnet's +letter arrived, and proved to be dated upon the day upon which +the fetish tree had fallen.</p> + +<p>The Adansee Hills are very steep and covered with trees, but +without undergrowth. It had been supposed that the Ashantis would +make their first stand here. Lord Gifford led the way up with the +scouts, Russell's regiment following behind. Frank accompanied +Major Russell. When Gifford neared the crest a priest came +forward with five or six supporters and shouted to him to go +back, for that five thousand men were waiting there to destroy +them. Gifford paused for a moment to allow Russell with his +regiment to come within supporting distance, and then made a rush +with his scouts for the crest. It was found deserted, the priest +and his followers having fled hastily, when they found that +neither curses nor the imaginary force availed to prevent the +British from advancing.</p> + +<p>The Adansee Hills are about six hundred feet high. Between +them and the Prah the country was once thick with towns and +villages inhabited by the Assins. These people, however, were so +harassed by the Ashantis that they were forced to abandon their +country and settle in the British protectorate south of the +Prah.</p> + +<p>Had the Adansee Hills been held by European troops the +position would have been extremely strong. A hill if clear of +trees is of immense advantage to men armed with rifles and +supported by artillery, but to men armed only with guns carrying +slugs a distance of fifty yards, the advantage is not marked, +especially when, as is the case with the Ashantis, they always +fire high. The crest of the hill was very narrow, indeed a mere +saddle, with some eight or ten yards only of level ground between +the steep descents on either side. From this point the scouts +perceived the first town in the territory of the King of Adansee, +one of the five great kings of Ashanti. The scouts and Russell's +regiment halted on the top of the hill, and the next morning the +scouts went out skirmishing towards Queesa. The war drum could be +heard beating in the town, but no opposition was offered. It was +not, however, considered prudent to push beyond the foot of the +hill until more troops came up. The scouts therefore contented +themselves with keeping guard, while for the next four days +Russell's men and the engineers labored incessantly, as they had +done all the way from the Prah, in making the road over the hill +practicable.</p> + +<p>During this time the scouts often pushed up close to Queesa, +and reported that the soldiers and population were fast deserting +the town. On the fifth day it was found to be totally deserted, +and Major Russell moved the headquarters of his regiment down +into it. The white officers were much surprised with the +structure of the huts of this place, which was exactly similar to +that of those of Coomassie, with their red clay, their alcoved +bed places, and their little courts one behind the other. Major +Russell established himself in the chief's palace, which was +exactly like the other houses except that the alcoves were very +lofty, and their roofs supported by pillars. These, with their +red paint, their arabesque adornments, and their quaint +character, gave the courtyard the precise appearance of an +Egyptian temple.</p> + +<p>The question whether the Ashantis would or would not fight was +still eagerly debated. Upon the one hand it was urged that if the +Ashantis had meant to attack us they would have disputed every +foot of the passage through the woods after we had once crossed +the Prah. Had they done so it may be confidently affirmed that we +could never have got to Coomassie. Their policy should have been +to avoid any pitched battle, but to throng the woods on either +side, continually harassing the troops on their march, preventing +the men working on the roads, and rendering it impossible for the +carriers to go along unless protected on either side by lines of +troops. Even when unopposed it was difficult enough to keep the +carriers, who were constantly deserting, but had they been +exposed to continuous attacks there would have been no +possibility of keeping them together.</p> + +<p>It was then a strong argument in favor of peace that we had +been permitted to advance thirty miles into their country without +a shot being fired. Upon the other hand no messengers had been +sent down to meet us, no ambassadors had brought messages from +the king. This silence was ominous; nor were other signs wanting. +At one place a fetish, consisting of a wooden gun and several +wooden daggers all pointing towards us, was placed in the middle +of the road. Several kids had been found buried in calabashes in +the path pierced through and through with stakes; while a short +distance outside Queesa the dead body of a slave killed and +mutilated but a few hours before we entered it was hanging from a +tree. Other fetishes of a more common sort were to be met at +every step, lines of worsted and cotton stretched across the +road, rags hung upon bushes, and other negro trumperies of the +same kind.</p> + +<p>Five days later the Naval Brigade, with Wood's regiment and +Rait's battery, marched into Queesa, and the same afternoon the +whole marched forward to Fomana, the capital of Adansee, situated +half a mile only from Queesa. This was a large town capable of +containing some seven or eight thousand inhabitants. The +architecture was similar to that of Queesa, but the king's palace +was a large structure covering a considerable extent of ground. +Here were the apartments of the king himself, of his wives, the +fetish room, and the room for execution, still smelling horribly +of the blood with which the floor and walls were sprinkled. The +first and largest court of the palace had really an imposing +effect. It was some thirty feet square with an apartment or +alcove on each side. The roofs of these alcoves were supported by +columns about twenty-five feet high. As in all the buildings the +lower parts were of red clay, the upper of white, all being +covered with deep arabesque patterns.</p> + +<p>Fomana was one of the most pleasant stations which the troops +had reached since leaving the coast. It lay high above the sea, +and the temperature was considerably lower than that of the +stations south of the hills. A nice breeze sprung up each day +about noon. The nights were comparatively free from fog, and the +town itself stood upon rising ground resembling in form an +inverted saucer. The streets were very wide, with large trees at +intervals every twenty or thirty yards along the middle of the +road.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII: THE +BATTLE OF AMOAFUL</h1> + +<p>Two days after the arrival at Fomana the remaining members of +the German mission, two males, a female, and two children, were +sent in by the king with a letter containing many assurances of +his desire for peace, but making no mention of the stipulations +which Sir Garnet Wolseley had laid down. The advance was +therefore to continue. The rest of the troops came up, and on the +25th Russell's regiment advanced to Dompiassee, Wood's regiment +and Rait's battery joining him the next day. That afternoon the +first blood north of the Prah was shed. It being known that a +body of the enemy were collecting at a village a little off the +road the force moved against them. Lord Gifford led the way, as +usual, with his scouts. The enemy opened fire as soon as the +scouts appeared; but these, with the Houssa company of Russell's +regiment, rushed impetuously into the village, and the Ashantis +at once bolted. Two of them were killed and five taken +prisoners.</p> + +<p>The next halting places of the advance troops were Kiang Bossu +and Ditchiassie. It was known now that Ammon Quatia was lying +with the Ashanti army at Amoaful, but five miles away, and +ambassadors arrived from the king finally declining to accept the +terms of peace. Russell's and Wood's regiments marched forward to +Quarman, within half a mile of the enemy's outposts. The white +troops came on to Insafoo, three miles behind. Quarman was +stockaded to resist an attack. Gordon with the Houssa company lay +a quarter of a mile in advance of the village, Gifford with his +scouts close to the edge of the wood. Major Home with the +engineers cut a wide path for the advance of the troops to within +a hundred yards of the village which the enemy held.</p> + +<p>Every one knew that the great battle of the war would be +fought next morning. About half past seven on the morning of the +81st of January the 42d Regiment entered the village of Quarman, +and marched through without a halt. Then came Rait's artillery, +followed by the company of the 23d and by the Naval Brigade. The +plan of operations was as follows. The 42d Regiment would form +the main attacking force. They were to drive the enemy's scouts +out of Agamassie, the village in front, and were then to move +straight on, extending to the right and left, and, if possible, +advance in a skirmishing line through the bush. Rait's two little +guns were to be in their center moving upon the road itself. The +right column, consisting of half the Naval Brigade, with Wood's +regiment, now reduced by leaving garrisons at various posts along +the road to three companies, was to cut a path out to the right +and then to turn parallel with the main road, so that the head of +the column should touch the right of the skirmishing line of the +42d. The left column, consisting of the other half of the Naval +Brigade with the four companies of Russell's regiment, was to +proceed in similar fashion on the left. These columns would +therefore form two sides of a hollow square, protecting the 42d +from any of those flanking movements of which the Ashantis are so +fond. The company of the 23d was to proceed with the headquarter +staff. The Rifle Brigade were held in reserve.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning Major Home cut the road to within thirty +yards of the village of Agamassie, and ascertained by listening +to the voices that there were not more than a score or so of men +in the village. Gifford had made a circuit in the woods, and had +ascertained that the Ashanti army was encamped on rising ground +across a stream behind the village.</p> + +<p>Frank had been requested by Sir Garnet Wolseley to accompany +the 42d, as his knowledge of Ashanti tactics might be of value, +and he might be able by the shouts of the Ashantis to understand +the orders issued to them. The head of the 42d Regiment +experienced no opposition whatever until they issued from the +bush into the little clearing surrounding the village, which +consisted only of four or five houses. The Ashantis discharged +their muskets hastily as the first white men showed themselves, +but the fire of the leading files of the column quickly cleared +them away. The 42d pushed on through the village, and then +forming in skirmishing line, advanced. For the first two or three +hundred yards they encountered no serious opposition, and they +were then received by a tremendous fire from an unseen foe in +front. The left column had not gone a hundred yards before they +too came under fire. Captain Buckle of the Engineers, who was +with the Engineer laborers occupied in cutting the path ahead of +the advancing column, was shot through the heart. A similar +opposition was experienced by the right.</p> + +<p>The roar of the fire was tremendous, so heavy indeed that all +sound of individual reports was lost, and the noise was one +hoarse hissing roar. Even the crack of Rait's guns was lost in +the general uproar, but the occasional rush of a rocket, of which +two troughs with parties of Rait's men accompanied each wing, was +distinctly audible.</p> + +<p>The 42d could for a time make scarcely any way, and the +flanking columns were also brought to a stand. Owing to the +extreme thickness of the wood and their ignorance of the nature +of the ground these columns were unable to keep in their proper +position, and diverged considerably. The Ashantis, however, made +no effort to penetrate between them and the 42d. For an hour this +state of things continued. The company of the 23d advanced along +the main road to help to clear the bush, where the Ashantis still +fought stubbornly not two hundred yards from the village, while +two companies of the Rifle Brigade were sent up the left hand +road to keep touch with the rear of Russell's regiment.</p> + +<p>When the fight commenced in earnest, and the 42d were brought +to a stand by the enemy, Frank lay down with the soldiers. Not a +foe could be seen, but the fire of the enemy broke out +incessantly from the bushes some twenty yards ahead. The air +above was literally alive with slugs and a perfect shower of +leaves continued to fall upon the path. So bewilderingly dense +was the bush that the men soon lost all idea of the points of the +compass, and fired in any direction from which the enemy's shots +came. Thus it happened that the sailors sent in complaints to the +general that the 23d and 42d were firing at them, while the 42d +and 23d made the same complaint against the Naval Brigade. Sir +Garnet, who had taken up his headquarters at the village, sent +out repeated instructions to the commanding officers to warn +their men to avoid this error.</p> + +<p>For two hours the fight went on. Then the column to the left +found that the Ashantis in front of them had fallen back; they +had, however, altogether lost touch of the 42d. They were +accordingly ordered to cut a road to the northeast until they +came in contact with them. In doing so they came upon a partial +clearing, where a sharp opposition was experienced. The Houssas +carried the open ground at a rush, but the enemy, as usual, +opened a heavy fire from the edge of the bush. The Houssas were +recalled, and fire was opened with the rockets, which soon drove +the Ashantis back, and the cutting of the path was proceeded +with.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the 42d was having a hard time of it. They had +fought their way to the edge of the swamp, beyond which lay an +immense Ashanti camp, and here the fire was so tremendously heavy +that the advance was again completely arrested. Not an enemy was +to be seen, but from every bush of the opposite side puffs of +smoke came thick and fast, and a perfect rain of slugs swept over +the ground on which they were lying. Here Rait's gun, for he was +only able from the narrowness of the path to bring one into +position, did splendid service. Advancing boldly in front of the +line of the 42d, ably assisted by Lieutenant Saunders, he poured +round after round of grape into the enemy until their fire +slackened a little, and the 42d, leaping to their feet, struggled +across the swamp, which was over knee deep. Step by step they won +their way through the camp and up the hill. Everywhere the dead +Ashantis lay in heaps, attesting the terrible effect of the +Snider fire and the determination with which they had fought.</p> + +<p>Beyond the camp, upon the hills the bush was thicker than +ever, and here, where it was impossible for the white soldiers to +skirmish through the bush, the Ashantis made a last desperate +stand. The narrow lane up which alone the troops could pass was +torn as if by hail with the shower of slugs, while a large tree +which stood nearly in the center of the path and caused it +slightly to swerve, afforded some shelter to them from the storm +of bullets which the 42d sent back in return. Here Rait brought +his gun up again to the front and cleared the lane. The bush was +too thick even for the Ashantis. The gun stopped firing and with +a rush the regiment went up the narrow path and out into the open +clearing beyond. For a short time the Ashantis kept up a fire +from the houses, but the 42d soon drove them out, and a single +shot from the gun down the wide street which divided the town +into two portions, bursting in the midst of a group at the +further end, killed eight and drove all further idea of +resistance in that direction from their minds.</p> + +<p>It was now about twelve o'clock; but although the Ashantis had +lost their camp and village, and had suffered terribly, they were +not yet finally beaten. They had moved the principal part of the +forces which had been engaged upon our left round to the right, +were pressing hard upon the column there and the 23d, and were +cutting in between the latter and the 42d, when a fortunate +accident enabled us to meet this attack more effectively. The +left column had cut its path rather too much to the east, and +came into the road between the 42d and 23d, forming a connecting +link between them; while the right column, having at last cut +away the whole of the brush wood in which the Ashantis had so +long wedged themselves between them and the road, were now in +direct communication with the 23d. They had been reinforced by a +company of the Rifle Brigade. Our front, therefore, was now +entirely changed, and faced east instead of north. The Ashantis +in vain tried to break the line, but desisted from their +efforts.</p> + +<p>The firing died away, and it was thought that the battle was +over, when at about a quarter to one a tremendous fire broke out +from the rear of the column, showing that the Ashantis were +making a last and desperate effort to turn our flank, and to +retake the village from which we had driven them at eight in the +morning. So near was the rear of the column to the village that +the slugs fell fast into the reserve who were stationed there. +Three companies of the Rifles were sent up to strengthen the +line, and for three quarters of an hour the roar of the musketry +was as heavy and continuous as it had been at any time during the +day. Then, as the enemy's fire slackened, Sir Garnet gave the +word for the line to advance, sweeping round from the rear so as +to drive the enemy northwards before them.</p> + +<p>The movement was admirably executed. The Bonny men of Wood's +regiment, who had fought silently and steadily all the time that +they had been on the defensive, now raised their shrill war cry, +and slinging their rifles and drawing their swords -- their +favorite weapons -- dashed forward like so many panthers let +loose. By their side, skirmishing as quietly and steadily as if +on parade, the men of the Rifle Brigade searched every bush with +their bullets, and in five minutes from the commencement of the +advance the Ashantis were in full and final retreat. The battle +ended at about half past one, having lasted five hours and a +half.</p> + +<p>The Ashantis were supposed to have had from fifteen to twenty +thousand men in the field. What their loss was could not +accurately be calculated, as they carry off their dead as fast as +they fall; but where rushes were made by our troops, as they had +not time to do this, they lay everywhere thick on the ground. By +the most moderate computation they must have lost over two +thousand. Ammon Quatia himself was killed, as well as Aboo, one +of the six great tributary kings. The body of the king's chief +executioner was also pointed out by some of the prisoners. They +fought with extraordinary pluck and resolution, as was shown by +the fact that although wretchedly armed, for upwards of five +hours they resisted the attack of troops armed with breech +loaders, and supported by guns and rockets. Their position was a +good one, and they had, no doubt, calculated upon coming down +upon us from the rising ground, either on the flank or rear, with +advantage, should we succeed in pushing forward.</p> + +<p>Upon our side the loss in killed was very slight, not +exceeding eight or ten. The 42d out of a total of four hundred +and fifty had a hundred and four wounded, of whom eight were +officers. In the right hand column, Colonel Wood, six naval +officers, and twenty men of the Naval Brigade, with many of the +native regiment, were wounded. Of the sixty engineer laborers +twenty were wounded; while of their five officers Captain Buckle +was killed, Major Home and Lieutenant Hare wounded, together with +several of their white soldiers. Altogether our casualties +exceeded two hundred and fifty. Fortunately but a small +proportion of the wounds were serious.</p> + +<p>While the battle was raging at one o'clock Quarman was +attacked by a strong body of Ashantis coming from the west, +probably forming part of Essarman Quatia's force. Captain +Burnett, who was in command, having under him Lieutenant Jones of +the 2d West Indian regiment, and thirty-five men of that corps +and a few natives, conducted the defense, and was well seconded +by his men. Although the attacking force was very greatly +superior, and took the little garrison by surprise -- for they +did not expect, while a great battle was raging within a distance +of a mile, that the Ashantis would be able to spare a force to +attack a detached party -- the garrison defended itself with +great gallantry and complete success, not only beating off the +enemy whenever they attacked, but sallying out and assisting to +bring in a convoy of stores which was close at hand when the +attack began.</p> + +<p>Amoaful was a town capable of containing two or three thousand +inhabitants. Great quantities of grain and coarse flour were +found here. These were done up in bundles of dried plantain +leaves, each bundle weighing from five to fifteen pounds. This +capture was of great service to the commissariat, as it afforded +an abundant supply of excellent food for the carriers. The troops +were in high spirits that night. They had won a battle fought +under extreme difficulty, and that with a minimum of loss in +killed. There were therefore no sad recollections to damp the +pleasure of victory.</p> + +<p>Frank had been twice struck with slugs, but in neither case +had these penetrated deeply, and he was able to sit round the +camp fire and to enjoy his glass of rum and water. Two kegs of +rum were the only stores which that night came up from the rear, +thanks to the consideration of a commissariat officer, to whom +the soldiers felt extremely grateful for providing them with an +invigorating drink after their long and fatiguing labors of the +day.</p> + +<p>At about a mile and a quarter from Amoaful lay the town of +Bequah, the capital of one of the most powerful of the Ashanti +kings. Here a considerable force was known to be collected before +the battle, and here many of the fugitives were believed to have +rallied. It would have been impossible to advance and leave this +hostile camp so close to a station in our rear. Lord Gifford was +therefore sent out at daybreak to reconnoiter it. He approached +it closely, when twenty men sprang out from the bush and fired at +him, fortunately without hitting him. When he returned and made +his report the general determined to attack and burn the place, +and orders were issued for a column, consisting of Russell's +regiment, Rait's battery, and the Naval Brigade, supported by the +42d and commanded by Colonel M'Leod, to start at one o'clock.</p> + +<p>The march was not opposed through the bush, but as the scouts +entered the clearing a heavy fire was opened upon them. Lord +Gifford and almost the whole of his party were more or less +severely wounded when the sailors rushed in to their support. For +a short time the enemy kept up a heavy fire from the houses, and +then fled, leaving about forty of their number dead on the +ground. The town, which was about twice the size of Fomana, was +burned, and the column returned to the camp.</p> + +<p>A great portion of the town was destroyed and the place +stockaded, and then all was in readiness for the advance upon +Coomassie. Amoaful was to be left in charge of the 2d West +Indians, who had now come up. Each man received four days' +rations and each regiment was to take charge of its own provision +and baggage. The advance started at seven in the morning, +Russell's regiment, Rait's battery, and the Rifle Brigade. Then +came the headquarter staff followed by the 42d and Naval Brigade. +The hammocks and rations went on with the troops. The rest of the +baggage remained behind. The road differed in nothing from that +which had so long been followed. It bore everywhere marks of the +retreating enemy, in provisions and other articles scattered +about, in occasional dark stains, and in its plants and grass +trampled into the ground, six feet in breadth, showing that the +usual negro way of walking in single file had been abandoned. The +rate of progression was slow, as the country had to be thoroughly +searched by the advance. There were, too, many streams to be +crossed, each causing a delay.</p> + +<p>At one of the villages there was a large camp, where about a +thousand men were assembled to make a stand. The defense was, +however, feeble in the extreme, and it was evident that they were +greatly demoralized by their defeat on the 1st. Russell's +regiment carried the place at a rush, the enemy firing wildly +altogether beyond the range of their weapons. Several were killed +and the rest took precipitately to the bush. A few shots were +fired at other places, but no real resistance took place. On +reaching the village of Agamemmu, after having taken six hours in +getting over as many miles, the column halted, and orders were +sent for the baggage to come on from Amoaful. The troops were set +to work to cut the bush round the village, which was a very small +one, and a breastwork was thrown up round it. The troops were in +their little <i>tentes d'abri</i> packed as closely together as +possible outside the houses, but within the stockade. The +carriers slept in the street of the village, where so thickly did +they lie that it was impossible for anyone to make his way along +without treading upon them.</p> + +<p>News came in that night that Captain Butler with the Western +Akims had arrived within two days' march of Amoaful, but that +without the slightest reason the king and the whole of his army +had left Captain Butler and retired suddenly to the Prah. At the +same time they heard that the army of the Wassaws under Captain +Dalrymple had also broken up without having come in contact with +the enemy. From the rear also unpleasant news came up. The attack +upon Quarman had been no isolated event. Fomana had also been +attacked, but the garrison there had, after some hours' fighting, +repulsed the enemy. Several convoys had been assaulted, and the +whole road down to the Prah was unsafe. The next morning, after +waiting till a large convoy came safely in, the column marched at +nine o'clock, Gifford's scouts, Russell's regiment, and Rait's +battery being as usual in front. The resistance increased with +every step, and the head of the column was constantly engaged. +Several villages were taken by Russell's regiment, who, full of +confidence in themselves and their officers, carried them with a +rush in capital style. It was but six miles to the Dab, but the +ground was swampy and the road intersected by many streams. +Consequently it was not until after being eight hours on the road +that the head of the column reached the river, three hours later +before the whole of the troops and their baggage were encamped +there.</p> + +<h1 align="CENTER"><a name="CHAPTER_XXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII: THE +CAPTURE OF COOMASSIE</h1> + +<p>Upon the afternoon of the arrival of the English column upon +the Dah the king made another attempt to arrest their progress, +with a view no doubt of bringing up fresh reinforcements. A flag +of truce came in with a letter to the effect that our rapid +advance had much disconcerted him, which was no doubt true, and +that he had not been able to make arrangements for the payments +claimed; that he would send in hostages, but that most of those +whom the general had asked for were away, and that he could not +agree to give the queen mother or the heir apparent. These were, +of course, the principal hostages, indeed the only ones who would +be of any real value. The answer was accordingly sent back, that +unless these personages arrived before daybreak the next morning +we should force our way into Coomassie.</p> + +<p>The Dah is a river about fifteen yards wide and three feet +deep at the deepest place. The Engineers set to work to bridge it +directly they arrived, Russell's regiment at once crossing the +river and bivouacking on the opposite bank.</p> + +<p>It was unfortunate that this, the first night upon which the +troops had been unprovided with tents, should have turned out +tremendously wet. The thunder roared, the lightning flashed, and +the rain came down incessantly. Tired as the troops were there +were few who slept, and there was a general feeling of +satisfaction when the morning broke and the last day of the march +began.</p> + +<p>The rain held up a little before daybreak, and the sky was +clear when at six o'clock Wood's Bonny men, who had come up by a +forced march the evening before, led the advance. Lieutenant +Saunders with one of Rait's guns came next. The Rifles followed +in support.</p> + +<p>Before the Bonny men had gone half a mile they were hotly +engaged, and the combat was for two hours a repetition of that of +Amoaful. Saunders advanced again and again to the front with his +gun, and with a few rounds of grape cleared the sides of the path +of the enemy. At last, however, the Bonny men would advance no +farther, and Lieutenant Byre, the adjutant of Wood's regiment, +was mortally wounded.</p> + +<p>Lieutenant Saunders sent back to say it was impossible for him +to get on farther unless supported by white troops. The Rifles +were then sent forward to take the Bonny men's place, and slowly, +very slowly, the advance was continued until the clearing round a +village could be seen fifty yards away. Then the Rifles gave a +cheer and with a sudden rush swept through to the open and +carried the village without a check. In the meantime the whole +column had been following in the rear as the Rifles advanced, and +were hotly engaged in repelling a series of flank attacks on the +part of the enemy. These attacks were gallantly persevered in by +the Ashantis, who at times approached in such masses that the +whole bush swayed and moved as they pushed forward.</p> + +<p>Their loss must have been extremely large, for our men lined +the road and kept up a tremendous Snider fire upon them at a +short distance. Our casualties were slight. The road, like almost +all roads in the country, was sunk two feet in the center below +the level of the surrounding ground, consequently the men were +lying in shelter as behind a breastwork, while they kept up their +tremendous fire upon the foe.</p> + +<p>The village once gained, the leading troops were thrown out in +a circle round it, and the order was given to pass the baggage +from the rear to the village. The operation was carried out in +safety, the path being protected by the troops lying in a line +along it. The baggage once in, the troops closed up to the +village, the disappointed foe continuing a series of desperate +attacks upon their rear. These assaults were kept up even after +all had reached the cleared space of the village, the enemy's war +horn sounding and the men making the woods re-echo with their +wild war cry. The Naval Brigade at one time inflicted great +slaughter upon the enemy by remaining perfectly quiet until the +Ashantis, thinking they had retired, advanced full of confidence, +cheering, when a tremendous fire almost swept them away.</p> + +<p>It was six hours from the time at which the advance began +before the rear guard entered the village, and as but a mile and +a half had been traversed and Coomassie was still six miles away, +it was evident that if the Ashantis continued to fight with the +same desperation, and if the baggage had to be carried on step by +step from village to village, the force would not get halfway on +to Coomassie by nightfall.</p> + +<p>The instant the baggage was all in, preparations were made for +a fresh advance. Rait's guns, as usual, opened to clear the way, +and the 42d this time led the advance. The enemy's fire was very +heavy and the Highlanders at first advanced but slowly, their +wounded straggling back in quick succession into the village. +After twenty minutes' work, however, they had pushed back the +enemy beyond the brow of the hill, and from this point they +advanced with great rapidity, dashing forward at times at the +double, until the foe, scared by the sudden onslaught, gave way +altogether and literally fled at the top of their speed.</p> + +<p>War drums and horns, chiefs' stools and umbrellas, littered +the next village and told how sudden and complete had been the +stampede. As the 42d advanced troops were from time to time sent +forward until a despatch came in from Sir A. Alison saying that +all the villages save the last were taken, that opposition had +ceased, and that the enemy were in complete rout. Up to this time +the attack of the enemy upon the rear of the village had +continued with unabated vigor, and shot and slug continually fell +in the place itself. The news from the front was soon known and +was hailed with a cheer which went right round the line of +defense, and, whether scared by its note of triumph or because +they too had received the news, the efforts of the enemy ceased +at once, and scarcely another shot was fired.</p> + +<p>At half past three the baggage was sent forward and the +headquarter staff and Rifle Brigade followed it. There was no +further check. The 42d and several companies of the Rifle Brigade +entered Coomassie without another shot being fired in its +defense. Sir Garnet Wolseley soon after arrived, and taking off +his hat called for three cheers for the Queen, which was +responded to with a heartiness and vigor which must have +astonished the Ashantis. These were still in considerable numbers +in the town, having been told by the king that peace was or would +be made. They seemed in no way alarmed, but watched, as amused +and interested spectators, the proceedings of the white +troops.</p> + +<p>The first thing to be done was to disarm those who had guns, +and this seemed to scare the others, for in a short time the town +was almost entirely deserted. It was now fast getting dark, and +the troops bivouacked in the marketplace, which had so often been +the scene of human sacrifices on a large scale.</p> + +<p>Their day's work had, indeed, been a heavy one. They had been +twelve hours on the road without rest or time to cook food. Water +was very scarce, no really drinkable water having been met with +during the day. In addition to this they had undergone the +excitement of a long and obstinate fight with an enemy concealed +in the bush, after work of almost equal severity upon the day +before, and had passed a sleepless night in a tropical rainstorm, +yet with the exception of a few fever stricken men not a single +soldier fell out from his place in the ranks.</p> + +<p>Nor was the first night in Coomassie destined to be a quiet +one. Soon after two o'clock a fire broke out in one of the +largest of the collections of huts, which was soon in a blaze +from end to end. The engineers pulled down the huts on either +side and with great difficulty prevented the flames from +spreading. These fires were the result of carriers and others +plundering, and one man, a policeman, caught with loot upon him, +was forthwith hung from a tree. Several others were flogged, and +after some hours' excitement the place quieted down. Sir Garnet +was greatly vexed at the occurrence, as he had the evening before +sent a messenger to the king asking him to come in and make +peace, and promising to spare the town if he did so.</p> + +<p>Although Coomassie was well known to Frank he was still +ignorant of the character of the interior of the chiefs' houses, +and the next day he wandered about with almost as much curiosity +as the soldiers themselves. The interiors even of the palaces of +the chiefs showed that the Ashantis can have no idea of what we +call comfort. The houses were filled with dust and litter, and +this could not be accounted for solely by the bustle and hurry of +picking out the things worth carrying away prior to the hurried +evacuation of the place. From the roofs hung masses of spiders' +web, thick with dust, while sweeping a place out before occupying +it brought down an accumulation of dust which must have been the +result of years of neglect. The principal apartments were +lumbered up with drums, great umbrellas, and other paraphernalia +of processions, such as horns, state chairs, wooden maces, etc. +Before the door of each house stood a tree, at the foot of which +were placed little idols, calabashes, bits of china, bones, and +an extraordinary jumble of strange odds and ends of every kind, +all of which were looked upon as fetish. Over the doors and +alcoves were suspended a variety of charms, old stone axes and +arrow tips, nuts, gourds, amulets, beads, and other trumpery +articles.</p> + +<p>The palace was in all respects exactly as the king had left +it. The royal bed and couch were in their places, the royal +chairs occupied their usual raised position. Only, curiously +enough, all had been turned round and over. The storerooms +upstairs were untouched, and here was found an infinite variety +of articles, for the most part mere rubbish, but many interesting +and valuable: silver plate, gold masks, gold cups, clocks, glass, +china, pillows, guns, cloth, caskets, and cabinets; an olla +podrida, which resembled the contents of a sale room.</p> + +<p>In many of the native apartments of the palace were signs that +human sacrifice had been carried on to the last minute. Several +stools were found covered with thick coatings of recently shed +blood, and a horrible smell of gore pervaded the whole palace, +and, indeed, the whole town. The palace was full of fetish +objects just as trumpery and meaningless as those in the humblest +cottages. The king's private sitting room was, like the rest, an +open court with a tree growing in it. This tree was covered with +fetish objects, and thickly hung with spiders' webs. At each end +was a small but deep alcove with a royal chair, so that the +monarch could always sit on the shady side.</p> + +<p>Along each side of the little court ran a sort of verandah, +beneath which was an immense assortment of little idols and +fetishes of all kinds.</p> + +<p>From one of the verandahs a door opened into the king's +bedroom, which was about ten feet by eight. It was very dark, +being lighted only by a small window about a foot square, opening +into the women's apartments. At one end was the royal couch, a +raised bedstead with curtains, and upon a ledge by the near side +(that is to say the king had to step over the ledge to get into +bed) were a number of pistols and other weapons, among them an +English general's sword, bearing the inscription, "From Queen +Victoria to the King of Ashanti." This sword was presented to the +predecessor of King Coffee. Upon the floor at the end opposite +the bed was a couch upon which the king could sit and talk with +his wives through the little window.</p> + +<p>In the women's apartments all sorts of stuffs, some of +European, some of native manufacture, were found scattered about +in the wildest confusion. The terror and horror of the four or +five hundred ladies, when they found that their husband was about +to abandon his palace and that they would have no time to remove +their treasured finery, can be well imagined.</p> + +<p>In almost every apartment and yard of the palace were very +slightly raised mounds, some no larger than a plate, others two +or even three feet long. These were whitewashed and presented a +strong contrast to the general red of the ground and lower walls. +These patches marked the places of graves. The whole palace, in +fact, appeared to be little better than a cemetery and a +slaughterhouse in one. A guard was placed over the palace, and +here, as elsewhere through the town, looting was strictly +forbidden.</p> + +<p>All day the general expected the arrival of the king, who had +sent a messenger to say he would be in early. At two o'clock a +tremendous rainstorm broke over the town, lasting for three +hours. In the evening it became evident that he was again +deceiving us, and orders were issued that the troops, in the +morning, should push on another three miles to the tombs of the +kings, where he was said to be staying. Later on, however, the +news came that the king had gone right away into the interior, +and as another storm was coming up it became evident that the +rainy season was setting in in earnest. The determination was +therefore come to, to burn the town and to start for the coast +next morning.</p> + +<p>All night Major Home with a party of Engineers was at work +mining the palace and preparing it for explosion, while a prize +committee were engaged in selecting and packing everything which +they considered worth taking down to the coast. The news of the +change of plan, however, had not got abroad, and the troops +paraded next morning under the belief that they were about to +march still farther up the country. When it became known that +they were bound for the coast there was a general brightening of +faces, and a buzz of satisfaction ran down the ranks. It was true +that it was believed that a large amount of treasure was +collected at the kings' tombs, and the prize money would not have +been unwelcome, still the men felt that their powers were rapidly +becoming exhausted. The hope of a fight with the foe and of the +capture of Coomassie had kept them up upon the march, but now +that this had been done the usual collapse after great exertion +followed. Every hour added to the number of fever stricken men +who would have to be carried down to the coast, and each man, as +he saw his comrades fall out from the ranks, felt that his own +turn might come next.</p> + +<p>At six o'clock in the morning the advanced guard of the +baggage began to move out of the town. The main body was off by +seven. The 42d remained as rearguard to cover the Engineers and +burning party.</p> + +<p>Frank stayed behind to see the destruction of the town. A +hundred engineer laborers were supplied with palm leaf torches, +and in spite of the outer coats of thatch being saturated by the +tremendous rains, the flames soon spread. Volumes of black smoke +poured up, and soon a huge pile of smoke resting over the town +told the Ashantis of the destruction of their blood stained +capital. The palace was blown up, and when the Engineers and 42d +marched out from the town scarce a house remained untouched by +the flames.</p> + +<p>The troops had proceeded but a short distance before they had +reason to congratulate themselves on their retreat before the +rains began in earnest, and to rejoice over the fact that the +thunderstorms did not set in three days earlier than they did. +The marsh round the town had increased a foot in depth, while the +next stream, before a rivulet two feet and a half deep, had now +swollen its banks for a hundred and fifty yards on either side, +with over five feet and a half of water in the old channel.</p> + +<p>Across this channel the Engineers had with much difficulty +thrown a tree, over which the white troops passed, while the +native carriers had to wade across. It was laughable to see only +the eyes of the taller men above the water, while the shorter +disappeared altogether, nothing being seen but the boxes they +carried. Fortunately the deep part was only three or four yards +wide. Thus the carriers by taking a long breath on arriving at +the edge of the original channel were able to struggle +across.</p> + +<p>This caused a terrible delay, and a still greater one occurred +at the Dah. Here the water was more than two feet above the +bridge which the Engineers had made on the passage up. The river +was as deep as the previous one had been, and the carriers +therefore waded as before; but the deep part was wider, so wide, +indeed, that it was impossible for the shorter men to keep under +water long enough to carry their burdens across. The tall men +therefore crossed and recrossed with the burdens, the short men +swimming over.</p> + +<p>The passage across the bridge too was slow and tedious in the +extreme. Some of the cross planks had been swept away, and each +man had to feel every step of his way over. So tedious was the +work that at five in the afternoon it became evident that it +would be impossible for all the white troops to get across -- a +process at once slow and dangerous -- before nightfall. The river +was still rising, and it was a matter of importance that none +should be left upon the other side at night, as the Ashantis +might, for anything they could tell, be gathering in force in the +rear. Consequently Sir Archibald Alison gave the order for the +white troops to strip and to wade across taking only their +helmets and guns. The clothes were made up in bundles and carried +over by natives swimming, while others took their places below in +case any of the men should be carried off their feet by the +stream. All passed over without any accident.</p> + +<p>One result, however, was a laughable incident next morning, an +incident which, it may be safely asserted, never before occurred +in the British army. It was quite dark before the last party were +over, and the natives collecting the clothes did not notice those +of one of the men who had undressed at the foot of a tree. +Consequently he had to pass the night, a very wet one, in a +blanket, and absolutely paraded with his regiment in the morning +in nothing but a helmet and rifle. The incident caused immense +laughter, and a native swimming across the river found and +brought back his clothes.</p> + +<p>As the journeys were necessarily slow and tedious, owing to +the quantity of baggage and sick being carried down, Frank now +determined to push straight down to the coast, and, bidding +goodbye to Sir Garnet and the many friends he had made during the +expedition, he took his place for the first time in the hammock, +which with its bearers had accompanied him from Cape Coast, and +started for the sea. There was some risk as far as the Prah, for +straggling bodies of the enemy frequently intercepted the +convoys. Frank, however, met with no obstacle, and in ten days +after leaving the army reached Cape Coast.</p> + +<p>Ostik implored his master to take him with him across the sea; +but Frank pointed out to him that he would not be happy long in +England, where the customs were so different from his own, and +where in winter he would feel the cold terribly. Ostik yielded to +the arguments, and having earned enough to purchase for years the +small comforts and luxuries dear to the negro heart, he agreed to +start for the Gaboon immediately Frank left for England.</p> + +<p>On his first arrival at Cape Coast he had to his great +satisfaction found that the Houssas who had escaped from +Coomassie had succeeded in reaching the coast in safety, and that +having obtained their pay from the agent they had sailed for +their homes.</p> + +<p>Three days after Frank's arrival at Cape Coast the mail +steamer came along, and he took passage for England. Very strange +indeed did it feel to him when he set foot in Liverpool. Nearly +two years and a half had elapsed since he had sailed, and he had +gone through adventures sufficient for a lifetime. He was but +eighteen years old now, but he had been so long accustomed to do +man's work that he felt far older than he was. The next day on +arriving in town he put up at the Charing Cross Hotel and then +sallied out to see his friends.</p> + +<p>He determined to go first of all to visit the porter who had +been the earliest friend he had made in London, and then to drive +to Ruthven's, where he was sure of a hearty welcome. He had +written several times, since it had been possible for him to send +letters, to his various friends, first of all to his sister, and +the doctor, to Ruthven, to the porter, and to the old naturalist. +He drove to London Bridge Station, and there learned that the +porter had been for a week absent from duty, having strained his +back in lifting a heavy trunk. He therefore drove to Ratcliff +Highway. The shop was closed, but his knock brought the +naturalist to the door.</p> + +<p>"What can I do for you, sir?" he asked civilly.</p> + +<p>"Well, in the first place, you can shake me by the hand."</p> + +<p>The old man started at the voice.</p> + +<p>"Why, 'tis Frank!" he exclaimed, "grown and sunburnt out of +all recollection. My dear boy, I am glad indeed to see you. Come +in, come in; John is inside."</p> + +<p>Frank received another hearty greeting, and sat for a couple +of hours chatting over his adventures. He found that had he +arrived a fortnight later he would not have found either of his +friends. The porter was in a week about to be married again to a +widow who kept a small shop and was in comfortable circumstances. +The naturalist had sold the business, and was going down into the +country to live with a sister there.</p> + +<p>After leaving them Frank drove to the residence of Sir James +Ruthven in Eaton Square. Frank sent in his name and was shown up +to the drawing room. A minute later the door opened with a crash +and his old schoolfellow rushed in.</p> + +<p>"My dear, dear, old boy," he said wringing Frank's hand, "I am +glad to see you; but, bless me, how you have changed! How thin +you are, and how black! I should have passed you in the street +without knowing you; and you look years older than I do. But that +is no wonder after all you've gone through. Well, when did you +arrive, and where are your things? Why have you not brought them +here?"</p> + +<p>Frank said that he had left them at the hotel, as he was going +down early the next morning to Deal. He stayed, however, and +dined with his friend, whose father received him with the +greatest cordiality and kindness.</p> + +<p>On leaving the hotel next morning he directed his portmanteau +to be sent in the course of the day to Sir James Ruthven's. He +had bought a few things at Cape Coast, and had obtained a couple +of suits of clothes for immediate use at Liverpool.</p> + +<p>On arriving at Deal he found his sister much grown and very +well and happy. She was almost out of her mind with delight at +seeing him. He stayed two or three days with her and then +returned to town and took up his abode in Eaton Square.</p> + +<p>"Well, my dear boy, what are you thinking of doing?" Sir James +Ruthven asked next morning at breakfast. "You have had almost +enough of travel, I should think."</p> + +<p>"Quite enough, sir," Frank said. "I have made up my mind that +I shall be a doctor. The gold necklace which I showed you, which +Ammon Quatia gave me, weighs over twenty pounds, and as it is of +the purest gold it is worth about a thousand pounds, a sum amply +sufficient to keep me and pay my expenses till I have passed. +Besides, Mr. Goodenough has, I believe, left me something in his +will. I sent home one copy to his lawyer and have brought the +other with me. I must call on the firm this morning. I have also +some thirty pounds' weight in gold which was paid me by the king +for the goods he took, but this, of course, belongs to Mr. +Goodenough's estate."</p> + +<p>Upon calling upon the firm of lawyers, and sending in his +name, he was at once shown in to the principal.</p> + +<p>"I congratulate you on your safe return, sir," the gentleman +said. "You have called, of course, in reference to the will of +the late Mr. Goodenough."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Frank replied. "I sent home one copy from Coomassie and +have brought another with me."</p> + +<p>"We received the first in due course," the gentleman said, +taking the document Frank held out to him. "You are, of course, +acquainted with its contents."</p> + +<p>"No," Frank answered, "beyond the fact that Mr. Goodenough +told me he had left me a legacy."</p> + +<p>"Then I have pleasant news to give you," the lawyer said. "Mr. +Goodenough died possessed of about sixty thousand pounds. He left +fifteen thousand each to his only surviving nephew and niece. +Fifteen thousand pounds he has divided among several charitable +and scientific institutions. Fifteen thousand pounds he has left +to you."</p> + +<p>Frank gave a little cry of surprise.</p> + +<p>"The will is an eminently just and satisfactory one," the +lawyer said, "for Mr. Goodenough has had but little intercourse +with his relations, who live in Scotland, and they had no reason +to expect to inherit any portion of his property. They are, +therefore, delighted with the handsome legacy they have received. +I may mention that Mr. Goodenough ordered that in the event of +your not living to return to England, five thousand pounds of the +portion which would have come to you was to be paid to trustees +for the use of your sister, the remaining ten thousand to be +added to the sum to be divided among the hospitals."</p> + +<p>"This is indeed a surprise," Frank said; "and I shall be +obliged, sir, if you will at once draw out a paper for me to sign +settling the five thousand pounds upon my sister. Whatever may +happen then she will be provided for."</p> + +<p>The accession of this snug and most unexpected fortune in no +way altered Frank's views as to his future profession. He worked +hard and steadily and passed with high honors. He spent another +three years in hospital work, and then purchased a partnership in +an excellent West End practice. He is now considered one of the +most rising young physicians of the day. His sister keeps house +for him in Harley Street; but it is doubtful whether she will +long continue to do so. The last time Dick Ruthven was at home on +leave he persuaded her that it was her bounden duty to endeavor +to make civilian life bearable to him when he should attain +captain's rank, and, in accordance with his father's wish, retire +from the army, events which are expected to take place in a few +months' time.</p> + +<p>Ruthven often laughs and tells Frank that he is a good soldier +spoiled, and that it is a pity a man should settle down as a +doctor who had made his way in life "by sheer pluck."</p> + +<p>THE END</p> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of By Sheer Pluck, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BY SHEER PLUCK *** + +This file should be named shplk10h.htm or shplk10h.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, shplk11h.htm +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, shplk10ah.htm + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart hart@pobox.com + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> + + |